Jumbo Dl411

Original instructions
BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel

GUI-1 Control panel
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ................................................................... 1
1.1 The purpose of these instructions ......................................................1
2 Safety and Environmental Instructions ...................... 3

2.1 Safety instructions ............................................................................... 3
3 Main components ..........................................................5

3.1 Abbreviations ........................................................................................5
3.2 User interface ........................................................................................5
3.3 Display diagrams .................................................................................. 10
3.3.1 Settings, system .......................................................................... 14
3.3.2 Special functions ......................................................................... 15
3.3.3 Data display .................................................................................21
4 GUI-1 Control panel operation ..................................... 23

4.1 Panel startup ......................................................................................... 23
4.1.1 Normal startup .............................................................................23
4.1.2 Startup with code lock on ............................................................ 23
4.2 Using the menus ...................................................................................23
4.3 Settings submenus ...............................................................................24
4.4 Settings menu options ......................................................................... 26
4.4.1 Feed pressure settings ................................................................27
4.4.2 Maximum feed pressure setting (manual drilling) ........................31
4.4.3 Rotation pressure settings ...........................................................32
4.4.4 Triggering pressure of anti-jamming automatics ......................... 33
4.4.5 Percussion pressure settings ...................................................... 34
4.4.6 Stabilizer pressure control and deviation setting .........................35
4.4.7 Breakthrough settings (automatic drilling) ................................... 39
4.4.8 Rotation speed setting .................................................................43
4.4.9 Flushing settings ......................................................................... 44
4.4.10 Rushing settings (automatic drilling) ........................................... 46
4.4.11 Rushing control (automatic drilling) ............................................. 49
4.4.12 Power extractor settings (automatic drilling) ............................... 50
4.4.13 Minimum penetration (automatic drilling) .................................... 51
4.4.14 Tube amount ............................................................................... 51
4.4.15 Shank open and final percussion time settings (automatic
drilling) .........................................................................................52
4.4.16 Percussion mode (automatic drilling) .......................................... 53
4.4.17 Time and date ............................................................................. 54
4.4.18 Display language .........................................................................54
Copyright Sandvik
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.19 Fan settings .................................................................................55

4.4.20 Rock drill rotation speed during drilling ....................................... 60
4.5 Hole depth and drill rod counter reset to zero (TMS DD, TMS DDS,
S) ............................................................................................................ 60
4.6 Drilling angles ....................................................................................... 62
4.6.1 Drilling angle display TMS D, TMS DD and TMS DDS ............... 64
4.6.2 Drilling angle display FAN ........................................................... 65
4.6.3 Drilling angle display FAN + REMOTE USE ............................... 66
4.6.4 Operating principle of the TMS for DL43x ................................... 67
4.6.5 Drilling angle display mode (DL43x) ............................................73
4.6.6 Setting and clearing the angle reference plane (DL43x) ............. 75
4.7 Data display ...........................................................................................77
4.7.1 Manual rigs (TMS) .......................................................................78
4.7.2 One hole data rigs ....................................................................... 80
4.7.3 Fan automation rigs .....................................................................83
4.8 Special functions .................................................................................. 85
4.8.1 Basic calibration .......................................................................... 86
4.8.2 Selecting the rotation angle display .............................................122
4.8.3 Hole depth sensor calibration (TMS DDS, DD) ........................... 124
4.8.4 Control method ............................................................................125
4.8.5 Disable alarms .............................................................................131
4.8.6 Power extractor usage (automatic drilling if power extractor
installed) ...................................................................................... 132
4.8.7 Service ........................................................................................ 132
4.9 File transfer ........................................................................................... 145
4.9.1 File transfer from the rig to the USB memory ..............................147
4.9.2 File transfer from the USB memory to the rig ..............................149
5 Automatic drilling and uncoupling ..............................151

5.1 Starting automatic drilling and uncoupling ....................................... 151
5.1.1 Automatic drilling ......................................................................... 153
6 Troubleshooting ............................................................155
6.1 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 155
Copyright Sandvik
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 The purpose of these instructions
This manual describes operation of the GUI-1 control system user
interface.
Before operating the machine or performing procedures as described in this
manual, make sure you have read and understood the information given in
the operation and maintenance manuals supplied with the machine. Pay
special attention to the information in chapter 2 of those manuals "Safety
and environmental instructions".
Copyright Sandvik 1
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
This page is intentionally left blank
2 Copyright Sandvik
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
2 SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS

2.1 Safety instructions
Read the operation instructions before using the machine. The
operator must be familiar with the operation, service, and safety
instructions of the machine. The operator must also be familiar with
the relevant regulations and instructions in force at the work site.
Plan your work in advance in order to avoid accidents, damage, and
injury.
DANGER
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD!
Failure to follow instructions will cause death or severe injury.
Work on the electrical system and devices can only be performed by
a person with sufficient expertise and the qualifications required by
the authorities or under the supervision of a person with said
expertise and qualifications.
Before starting any electrical work, make sure that the system is
disconnected from the power supply and that the power has been
switched off.
Before performing any action, read the machines operating,
maintenance, and safety instructions.
After electrical work and before use of the rig, an electrical
inspection must be carried out on the electrical systems to detect
any errors or other faults related to the installation.
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD!
Movement of the machine and its parts could cause death or severe
injury.
Make sure that nobody enters the machines danger zone when the
machine is in use.
Copyright Sandvik 3
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4 Copyright Sandvik
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
3 MAIN COMPONENTS
3.1 Abbreviations
Abbreviations used in the following sections:
TMS D = angle display, no depth or speed display
TMS DD = angle and depth display, no speed display
TMS DDS = angle, depth and speed display
RC = rod changer
S = sequence functions
3.2 User interface
11 3
17 15
8
9
2
14 7 4 5 6 10 13 12 1 16
(1) SETTINGS (manual version)

DRILL PRESS. (Drilling pressures) > SET PRESSURES
FEED POT. MAX - feed pressure pot. max. value (manual drilling)
ANTI-JAM - triggering pressure of anti-jamming automatics (manual
drilling)
PERC. PRESS. - percussion pressure
STAB. PRESS. - stabilizer pressure (with proportionally controlled
stabilizer)
DRILL SET (Drilling settings)
ROT. SPEED - rotation speed
Copyright Sandvik 5
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
FLUSH > SET FLUSHING

- AIR CNTRL - minimum air flushing pressure
- WATER CNTRL - minimum water flushing pressure
TUBE AMOUNT - number of tubes in use
(1) SETTINGS (automatic version)
DRILL PRESS. (Drilling pressures) > SET PRESSURES
FEED PRESS. > FEED PRESSURE
- BASE FEED
- FEED DEV. - feed pressure deviation
- POT. MAX.
- TUBE WEIGHT - tube weight compensation
ROT. PRESS. > ROTATION PRESSURE
- BASE ROT. - base rotation pressure
- ROT. DEV. - rotation potentiometer deviation
- ANTI-JAM - triggering pressure of anti-jamming automatics
PERC. PRESS. - percussion pressure
STAB. PRESS. - stabilizer pressure deviation (with proportionally
controlled stabilizer)
DRILL SET (Drilling settings)
BREAKTHROUGH (Breakthrough settings)
- B.T. TOL. - breakthrough tolerance negative/positive
- B.T. SPEED - breakthrough limit speed
- B.T. DELAY - breakthrough delay time
- B.T. CONT. - breakthrough continuation on/off
ROT. SPEED - rotation speed
FLUSH > SET FLUSHING
- FLUSHING MODE - selecting the flushing mode for drilling and
uncoupling
- AIR CNTRL - minimum air flushing pressure
- WATER CNTRL - minimum water flushing pressure
- EXTRA FLUSH - extra flushing settings
RUSH > RUSHING
- RUSH SET - rushing settings
- RUSH CTRL - rushing control on/off
P. EXT. SET. > POWER EXT (option available if power extractor
installed)
- OPEN THREAD
- FINAL PERC.
- OTHER
MIN. PEN. - minimum penetration rate
6 Copyright Sandvik
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
EXTRA SET. > EXTRA SET.

- TUBE AMOUNT - number of tubes in use
- CAL. TIME
- PERC. MODE - percussion mode
(1) SETTINGS (fan automation)
In addition to the settings for automatic version:
FAN SET > FAN SETTINGS
STARTER TUBE - starter tube length
DM HOME - drilling modules home position
DEPTH MODE - hole depth-measuring reference rock/pivot
COLLAR PIPE - collar pipe approach mode
(2) ANGLE DISP (Drilling angle display, TMS D, TMS DD, TMS DDS)
tilt and rotation angles
tilt and rotation angles, and tilt angle reference (DL43x)
(3) ZERO SET (Reset counters)
zero tube count
zero depth count
clear navigation (fan automation version)
set and clear tilt angle reference (DL43x)
(4) DRILL UNCPL (Drill and uncouple)
start one hole drill and uncouple (automatic version)
display fan drilling menu (fan automation version)
- start fan drilling
- start one hole drill and uncouple
- test fan menu
- navigation
(5) DRILL (Drilling only, automatic version)
start drilling only
(6) UNCPL (Uncoupling only, automatic version)
start uncoupling only
(7) SPEC (Calibration and maintenance)
Calibration
percussion and feed pressures
stabilizer pressure (proportionally controlled stabilizer option)
adjust the rotation and feeding speeds for threading
adjust the magazine rotation speed (RC)
Copyright Sandvik 7
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
rotation and tilt angles of the feed (TMS D, DD, DDS)

depth sensor initialization (TMS DD, DDS)
calibrate fan automation sensors (fan automation version)
boom and carrier sensors (DL43x)
Maintenance functions
Test I/O mode: shows the changes of status in the system outputs and
the GUI-1 panel inputs (on/off), shows the status of the systems digital
inputs, shows the current values of the depth and angle sensors, and
shows the status of the analog inputs of the GUI-1 panel.
display the last one hundred error messages
display the modules status and system error counters
select feed pressure control method
temporarily disable flushing, SLU and drill stop alarms
select power extractor, if installed
(8) DATA DISP (Data display)
The first page contains the following information:
current hole depth
current penetration rate
current percussion, feed, rotation and flushing pressures
control method indicator
feed control pressure request
extra flushing indicator
Next pages contain the following information:
tube count
drifter position
drifter front and rear settings
stinger pressures (fan automation version)
bit meters (fan automation version)
hole number (fan automation version)
breakthrough and multi-flush settings (fan automation version)
power extractor usage
statistics
(9) PROG (Programming)
Create, edit, save and delete drill plans (fan automation version)
(10) BIT (Bit meters, fan automation version)
settings
zero bit meters
(11) INFO (Info display)
8 Copyright Sandvik
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
If pressed from Sandvik display, info button shows the following

information:
software version
software install date
installed options
If an alarm is active shows the following:
error message further details
(12) OK key
confirm selection or view other options
(13) ESC (Escape key)
navigate backwards in the menu structure
(14) STOP (Stop key, automatic version, S)
stop automatic functions (automatic version)
stop threading sequence (S)
stop automatic functions (fan automation version)
(15) Menu keys
menu selection keys
(16) Adjusting knob
used for inputting various settings and selecting options
(17) Home key
return from any menu to the Sandvik display
Copyright Sandvik 9
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
3.3 Display diagrams

Manual drilling
INFO ZERO
SET
A8150-1 (v1.0)(TS) 3.xxx
DATA
SANDVIK DISP
09-01-15 09:45 ANGLE
PROG
DISP
SPEC SET
STOP * DRILLING ANGLES *
DRILL DRILL UNCPL
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE MENU UNCPL
BIT ESC OK
ESC=QUIT OPERATION F D
TILT ROT
SPECIALS
BASIC CAL. SERVICE DISABLE
CALIBR. L. SEN. ALARMS
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION
HOLE PEN.
SETTINGS DEPTH
FEED
RATE
PERC.
DRILL DRILL SYSTEM PRESS PRESS
PRESS. SET
ROT. FLUSH.
PRESS. PRESS.
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET- PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-
TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION
SET PRESSURES DRILL SET TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION
FEED
POT.MAX.
ANTI-
JAM
PERC.
PRESS.
STAB. S
PRESS.
ROT.
SPEED
FLUSH TUBE
AMOUNT
SET ZERO
TUBE DEPTH
COUNT COUNT
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET- NUMBER OF TUBES IN USE:

SET FLUSHING
TURN KNOB TO CHANGE THE NUMBER
AIR WATER OK = ACCEPT, ESC = NO CHANGES
CNTRL CNTRL
Figure: (D) Drilling angles display only with direction option, (PE) Power extractor selection only
with power extractor option, (S) Stabilizer pressure selection only with proportionally controlled
stabilizer
10 Copyright Sandvik
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
One hole automation
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE MENU

ESC=QUIT OPERATION
SPECIALS INFO ZERO

SET
A8150-1 (v1.0)(TS) 3.xxx
BASIC CAL. SERVICE NEXT DATA
CALIBR. L. SEN. SANDVIK DISP
09-01-15 09:45 ANGLE
PROG
DISP
* DRILLING ANGLES *
SPEC SET
STOP
DRILL
UNCPL
DRILL UNCPL BIT ESC OK F D
TILT ROT
ESC=QUIT OPERATION
SPEC. SET
CONTROL DISABLE POWER
METHOD ALARMS EXTR.
HOLE PEN.
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET- DEPTH RATE
FEED PERC.
SET DEPTH WITH KNOB AND START SETTINGS PRESS PRESS
DRILLING : OK = START, ESC = CANCEL ROT. FLUSH.
DRILL DRILL SYSTEM
PRESS. PRESS.
PRESS. SET
METERS
TOGGLE GRADE GRADE GRADE

BT 10 1 0.1

SET ZERO
READY TO START PROGRAM
DRILL SET TUBE DEPTH
UNCOUPLING BREAK- ROT. FLUSH NEXT COUNT COUNT
OK=START, ESC=CANCEL THROUGH SPEED

TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET- TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION
SET PRESSURES TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION
DRILL SET
FEED ROT. PERC. STAB. S BREAKTHROUGH
PRESS. PRESS. PRESS. PRESS. RUSH P.EXT. MIN. EXTRA
B.T. B.T. B.T. B.T. SET PE PEN. SET
TOL. SPEED DELAY CONT.

ROT. PRESSURE TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION
BASE ROT. ANTI- SET FLUSHING EXTRA SET.

ROT. DEV. JAM
FLUSHING AIR WATER EXTRA TUBE CAL. PERC.
MODE CNTRL CNTRL FLUSH AMOUNT TIME MODE

FEED PRESSURE PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

PE
BASE
FEED
FEED
DEV.
POT.
MAX.
TUBE
WEIGHT
RUSHING POWER EXT.
RUSH RUSH OPEN FINAL OTHER
SET CTRL THREAD PERC.
Figure: (D) Drilling angles display only with direction option, (PE) Power extractor selection only
with power extractor option, (S) Stabilizer pressure selection only with proportionally controlled
stabilizer
Copyright Sandvik 11
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
DL43x

ESC=QUIT OPERATION
ZERO
SPECIALS INFO
A8150-1 (v1.0)(TS) 3.xxx
SET
DATA
SANDVIK DISP
BASIC CAL. SERVICE NEXT 09-01-15 09:45 ANGLE
CALIBR. L. SEN. PROG
DISP
SPEC SET
STOP * DRILLING ANGLES *
DRILL DRILL UNCPL BIT ESC OK
UNCPL
TILT ROT
ESC=QUIT OPERATION REF TILT:
...ESC
SPEC. SET
METHOD ALARMS EXTR.
HOLE PEN.
DEPTH RATE
FEED PERC.
SET DEPTH WITH KNOB AND START PRESS PRESS
DRILLING : OK = START, ESC = CANCEL
ROT. FLUSH.
PRESS. PRESS.
METERS

BT 10 1 0.1
A PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

READY TO START PROGRAM TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION SET ZERO
UNCOUPLING SETTINGS TUBE SET CLEAR DEPTH
DRILL DRILL SYSTEM COUNT REF. REF. COUNT
OK=START, ESC=CANCEL PRESS. SET
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET- TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION
DRILL SET DRILL SET
SET PRESSURES
BREAK- ROT. FLUSH NEXT RUSH P.EXT. MIN. EXTRA
FEED ROT. PERC. STAB. S THROUGH SPEED SET PE PEN. SET.
PRESS. PRESS. PRESS. PRESS.
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET- TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION
SET FLUSHING EXTRA SET.
BREAKTHROUGH
FLUSHING AIR WATER EXTRA TUBE CAL. PERC.
B.T. B.T. B.T. B.T. MODE CNTRL CNTRL FLUSH AMOUNT TIME MODE
PE
RUSHING POWER EXT.
RUSH RUSH OPEN FINAL OTHER
SET CTRL THREAD PERC.
Figure: (A) Displays available with automatic drilling, (PE) Power extractor selection only with
power extractor option, (S) Stabilizer pressure selection only with proportionally controlled
stabilizer
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
With FAN automation
CURRENT PLAN ESC = Main display

LEVEL: FAN:
STOPE: DATE:
DRIFT: TIME:
SELECT
PLAN
EDIT
ACTIVE
A

ESC=QUIT OPERATION
SPECIALS LEVEL: FAN:
STOPE: DATE:
BASIC CAL. SERVICE NEXT DRIFT: TIME:
CALIBR. L. SEN.
INFO ZERO
SET
SELECT
PLAN
CREATE
PLAN
EDIT
ACTIVE
DELETE
PLAN
B
A8150-1 (v1.0)(TS) v03.500.01.156
DATA
SANDVIK DISP
09-01-15 09:45 ANGLE
PROG DISP
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE MENU SPEC SET

ESC=QUIT OPERATION STOP
DRILL DRILL UNCPL BIT ESC OK
UNCPL
SPEC. SET
* DRILLING ANGLES *
METHOD ALARMS EXTR.
TILT ROT
PP V: DM: RST:
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE H: FST:
ESC = QUIT OPERATION
BIT CHANGE: ESC = Quit BIT METERS

STATUS : OFF
SETTINGS ZERO
BIT METERS : ---- M
BIT M
BIT LIFE : ---- M
START ONE TEST NAVIG. HOLE PEN.
FAN HOLE FAN DEPTH RATE
FEED PERC.
PRESS PRESS
ROT. FLUSH.
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET- PRESS. PRESS.
SET DEPTH WITH KNOB AND START SETTINGS

DRILLING : OK = START, ESC = CANCEL
DRILL DRILL FAN SYSTEM
METERS PRESS SET SET

BT 10 1 0.1
SET ZERO
TUBE END DEPTH
COUNT FAN COUNT

READY TO START PROGRAM TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION
UNCOUPLING DRILL SET

OK=START, ESC=CANCEL BREAK- ROT. FLUSH NEXT
THROUGH SPEED PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE
FAN SETTINGS
STARTER DM DEPTH COLLAR
TUBE HOME MODE PIPE

SET PRESSURES
FEED ROT. PERC. STAB. S
PRESS. PRESS. PRESS. PRESS.
SET FLUSHING DRILL SET

FLUSHING AIR WATER EXTRA RUSH P.EXT. MIN. EXTRA
MODE CNTRL CNTRL FLUSH SET PE PEN. SET.

BREAKTHROUGH
B.T. B.T. B.T. B.T.
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET- PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET- PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-
TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION
PE
RUSHING POWER EXT. EXTRA SET.
RUSH RUSH OPEN FINAL OTHER TUBE CAL. PERC.
SET CTRL THREAD PERC. AMOUNT TIME MODE
Figure: (S) Stabilizer pressure selection only with proportionally controlled stabilizer, (PE) Power
extractor selection only with power extractor option, (A) Data transfer system installed, (B) Without
data transfer system
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
3.3.1 Settings, system

SETTINGS
DRILL DRILL FAN * SYSTEM
PRESS. SET SET

SYSTEM
SELECT SET SET
LANGUAGE TIME DATE
CHOOSE SETTING, SET WITH KNOB CHOOSE SETTING, SET WITH KNOB CHOOSE SETTING, SET WITH KNOB
OK = ACCEPT, ESC = NO CHANGES OK = ACCEPT, ESC = NO CHANGES OK = ACCEPT, ESC = NO CHANGES
ENGLISH USER SET SET SET SET SET

HOURS MINUTES YEAR MONTH DAY
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
3.3.2 Special functions

ESC=QUIT OPERATION
SPECIALS
BASIC CAL. SERVICE NEXT
CALIBR. L. SEN.
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE MENU PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE MENU
ESC=QUIT OPERATION ESC=QUIT OPERATION
PSW? PSW? SERVICE SPEC. SET
FILE TEST SHOW SHOW CONTROL DISABLE POWER
TRANSFER I/O ERRORS STATUS METHOD ALARMS EXTR.
PE
OK OK
PSW?

TING. ESC=QUIT OPERATION
Linear sensor raw: PSW?
DRIVE ROCK DRILL TO
CALIBRATION BACK POSITION
AND PRESS OK WHEN READY
CAL. CAL.
SENSOR HYDR. ESC=Cancel operation
OK
OK
DISABLE OR ENABLE WATER.PR.,
OK AIR PR.,SLU,DR.STOP ALARMS
OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES
ESC=QUIT OPERATION DISABLE ENABLE
ALARMS ALARMS
Linear sensor raw: SPEC. SET
DRIVE ROCK DRILL TO TORQUE PI INTEG.
FRONT POSITION CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
ESC=Cancel operation
Figure: (PSW?) Enter password, PE - With fan automation, power extractor if installed
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Calibration

CALIBRATION
CAL. CAL.
SENSOR HYDR.
CAL SENSOR
CAL. CAL.
TILT. ROT.
TING. ESC=QUIT OPERATION TING. ESC=QUIT OPERATION
CALIBRATE TILT CALIBRATE ROT.

GROWTH SCALE GROWTH SCALE SCALE NEXT
DIREC. CALIBR. DIREC. ZERO CALIBR. MENU

CHOOSE POSITIVE DIRECTION CALIBRATE ROT.

OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES SCALE ROT
ROT. SCALING FACTOR 1: SYS. PLANE
BACKWARD FORWARD
TURN KNOB TO ADJUST THE VALUE
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SCALE PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-
OK
OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES TING. ESC=QUIT OPERATION
SENSOR SCALING FACTOR
ROT. SCALING FACTOR 2: ROT.PLAN E
6000 0...+ - 180 0...360
FAN
PLANE
VERT
PLANE
OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES TURN KNOB TO ADJUST THE VALUE
OK
OK T1 = T2 =
DRIVE BOOM + FEED TO VERTICAL
T1 = T2 = POSITION. PRESS OK WHEN READY
T1 = 6294 T2 = -121
DRIVE BOOM + FEED TO VERTICAL ROTATE TO VERTICAL UP,
POSITION. PRESS OK WHEN READY AND PRESS OK WHEN READY
OK
T1 = 6294 T2 = -121
OK
ROTATE FEED TO HORIZ. RIGHT,
T1 = T2 =
CHOOSE POSITIVE DIRECTION ESC=Cancel operation ROTATE COUNTERCLOCKWISE 50
OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES DEG., AND PRESS OK WHEN READY
CW CCW OK
T1 = T2 = OK
ROTATE COUNTERCLOCKWISE 50
DEG., AND PRESS OK WHEN READY T1 = 6294 T2 = -121
ROTATE FEED TO DESIRED 0 DEG. ESC=Cancel operation ROTATE FEED TO HORIZ. LEFT
PRESS OK WHEN READY AND PRESS OK WHEN READY
DEGREES ESC=Cancel operation

ESC=Cancel operation OK
OK
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel

CALIBRATION
CAL. CAL.
SENSOR HYDR.

CAL HYDR
PERC. FEED. CAL.
PRESS PRESS FLOW
CHOOSE CAL. POINT, SET CORRECT **FEED PRESSURE AUTO CALIB.** PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-
VALUES AND PRESS OK. ESC=QUIT CAL. PHASE : TING. ESC=QUIT OPERATION
MESSAGE :
BAR [ ]
CONTROL OUT
FEED PRS
:
: BAR CAL FLOW
PERC. PERC. MAGAZ. ROT. THREAD
PRESS OK TO START, ESC = QUIT
100 150 ROT. SPEED ADJUST
CHOOSE CAL. POINT, SET CORRECT

VALUES AND PRESS OK. ESC=QUIT
CHOOSE SETTING, SET WITH KNOB SET ROT. LOWER CAL SPEED CHOOSE SETTING, SET WITH KNOB
100 BAR [ XXX ]
OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES
PERC. PERC.
100 150 TURN KNOB TO ADJUST THE VALUE
MAGAZ. MAGAZ. THREAD THREAD THREAD THREA D
IN OUT FWD CCW BWD CW
OK

VALUES AND PRESS OK. ESC=QUIT GIVE ACTUAL LOWER RPM MEAS.:
150 BAR [ XXX ] RPM
PERC. PERC. TURN KNOB TO ADJUST THE VALUE

100 150 OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES
OK OK
SET ROT. UPPER CAL SPEED:

OK
GIVE ACTUAL UPPER RPM MEAS.:

RPM

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
DL43x calibration

CALIBRATION
CAL. CAL.
SENSOR HYDR.

CAL SENSOR PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

CAL. CAL. CAL. NEXT
CARR. BOOM FEED MENU CALIBRATION
CAL. CAL. CAL.
ROT. TILT ZOOM
LEVEL CARRIER IN SIDE AND

FORWARD TILT DIRECTIONS
...PRESS OK WHEN READY
SIDE = 0 FWD = 0
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET- ZOOM SENSOR RAW : 22
ESC=CANCEL TING. ESC=QUIT OPERATION
DRIVE BOOM ZOOM TO
CALIBRATE TILT BACK POSITION
GROWTH
DIREC. ESC=CANCEL OPERATION
DRIVE BOOM SWING TO ZERO POS

OK
BM SWING = 0
ESC=CANCEL
CHOOSE POSITIVE DIRECTION ZOOM SENSOR RAW : 1022
OK = ACCEPT, ESC = NO CHANGES DRIVE BOOM ZOOM TO
FRONT POSITION
BACKWARD FORWARD ESC=CANCEL OPERATION
DRIVE FEED TILT VERTICAL,

DRILL BIT UP. PRESS OK
WHEN READY
FEED TILT = 0 PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-
CARR. FWD = 0.00 BM LIFT = 0.00 TING. ESC=QUIT OPERATION
ESC=CANCEL
CALIBRATE ROT.
GROWTH SCALE SCALE ROT.
DIREC. ZERO SYS. PLANE
ROTATE FEED TO DESIRED 0 DEG. PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SCALE PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-
CHOOSE POSITIVE DIRECTION
PRESS OK WHEN READY OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES TING. ESC = QUIT OPERATION
OK = ACCEPT, ESC = NO CHANGES
DEGREES ROT. PLANE
FROM 0 FROM 0 FAN VERT
CW CCW ESC=CANCEL OPERATION TO+-180 TO 360 PLANE PLANE
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Fan Calibration
CALIBRATION
CAL. CAL.
SENSOR HYDR.

CAL SENSOR
CAL. CAL. CAL.
TILT. ROT. FAN

CAL. FAN
SWING DM POS ZOOM
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR
SENSOR SCALING FACTOR DM Pos sensor raw: 23 Zoom sensor raw: 23
DRIVE DRILLING UNIT TO DRIVE BOOM ZOOM TO

6000 BACK POSITION FULLY IN POSITION
AND PRESS OK WHEN READY AND PRESS OK WHEN READY
OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES ESC=Cancel operation ESC=Cancel operation
OK OK OK
T1: -7015 DM Pos sensor raw:1022 Zoom sensor raw:1023
DRIVE BOOM SWING TO VERTICAL DRIVE DRILLING UNIT TO DRIVE BOOM ZOOM TO
POSITION. PRESS OK WHEN READY FRONT POSITION FULLY OUT POSITION
AND PRESS OK WHEN READY AND PRESS OK WHEN READY
ESC=Cancel operation ESC=Cancel operation ESC=Cancel operation
Tilt, rotation and hydraulic calibration, see the main calibration display
diagram.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Service

ESC=QUIT OPERATION
SERVICE
FILE TEST SHOW SHOW
TRANSFER I/O ERRORS STATUS
FILE TRANSFER: ESC=QUIT ALARMS: OK=Browsing ESC=Quit

USB: DataTraveller 2.0 ALARM DATE TIME MOD0:0000 MOD1:0000 MOD2:0000
MOD3:0000 MOD4:0000 MOD5:0000
STATUS: Connected Electr.disturb. 00--03-04 05:58:00 MOD6:0000 MOD7: MOD8:
FROM TO Electr.disturb. 00--03-04 04:24 MOD9: MOD10
USB USB Alarm panel err. 00--02-28 06:38 SCOMM CHECK: CSUM
OK
INPUTS: OK=Next page ESC=Quit
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE S8:0 S33:0 DST:0 STATUS: OK=Browsing ESC=Quit
ESC=QUIT ESC=QUIT UC off bus error 4
S9:0 S34:0 PP:0
FROM USB TO USB S10:0 S35:0 JACK:0 BC_queue_o/flow 0
S11:0 S41:0 CKEY:0 VC status error +1
INSTR. HYDR. CALIB. COUNT. S30:0 S125:0 PPBY: Mod0 off bus err 0
INSTR. HYDR. CALIB. COUNT. S32:0 SLU:0 Mod1 off bus err 0
Mod2 off bus err 0
OK
... OK
FROM USB:
TYPE: Instrument
ESC=QUIT TO USB: ESC=QUIT ...
Instrument_110121_135119.xml TYPE: Instrument
DATE: 21/01/11 13:51 SAVE AS:Instrument_110121_135119.xml OK
OK
NEXT PREV. COPY SAVE
FROM USB: ESC=QUIT

TYPE: Instrument
Instrument_110121_135119.xml
FILE TRANSFER SUCCESSFUL!
NEXT PREV. COPY
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
3.3.3 Data display
HOLE PEN.
DEPTH RATE
FEED PERC.
PRESS. PRESS.
ROT. FLUSH.
PRESS. PRESS.
OK
TUBE PEN.
COUNT RATE
FEED PERC.
PRESS. PRESS.
ROT. FLUSH.
PRESS. PRESS.
A OK OK
HOLE DEPTH SETTING: m *DATA LOG*

PIV. POINT SETTING: m
ROT. ANGLE SETTING: deg PERC. TIME/HOLE: min
TILT ANGLE SETTING: deg TOTAL METERS: m
TIME LEFT: Total min TOTAL PERC. TIME: h
Drilling min TOTAL PWRPACK ON: h
Uncoupling min TOTAL PWR EXT:
OK=Next page, ESC=Quit OK=Next page, ESC=Quit
OK
ELAPSED TIME: Total min
Drilling min
Uncoupling min
PERC. TIME/HOLE: min
TOTAL METERS: m
TOTAL PERC. TIME: h
TOTAL POWERPACK ON: h
OK=Next page, ESC=Quit
OK
TOTAL PWR EXT:
BREAKTHROUGH:
Cont: Min: Max:
OK=Next page, ESC=Quit
Figure: (A) Automatic version
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Data display, fan
HOLE DEPTH SETTING: m

HOLE PEN. PIV. POINT SETTING: m
DEPTH RATE ROT. ANGLE SETTING: deg
FEED PERC. TILT ANGLE SETTING: deg
PRESS. PRESS. TIME LEFT: Total min
Drilling min
ROT. FLUSH. Uncoupling min
PRESS. PRESS. OK=Next page, ESC=Quit
OK OK
HOLE BIT ELAPSED TIME: Total min

NO. MTRS Drilling min
Uncoupling min
TUBE BIT PERC. TIME/HOLE: min
COUNT MAX. TOTAL METERS: m
TOTAL PERC. TIME: h
FRONT REAR TOTAL POWERPACK ON: h
STING. STING OK=Next page, ESC=Quit
OK OK
DFTR TOTAL PWR EXT:

TUBE POS. cm
COUNT BREAKTHROUGH:
FEED FRONT Cont: Min: Max:
PRESS. POS cm
MULTIFLUSH:
ROT. REAR Depth(m): Count:
cm
PRESS. POS. OK=Next page, ESC=Quit
OK
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4 GUI-1 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION

4.1 Panel startup
4.1.1 Normal startup
The following display appears during normal start-up:
A8150-1 (TS) 3.xxx.xx
13-08-12 10:00
The top line of the display shows the version number of the current
software, as well as the status of some settings. The bottom line shows
time and date.
1. A8150-1 = end of the device serial number
2. (TS) = automatic equipment uncoupling setting
TS = tube, slow
TQ = tube, quick
RS = rod, slow
RQ = rod, quick
3. 3.xxx.xx = firmware source code version
4. 13-08-12 10:00 = date and time (YY-MM-DD HH:MM)
4.1.2 Startup with code lock on
If the following display is shown on the panel after power-on, the panel is
code locked, and certain settings cannot be accessed and modified without
the access password.
<< < CODE LOCK >> >
Sandvik
15 ---01 ---98 13.34
If code lock is on, values under the SETTINGS menu can be viewed but not
changed. The only exception is TUBE AMOUNT value.
4.2 Using the menus

Most of the work with the GUI-1 panel involves the use of menus. There are
two main display types on the GUI-1 panel: menu and data displays.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Menu display
Guide display
MENU NAME
MENU MENU MENU MENU
OPTION 1 OPTION 2 OPTION 3 OPTION 4
W G B O
W = white B = black
G = grey O = orange
The upper part of the display contains the name of the menu and
instructions.
The lower part of the display features four windows containing text, from
which other menus can be opened. To access a particular menu, press the
colored key below the window in question. By pressing the grey key, for
example, you will enter MENU OPTION 2.
If the menu is locked, you need to enter the password to access the menu.
To go back in the menu structure, press the ESC key. You can always
return to the initial display (Sandvik display) by pressing the ESC key a
sufficient number of times, or by pressing the HOME key.
Data display
In most data displays the new value is set by turning the adjusting knob. To
increase the value, turn the knob clockwise; to decrease the value, turn the
knob counter-clockwise. The new setting is confirmed by pressing the OK
key. The original value is retained by pressing the ESC key.
Nearly all of the settings are adjusted as described above. All exceptions
are explained separately.
4.3 Settings submenus

The setting function is activated by pressing the SET key, whereby the first
submenu is displayed:
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
DRILL PRESS (automatic drilling option)

- Feed pressure settings
Base feed
Feed deviation
Potentiometer maximum value
Tube weight compensation
- Rotation pressure settings
Base rotation
Rotation deviation
Anti-jam triggering pressure
- Percussion pressure settings
- Stabilizer pressure (proportionally controlled stabilizer option)
DRILL PRESS (manual option)
- Potentiometer maximum value
- Anti-jam triggering pressure
- Percussion pressure
- Stabilizer pressure (proportionally controlled stabilizer option)
DRILL SET
- Breakthrough settings (automatic drilling option)
- Rotation speed setting
- Flushing settings
- Rushing settings (automatic drilling option)
- Power extractor settings (automatic drilling option)
- Minimum penetration (automatic drilling option)
- Tube amount
- Time settings (automatic drilling option)
- Percussion mode (automatic drilling option)
FAN SET (fan automation version)
- Starter tube
- Drilling module home
- Depth mode
- Collar pipe settings
SYSTEM
- Language
- Time
- Date
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4 Settings menu options

The following sections explain how settings values are checked and
changed. Note that most of these settings can only be viewed if the code
lock is not active.
To increase numerical values, turn the adjusting knob clockwise; to
decrease numerical values, turn the adjusting knob counter-clockwise.
Non-numerical values are changed by selecting the new setting with the
color keys (selected value is highlighted with thick line).
Confirm the new value and return to previous menu level by pressing the
OK key. To leave the value unchanged press the ESC key.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.1 Feed pressure settings
Base feed pressure request and feed deviation (automatic mode)

The feed pressure potentiometer allows the user to adjust feed pressure
during drilling according to the drilling conditions.
The base feed pressure setting, feed deviation setting, and potentiometer
position are the starting point for calculation of the base system feed
pressure request ( feed request before feed compensation calculation ).
Pos. 5
Negative Positive
feed deviation feed deviation
Pos. 1 Pos. 10
Base feed is the pressure request value at position 5 before other factors
such as drilling angle drifter mass, and tube mass are taken into account.
Between positions 5 and 1 the feed request is reduced by up to the feed
deviation amount.
Between positions 5 and 10 the feed request is increased by up to the
feed deviation amount.
The feed pressure at position 1 is limited to the minimum allowed system
feed pressure. Between positions 5 and 1 if base feed minus feed
deviation is less than the minimum feed pressure then pressure request
is adjusted from base feed to minimum feed.
For example:
Base feed pressure = 35
Feed deviation = 25 bar
Minimum feed pressure = 12 bar
Base feed - Feed deviation = 35 - 25 = 10 bar
10 bar is lower that minimum allowed feed pressure 12 bar, so for
position 5 to 1 adjust from 35 bar to 12 bar.
Between positions 5 and 10 feed pressure is calculated as normally.
The operator can modify the base feed value and the feed deviation as
follows:
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
1. Select SET to access the SETTINGS menu.

2. Select DRILL PRESS. > FEED PRESS.
3. To modify base feed value select BASE FEED. and turn the adjusting
knob. Press OK to accept the changes or ESC to return without making
changes.
4. To modify feed deviation value select FEED DEV. and turn the adjusting
knob. Press OK to accept the changes or ESC to return without making
changes.
Feed pressure compensation calculation

Other factors which affect the feed pressure request are as follows:
Feed pressure potentiometer position
Drilling rotation angle
Rock drill weight compensation
Tube weight compensation
Tube count
The effect of these compensations is to increase feed pressure for up
holes, and to reduce feed pressure for down holes. The amount of
compensation (increase or reduction) is greatest when drilling vertically
upwards (maximum increase) or vertically downwards (maximum
reduction).
After the initial compensation then the compensation is increased or
decreased after addition of each subsequent tube or rod.
Rock drill weight compensation is an internal system value and is set during
factory calibration. Tube weight compensation can be adjusted by the
operator.
A more detailed explanation of tube weight compensation is give in section
4.4.10. Tube or rod weight compensation (automatic drilling).
Potentiometer maximum value

This setting is used to adjust the maximum feed pressure value when
drilling manually.
To check or change the current setting:
1. Select the submenu DRILL PRESS., FEED POT. MAX (manual option),
or DRILL PRESS, FEED PRESS., POT. MAX (automatic drilling option).
2. Change value with adjusting knob and save by pressing OK key.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Tube or rod weight compensation (automatic drilling)

Tube/rod weight compensation is used to compensate the effect of tube
weight on feed pressure ( see also section 4.4.9 ). Three values are used to
define tube weight compensation:
Tube weight 1
Tube weight 2 (only relevant for down holes)
Feed pressure request point used to select if tube weight 1 or tube
weight 2 should be used.
Tube weight compensation, drilling up holes

For up-holes the feed pressure request will be increased by amount of the
tube weight 1 setting, adjusted for drilling angle, for each tube added.
For example if base feed is 90 bar, potentiometer in position 5 , rock drill
weight internal system setting is 10 bar, and tube weight 1 setting is 100
( unit of 0.01 bar ), and 15 tubes have been added, and drilling direction
vertically up, then the feed pressure is calculated as follows,
Feed pressure request = 90 bar + 10 bar + ( 15 tubes * 1 bar ) = 115 bar.
Tube weight compensation, drilling horizontal holes

For a horizontal hole, potentiometer in position 5, the tube weight mass and
rock drill mass have no effect, and a small fixed side hole compensation is
used
Feed pressure request = 90 bar + ( 15 tubes * 0.2 bar per tube ) = 93 bar.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Tube weight compensation, drilling down holes

For down holes after adding a tube the feed pressure request is reduced
initially by tube weight 1 setting ( adjusted for drilling angle ), and then after
the pressure request reaches the lower feed compensation point, by the
tube weight 2 setting ( adjusted for drilling angle ). In this way some
sensitivity of control over feed pressure is possible even for long down
holes, where the compensated feed pressure request can become small.
Overall compensated
feed pressure request
(bar) Use tube weight 1
setting
Use tube weight 2

setting
Feed prs. point

System minimum feed prs.
Number of tubes in hole
For example for a hole drilled vertically downwards, potentiometer in

position 5, and the following settings,
Base feed = 40 bar
Rock drill weight compensation = 10 bar ( internal system setting )
Tube weight 1 setting = 1 bar
Tube weight 2 setting = 0.1 bar
Feed prs. pt = 20 bar
Tube count = 15
Feed prs. request = 40 bar - 10 bar - ( 10 tubes * 1 bar ) - ( 5 tubes * 0.1
bar) = 19.5 bar.
(In this example the feed pressure point of 20 bars is reached after adding
10 tubes, so all following tubes are compensated with the lower
compensation value.)
Tube weight settings and the selection feed pressure point can be changed
as follows:
1. Select the submenu REGULATOR as instructed in the chapter "Using
the submenus".
2. Select TUBE WEIGHT. Select the value to be changed using the menu
keys (TUBE WEIGHT 1, TUBE WEIGHT 2, FEED PRS. PT.). The value
to be changed will be highlighted. Change the value (note units!) and
press OK to save or ESC to leave without changes.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.2 Maximum feed pressure setting (manual drilling)

This setting defines the manual mode drilling feed pressure level (bar)
when the feed pressure potentiometer is turned to its maximum value (10).
The larger the value the lower the control resolution will be.
Note! When drilling manually, there is no compensation to take into
account drilling angles or rock drill and tube weight
Pos. 5 (Maximum feed pressure / 2)
Below minimum
feed value, the rock drill is halted
Pos. 2 Pos. 10
Minimum feed Maximum feed
pressure
The operator can modify the maximum feed pressure for manual drilling
and the feed deviation as follows:
2. Select DRILL PRESS.
3. Select FEED POT. MAX. Modify maximum feed value and press OK to
save. Press ESC to leave without changes.
Halting rock drill movement in manual drilling mode

If the pressure request goes below the minimum allowed system feed
pressure value, the feed pressure will be limited to the this feed pressure
value and the rock drill will be halted.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.3 Rotation pressure settings
Basic rotation pressure level and rotation deviation when drilling in automatic
mode with torque control
When torque control is selected the automatic drilling control system
maintains rotation pressure at the pressure request value set by the
operator.
The rotation pressure request is calculated from the base rotation pressure
setting, the rotation deviation setting, and potentiometer position.
Base rotation pressure request and deviation are set from the SETTINGS /
SET PRESSURES / ROT. PRESSURE menu.
Pos.5
( Base rotation
pressure)
Negative rotation Positive rotation

pressure deviation pressure deviation
Pos.1 Pos.10
(Base rotation pressure (Base rotation pressure
deviation) + deviation)
Base rotation pressure is the pressure request value at position 5.

Between positions 5 and 1 the pressure request is reduced by up to the
rotation deviation amount.
Between positions 5 and 10 the pressure request is increased by up to
the rotation deviation amount.
The pressure request at position 1 is limited to the minimum allowed
rotation pressure. If the base rotation pressure minus rotation deviation is
less than the minimum allowed rotation pressure then pressure request is
adjusted between base value and minimum value.
The operator can modify the base rotation value and the deviation as
follows:
1. Select the submenu SETTINGS as instructed in the chapter Using the
submenus.
2. Select DRILL PRESS submenu, the ROT. PRESS menu.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
3. Select BASE ROT. Modify base value and press OK to save. ESC to
leave without changes. Normally base rotation will be set to the value
suitable for normal drilling conditions.
4. Select ROT. DEV. Modify deviation value and press OK to save. ESC to
leave without changes. If deviation is set to zero then the potentiometer
position will have no effect and the request will be the base value.
HOLE
DEPTH
0.00 PEN.
RATE
0.00
FEED PERC.
PRESS. 36 PRESS. 0
ROT. # FLUSH.
PRESS. 52 0 PRESS. 72
The pressure request is shown on the drilling display.

4.4.4 Triggering pressure of anti-jamming automatics
This setting is used for defining the pressure level (bar) at which the anti-
jamming automatics is activated. Normally, suitable values are 70...135 bar.
Checking or changing the current setting:
2. Select DRILL. PRESS.
3. Select ANTI-JAM (manual version) or ROT. PRESS. > ANTI-JAM
(automatic version).
The current triggering pressure of the anti-jamming automatics is displayed.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.5 Percussion pressure settings

The following percussion pressure values can be set from the SETTINGS >
SET PRESSURES > PERC. PRESSURE menu.
Drill pressure full-power percussion pressure when drilling. Normally
the value is between 150 and 160 bar (min. 100 bar) depending on the
type of equipment used and on drilling direction.
Final percussion pressure pressure used during final percussion when
loosening threads before automatic uncoupling ( drill and uncouple
mode ).
Half percussion percussion pressure used when drilling in reduced
power mode (collaring mode, retry after jamming, flushing or rushing
error).
Power extractor used if power extractor is installed. This is the pressure
used when power extractor is active.
The operator can modify these values as follows:
1. Select the submenu SETTINGS
2. Select first DRILL PRESS > PERC. PRESS.
3. Select the value to be changed with the appropriate color key. Modify the
value with the adjustment knob and press OK to save. ESC to leave
without changes.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.6 Stabilizer pressure control and deviation setting

This setting is available if the machine is delivered with the proportionally
controlled stabilizer pressure option.
Stabilizer pressure when rotation angle sensor installed (TMS D, DD,

DDS options)
Stabilizer pressure depends on the following values
Feed pressure
Hole rotation angle
Maximum stabilizer pressure is limited to 110 bar and minimum pressure to
50 bar.
Within the limit values as feed pressure increases, then stabilizer pressure
increases.
As hole rotation angle changes from vertical down to vertical up, then within
limit values the stabilizer pressure decreases.
Default stabilizer pressure control (deviation is 0%) is shown in the diagram
below.
For example when deviation is 0% and feed pressure is 65 or 80 bar,

stabilizer pressure is as follows:
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Hole direction Feed 65 bar Feed 80 bar

Vertical down 96 bar 110 bar (max)
Horizontal 58 bar 81 bar
Vertical up 50 bar 60 bar
Increasing the stabilizer deviation % moves the diagram to the right as

shown below. The deviation in units of pressure (bar) is calculated from the
maximum feed pressure for vertical up holes.
Deviation 10% = 130 bar * 10% = 13 bar.
The control diagram is shifted by 13 bar to right. In general increasing
deviation will decrease stabilizer pressure for the same feed pressure and
hole angle.
For deviation of 10% and feed pressure is 65 or 80 bar, stabilizer pressure

is as follows:

Vertical down 64 bar 102 bar
Horizontal 50 bar (min) 63 bar
Vertical up 50 bar (min) 50 bar (min)
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Decreasing the stabilizer deviation % moves the diagram to the left as

shown in the diagram below.
Deviation -10% = 130 bar * -10% = -13 bar.
The control diagram is shifted by 13 bar to the left as shown below. In
general decreasing deviation will increase stabilizer pressure for the same
feed pressure and hole angle.
For deviation of -10% and feed pressure is 65 or 80 bar, stabilizer pressure

is as follows:

Vertical down 110 bar (max) 110 bar (max)
Horizontal 79 bar 102 bar
Vertical up 58 bar 73 bar
Stabilizer pressure when no rotation angle sensor is installed (TMS

None)
If rotation angle sensor is not installed then stabilizer pressure depends
only on the feed pressure value.
The stabilizer pressure control curve is the same as for a horizontal hole
when a rotation sensor is installed.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Maximum stabilizer pressure is limited to 110 bar and minimum pressure to

50 bar.
Within the limit values, as feed pressure increases then stabilizer pressure
increases.
Default stabilizer pressure control (deviation is 0%) is shown in the diagram
below.
Increasing deviation % will have the effect of decreasing stabilizer pressure

for the same feed pressure.
Decreasing deviation % will have the effect of increasing stabilizer pressure
for the same feed pressure.
The operator can modify this value as follows:
1. Select the submenu SETTINGS.
2. Select first DRILL PRESS submenu, then the STAB. PRESS. option.
3. Modify the value with the adjustment knob and press OK to save. ESC to
leave without changes.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.7 Breakthrough settings (automatic drilling)
Setting break-through tolerances
1
3
1 Positive tolerance value range

2 Negative tolerance value range
3 Planned hole depth
The break-through settings have separate tolerances for the positive (+)
direction (over-drilling) and negative (-) direction (under-drilling). These
settings affect all holes in automatic drilling which have break-through
checking set to ON. The maximum tolerances are 20 meters in the positive
direction and 5 meters in the negative direction.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Example: Hole depth is 15.0 m, the positive break-through tolerance is 5.0

m and the negative tolerance is 3.0 m. If the drill exceeds the
predetermined break-through speed when drilling depth is between 12.0
and 20.0 m, the system interprets this as a break-through. If DRILL/UNCPL
has been selected, the system starts uncoupling automatically.
1. Press the SET key in the SANDVIK display to open the SETTINGS
display.
2. Select DRILL SET > BREAKTHROUGH.
3. The B.T. CONT. option allows you to specify how the system should
behave if breakthrough is not detected in the tolerance region. If B.T.
CONT. is set on, and DRILL/UNCPL is selected then the system will
continue with uncoupling. If B.T. CONT. is off then the system halts and
displays an error message. See chapter "Continuing drilling if no break-
through takes place".

BREAKTHROUGH
BT. B.T. B.T. B.T.
4. Select B.T. TOL.

5. Select POS. TOL. Use the POS. TOL. setting to set the positive break-
through tolerance. Set the value with the adjusting knob and confirm it
with the OK key. The positive tolerance range starts once the planned
hole depth is reached. You can set the positive tolerance between 0.0
and 20.0 meters.
6. Select NEG. TOL. Use the NEG. TOL. setting to set the negative break-
through tolerance. Set the value with the adjusting knob and confirm it
with the OK key. The negative tolerance range starts when the planned
hole depth - negative tolerance value is reached. You can set the
negative tolerance between 0.0 and 5.0 meters.
Note! In the break through tolerance range, the system will ignore the final
rod change tolerance (typically 0.3 m) and continue drilling until the
edge of the positive tolerance range is reached.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Breakthrough speed and delay

Breakthrough speed determines the penetration rate which, when
exceeded for longer than the breakthrough delay, indicates to the control
system that breakthrough has taken place.
To adjust the breakthrough speed:
1. From the BREAKTHROUGH menu select B.T.SPEED.
2. Adjust value with adjustment knob. Press OK to accept changed value.
To adjust the breakthrough delay:
1. From the BREAKTHROUGH menu select B.T.DELAY.
2. Adjust value with adjustment knob. Press OK to accept changed value.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Continuing drilling if no break-through takes place
With the break-through continue setting you can choose what the system
does if no break-through takes place within the specified break-through
tolerance range.
Set the continue drilling setting off. If no break-through takes place within
the tolerance range, the rock drill will return to its rear position and drilling
will be interrupted. A message saying NO BREAK-THROUGH will
appear on the display. You have to decide whether to continue drilling or
start uncoupling.
Set the continue drilling setting on. If no break-through takes place within
the tolerance range, the system will start uncoupling the equipment
automatically.
2. Select DRILL SET > BREAKTHROUGH > B.T. CONT.
3. Select B.T.CONT. to choose what the system does if no break-through
takes place within the specified break-through tolerance range.

OPTIONS
BT. B.T. B.T. NEXT
SPEED CONT. TOL. MENU
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4. Select ON or OFF and confirm your selection with the OK key.

Continue drilling setting off.
If no breakthrough takes place within the tolerance range, the
rock drill will return to its rear position and drilling will be
interrupted. A message saying NO BREAKTHROUGH will
appear on the display. The user has to decide whether to
continue drilling or start uncoupling.
Continue drilling setting on.
If no breakthrough takes place within the tolerance range, the
system will start uncoupling the equipment automatically.
PRESS MENU KEY TO SET BT CONTINUATION,

PRESS OK TO ACCEPT CHANGES, OR ESC
TO LEAVE WITHOUT CHANGES
ON OFF
4.4.8 Rotation speed setting

Proceed as follows:
1. Press the SET button in the SANDVIK display.
2. From the SETTINGS display, select DRILL SET.
3. Select ROT. SPEED to open the rotation speed adjustment display.
4. Set the desired rotation speed by turning the adjusting knob.
5. Confirm the set rotation speed value by pressing the OK key. To return to
the previous display, press the ESC key.
ROTATION SPEED DURING DRILLING
55 RPM
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.9 Flushing settings
Combined air and water flushing (automatic version)

This setting is used to determine the flushing method for drilling and
uncoupling. There are four different flushing options for drilling:
WATER
AIR
WATER (FILL TUBE)
AIR (FILL TUBE)
Fill tube means that after adding a tube, the rock drill waits until the tubes
have been filled with water or air before continuing drilling.
There are three different flushing options for uncoupling:
WATER
AIR
NO FLUSHING (----)
2. Select DRILL SET > FLUSH.
3. Select FLUSHING MODE.
The current setting for flushing combination is displayed. The desired
flushing combination can be selected by rotating the adjusting knob.
The following combinations are available:
Drilling Uncoupling
Water Water
Water Air
Air Water
Air Air
Water (Fill tube) Water
Water (Fill tube) Air
Water -------- (no flushing)
Air -------- (no flushing)
Water (Fill tube) -------- (no flushing)
Air (Fill tube) Water
Air (Fill tube) Air
Air (Fill tube) -------- (no flushing)
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Minimum water and air pressures

These settings are used for defining the minimum water and air pressures
(bar) in the system. If water or air pressure drops below the set value
during drilling, corrective functions are activated. The rock drill will move
backwards to the rear stop until the pressure level is back to normal. At the
same time, the GUI-1 panel displays the flushing error message. When
drilling with water flushing, the water pressure is monitored; when drilling
with water-mist flushing / air flushing, only the air pressure is monitored.
Normally, suitable values are 2...8 bar.
2. Select DRILL SET > FLUSH
3. Select AIR CNTRL or WATER CNTRL.
The current minimum pressure setting for flushing is displayed and can be
changed with the adjusting knob.
Extra flushing (automatic drilling)

Extra flushing is a feature which can be used during automatic drilling to
clean out the hole, for example when rock conditions are difficult.
In extra flushing, the rock drill is first run to the rear position and then back
to the front position (mid tube, or before tube change). When the rock drill is
pulled back, either air or water flushing can be used. Percussion will be set
on if the rotation pressure rises above the set limit.
If extra flushing is enabled then the following settings are available
FLUSHING INTERVAL this is the interval before the next extra flushing
sequence. The minimum interval is 1/3 tube, which means that extra
flushing will be carried out for each 1/3 tube length drilled.
FROM END This number specifies the number of tubes from the end of
the hole that will all be flushed. This number is relevant only if
FLUSHING INTERVAL value is greater than 1.
PULL COUNT Specifies the number of flushing cycles to be carried
out. Pull count is only used when the complete tube is drilled. For extra
flushings midtube only one extra flushing cycle is carried out.
submenus.
2. Select DRILL SET submenu, then the SET FLUSHING > EXTRA
FLUSH.
3. Select ENABLE to enable (ON) / disable (OFF) extra flushing. Select the
value with the color keys. Press OK to save. ESC to leave without
changes.
4. Select SET option for the extra flushing settings, to set flushing interval,
flushing from end, and pull count. Select the value to be changed with the
color keys. Modify value with adjustment knob and press OK to save.
ESC to leave without changes.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.10 Rushing settings (automatic drilling)

Proceed as follows:
1. Select half power distance (HALF PWR DIST) adjustment by pressing
the white key.
This setting is used to define the distance for which half power is to be
used after the rushing state has occurred and is measured from the
position where rushing was detected. The maximum half power distance
value is the length of the tube or rod, and the minimum value is 0.3
meters. The factory setting for the half power distance is 0.5 m
2. Set the desired distance by turning the adjusting knob.
CHOOSE SETTING, SET WITH KNOB
HALF RUSH RUSH RUSH

PWR DIST TIME SPEED CONT.
3. Select rush time (RUSH TIME) adjustment by pressing the grey key.
This setting defines the length of time that the penetration rate exceeds
the limit speed defined by the RUSH SPEED setting before starting the
rushing state. The maximum rush time value is 10 seconds, and the
minimum value is 0.1 seconds. The factory setting for the rush time is 3.0
s
4. Set the desired time by turning the adjusting knob.
HALF RUSH RUSH RUSH

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
5. Select rush speed (RUSH SPEED) adjustment by pressing the black key.
This setting is used to define the penetration rate limit value after which
the time counter starts counting. If the limit value is exceeded non-stop
for a longer period of time than that defined by the rush time setting, the
rushing state is considered to have begun. The maximum rush speed
value is 5.0 m/min, and the minimum value is 0.1 m/min. The factory
setting for the rush speed in 2.0 m/min.
Note! Rush speed is not used within the break-through tolerance range.

HALF RUSH RUSH RUSH

Example:
The drill rig control system is using the factory settings (0.5 m, 3.0 s and 2.0
m/min) for rushing. The drill bit then breaks into a cavity, causing the
following to occur:
1. The penetration rate starts to rise.
2. When the penetration rate rises above 2.0 m/min, the time counter starts
counting. If the penetration rate drops below 2.0 m/min, the time counter
resets to zero.
3. When the penetration rate exceeds 2.0 m/min non-stop for longer than
3.0 seconds, the rushing state is considered to have begun.
4. Drilling is stopped.
5. The rock drill is drawn backwards 10 cm or to the back end stop.
After this the behavior of the system depends on the rushing continuation
setting (RUSH CONT., see also following section).
a) If rushing continuation is set ON then the drilling system restarts
drilling at half power. After the rock drill has moved forwards 50 cm,
the system switches up to full power again. If the front end stop is
reached before 50 cm, the next tube is started as normal at full
power. If no rock contact is made during the 50 cm movement, the
system jumps back to step 1.
b) If rushing continuation is set OFF then the rock drill moves to the
back end stop, halts and an alarm message is displayed to the
operator.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
6. Select rushing continuation (RUSH CONT.) adjustment by pressing the

orange key.
PRESS MENU KEY TO SET CONTINUATION,

PRESS OK TO ACCEPT CHANGES, OR ESC
TO LEAVE WITHOUT CHANGES
ON OFF
If rushing continuation is set ON, then after detecting the rushing

condition and pulling back 10cm the system will continue to drill forwards
at half power settings for 50 cm after which it will return to full power
drilling.
If rushing continuation is set OFF, then after detecting the rushing
condition the rock drill is pulled back to the end stop, drilling halts and an
error message is displayed to the operator.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.11 Rushing control (automatic drilling)

Rushing control is a feature for reducing rushing, by gradually reducing
percussion pressure if the penetration rate goes over a set level. Drilling
power is reduced when drilling in soft rock conditions (penetration rate
rises) and increased to normal power in harder rock conditions. The effect
is to avoid unnecessary rushing error conditions.
Rushing control is configured with the following values:
SPEED LO LIMIT Penetration rate at which rushing control becomes
active and reduction of percussion pressure begins.
SPEED HI LIMIT Penetration rate at which percussion pressure is at
minimum value. Normally this will be the same or close to the rushing
error speed.
PERC. LIMIT The minimum percussion pressure value when
penetration is at the speed hi limit value.
Rushing control
180
160
140
Percussion pressure
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
2.0 m/min 3.0 m/min
Penetration rate
Figure: Behavior of rushing control
SPEED LO LIMIT = 2.0 m/min

SPEED HI LIMIT = 3.0 m/min
FULL POWER PERC. PRESS. = 160 bar
PERC. LIMIT = 100 bar
As penetration rate increases from low limit value to high limit value the
percussion pressure is progressively reduced from full power level to
minimum level.
Rushing control can be enabled as follows:
ALL all automatic drilling modes
MOMENT ONLY only when drilling with moment control mode (control
of rotation pressure)
PI ONLY only when drilling with PI control mode (control of feed
pressure)
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
OFF Rushing control not used

2. Select DRILL SET submenu, then the RUSH menu, then the RUSH
CTRL display.
3. Select ENABLE to select when rushing control is active. Select the value
with the color keys. Press OK to save. ESC to leave without changes.
4. Select SPEED to set the high and low speed limits. Select the value to be
changed with the color keys. Modify value with adjustment knob and
press OK to save. ESC to leave without changes.
5. Select PERC. LIMIT to set the minimum percussion pressure. Modify
value with adjustment knob and press OK to save. ESC to leave without
changes.
4.4.12 Power extractor settings (automatic drilling)
If the power extractor is installed (see section 4.8.6 Power extractor usage
(automatic drilling if power extractor installed) (132)) it is possible to
configure the usage (activation times) in the following situations when
drilling automatically:
Opening shank/tube thread (during coupling and uncoupling sequences)
if the thread is tight and does not open normally
Final percussion for down holes and breakthrough holes.
If the rock drill jams and does not move backwards during the anti-jam
sequence.
After flushing error during the pullback stage.
If the time is set to zero then the power extractor is not used in that
situation. In general usage of power extractor should be minimized, such
that activation times should be kept to the minimum to achieve the effect
required.
submenus.
2. Select DRILL SET submenu, then the NEXT menu, then the P.EXT. SET
display.
3. Select OPEN THREAD, FINAL PERC. or OTHER depending on the
setting to be adjusted. Select the value to be changed with the color
keys. Modify value with adjustment knob and press OK to save. ESC to
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.13 Minimum penetration (automatic drilling)

The minimum penetration rate defines the lowest allowed feeding speed of
rock drill advance during drilling. If the rock drill speed is below the set
value for longer than five seconds, the rock drill reverses to its rear position,
and an error message is displayed. Normally, the value is between 0.05
and 0.20 m/min. Minimum allowed value is 0.01 m/min.
2. Select DRILL SET > MIN.PEN.
The current minimum penetration rate is displayed and can be changed
using the adjustment knob.
4.4.14 Tube amount
This setting is used for informing the system of how many tubes or rods are
in use. Note that the counter also counts the first tube or rod (equipped with
the bit). For example, if the magazine is full, the number of tubes or rods in
use is the capacity of the magazine + one (tube equipped with the bit).
Normally, the setting value is between 1 and 29.
This feature is available only if the machine is equipped with sequence or
automatic control functions.
2. Select DRILL SET.
3. With manual version, select TUBE AMOUNT.
With automatic or fan version, select NEXT > EXTRA SET. > TUBE
AMOUNT.
The current tube or rod quantity is displayed.
Note! If the tube quantity setting is incorrect, the tubes/rods will be placed
into the wrong slots when returned to the magazine.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.15 Shank open and final percussion time settings (automatic drilling)
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the adjustment for the first shank opening time (SHANK OPEN 1)
by pressing the white key.
The setting is used to define the basic time that the percussion is on after
drilling a tube or rod during the first attempt to open threads. The total
percussion on time for opening the shank for the first time = basic time +
(0.2 * tube count). The factory setting for the basic time is 2.0 s. If, for
example, 12 tubes have been drilled and the shank does not open, the
percussion is on as follows: 2.0 + 0.2 * 12 = 4.4 s
2. Set the desired basic time by turning the adjusting knob.
SHANK SHANK FINAL

OPEN 1 OPEN 2 PERC.
3. Select the adjustment for the second shank opening time (SHANK OPEN
2) by pressing the grey key.
The setting is used to define the basic time that percussion remains on
after drilling a tube or rod during a repeat attempt to open threads. The
total percussion on time for a repeat attempt to open the shank = basic
time + (0.2 * tube count). The factory setting for the basic time is 3.0 s. If,
for example, 12 tubes have been drilled and the shank does not open at
the first attempt, the percussion remains on during the repeat attempt as
follows: 3.0 + 0.2 * 12 = 5.4 s
4. Set the desired basic time by turning the adjusting knob.
SHANK SHANK FINAL

OPEN 1 OPEN 2 PERC.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
5. Select the adjustment for the final percussion time (FINAL PERC.) by
pressing the black key.
This setting is used to define the time per tube or rod that is used for
loosening the threads using percussion and feed after the hole is
finished. The total final percussion on time after the hole is finished =
final percussion basic time + (final percussion time per tube or rod * tube
count). The final percussion basic time is a fixed value (3.0 s) and cannot
be changed. The factory setting for the final percussion time per tube or
rod is 2.0 s. If, for example, 12 tubes have been drilled and the hole is
finished, the total final percussion time is as follows: 3.0 + (2.0 * 12) = 27
s
Note! If the final percussion time per tube is set to zero, final percussion
will not activate.
6. Set the desired time by turning the adjusting knob.
SHANK SHANK FINAL

OPEN 1 OPEN 2 PERC.
7. Confirm the calibration by pressing the OK key.

To reject the changes and return the original values, press the ESC key.
4.4.16 Percussion mode (automatic drilling)
Percussion mode affects how the system behaves when automatically
adding tubes/rods into a hole.
Default mode for automatically adding tubes/rods into a hole is rotation and
feed only.
If percussion mode is ON then percussion is also used.
The operator can modify this values as follows:
1. Press SET to select the submenu SETTINGS.
2. Select first DRILL SET submenu.
3. Select NEXT menu option followed by EXTRA SET.
4. Select PERC. MODE option.
5. Set percussion mode ON or OFF with the appropriate color key. Press
OK to save, or ESC to leave without changes.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.17 Time and date

This setting is used for changing the time and date settings in the system.
For the reliability of the error log, it is important that the time and date
settings are always correct.
The current time and date are shown in the lower part of the main display.
2. Select SYSTEM.
3. Select SET TIME. To change the settings, first select the value you want
to change with the menu keys SET HOURS or SET MINUTES. Turn the
adjusting knob clockwise to increase the value, or counter-clockwise to
decrease it.
4. Press OK to accept the changes or ESC to return without making
changes.
5. Select SET DATE. To change the settings, first select the value you want
to change with the menu keys SET YEAR, SET MONTH or SET DAY.
Turn the adjusting knob clockwise to increase the value, or counter-
clockwise to decrease it.
6. Press OK to accept the changes or ESC to return without making
changes.
4.4.18 Display language
The language setting is used for changing the display language of the
GUI-1 panel.
To change the current language setting:
2. Select SYSTEM.
3. Select SELECT LANGUAGE.
4. Select the option USER with the menu key.
5. Using the adjustment knob select the new display language.
6. Press OK to accept the new language selection.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.4.19 Fan settings
Starter tube length

1. Select SETTINGS > FAN SET. to open the FAN SETTINGS menu.
2. Select STARTER TUBE > LENGTH.
3. Turn the knob to set the starter tube length.
STARTER TUBE LENGTH:
1.83 meters
4. Press OK to accept.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Starter tube multi-flush

This is a feature that can used if extra flushing is needed with the starter
tube/rob. It is included only in fan option. This feature implements a new fan
phase COLLAR AND FLUSH which takes place between FIND ROCK
and COLLAR. In COLLAR AND FLUSH phase hole is drilled to a certain
depth. Then drilling is halted and feed is set to backwards. With flushing
and rotation on the drill bit is drawn out of the hole. When the bit is out, feed
is set to forwards and with flushing and rotation on the drill bit is driven
again to the hole. This flushing sequence is done as many times as
specified. This feature is valid only in fan drilling.
Multi flush consists of three parameters: flush depth, flush count and extra
pull.
Flush depth defines the drilling depth after which drilling is halted and
flushing sequence starts.
Flush count defines how many times the flushing cycle is executed.
During flushing cycle only feed rotation and flushing is used. Percussion
is again set on a couple centimeters before the hole bottom is reached at
the end of the last flushing cycle.
Extra pull defines the distance how much the drill bit is drawn out of the
hole during every flushing cycle.
1 Extra pull
2 Flush depth
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
1. Select FLUSH DEPTH and rotate the wheel to set the flush depth setting.
20 CM
FLUSH FLUSH EXTRA

DEPTH COUNT PULL
Note! If flush count is set to zero, multi flush feature is disabled.

2. Select FLUSH COUNT and rotate the wheel to set the amount of flushing
cycles.
2
FLUSH FLUSH EXTRA
DEPTH COUNT PULL
3. Select EXTRA PULL and rote the wheel to set the extra pull distance.
10 CM
FLUSH FLUSH EXTRA

DEPTH COUNT PULL
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
DM Home
Note! See also Fan automation operation instructions.
DM home position is the position to which the drilling module is driven

before starting automatic positioning. The home position offset is the value
by which this position is corrected depending on the drilling angle.
Values should be set such that during positioning, the feed rail and drilling
module are clear of the front frame.
Below are examples for drilling vertically down and up.
Drilling vertically down.

DM position = Home pos offset
Drilling vertically up.

DM position = Home pos + offset
2. Select first FAN SET submenu, then the DM HOME option.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
3. Select the value to be changed with the appropriate color key. Modify the
value with the adjustment knob and press OK to save. ESC to leave
without changes.
Depth mode
When drilling with a machine equipped with the fan automation option,
there are two options for measuring hole depth:
From rock surface hole depth is set to zero when rock is detected. This
is the default setting.
From pivot point reference level hole depth is measured from the pivot
point reference level. This method makes use of boom and drilling
module sensors, and starter tube length value, in addition to the rock
detect position. If for some reason a boom or drilling module sensor is
not working then this method should not be used.
The operator can modify this value as follows:

2. Select first FAN SET submenu, then the DEPTH MODE option.
3. Select FROM ROCK or FROM PIVOT with the appropriate color key.
Press OK to save. ESC to leave without changes.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Collar pipe
When drilling down holes it is normally necessary to insert a collar pipe

after collaring the hole, to prevent drill cuttings from blocking the hole. In
the case of fan drilling the holes are collared, the collar pipe inserted, and
the starting position of each hole saved before starting the fan.
The collar pipe settings affect whether flushing and rotation are used when
searching for the entry to the collar pipe.
2. Select first FAN SET submenu, then the COLLAR PIPE option.
3. Modify the settings with the adjustment knob and press OK to save. ESC
to leave without changes.
4.4.20 Rock drill rotation speed during drilling
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the SET button in the SANDVIK display.
2. From the SETTINGS display, select DRILL SET.
3. Select ROT. SPEED to open the rotation speed adjustment display.
4. Set the desired rotation speed by turning the adjusting knob.
5. Confirm the set rotation speed value by pressing the OK key. To return to
the previous display, press the ESC key.
ROTATION SPEED DURING DRILLING
55 RPM
4.5 Hole depth and drill rod counter reset to zero (TMS DD, TMS DDS,
S)
To select the function, use the ZERO SET button on the GUI-1 panel.
Hole depth is always reset to zero when drilling of a new hole commences.
The hole depth counter is reset to zero by using the DEPTH COUNT
function.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel

SET ZERO
TUBE END DEPTH
COUNT FAN COUNT
If you forget to reset the drill depth from that of the previous hole and start
drilling another hole with the same data, the program asks whether you
want to reset the depth counter. Resetting the value is confirmed by
pressing the OK key, and cancelled by pressing the ESC key.
OK = RESET COUNTING
ESC = LEAVE WITHOUT CHANGES
Note! Hole depth counting is available in the TMS versions DD and DDS
only (see Appendix for alternative versions).
The number of drill rods is reset to zero using the TUBE COUNT function,
that sets the number one (1) as the starting value for the drill rods. This
function is required only if the tube counter value is incorrect for some
reason. Resetting the value is confirmed by pressing the OK key, and
cancelled by pressing the ESC key.
OK = RESET COUNTING
Note! Hole depth counting is included in the TMS versions DD, DDS and S
only (see Appendix for alternative versions).
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.6 Drilling angles

The rotation angle can be shown in two different ways.
Fan mode
In the fan mode, the rotation angle values are given in the actual tilted
plane (tilt angle of fan).
When the rotation angle display is in the tilted fan mode, the display shows
letter F above the rotation angle title ROT (F = Fan).
* DRILLING ANGLES *
F
TILT0.0 ROT 137.2
...ESC
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Vertical mode
In the vertical mode, the rotation angle values are given as a projection in
the vertical plane.
When the rotation angle display is in vertical plane mode, the display shows
letter V above the rotation angle title ROT (V = Vertical).
The setting of the rotation angles is explained in the chapter Selecting the
rotation angle display.
* DRILLING ANGLES *
V
TILT 0.0 ROT 137.2
...ESC
F
c
b
Figure: The hole (darkened line) in the fan plane is tilted to angle (a). The hole rotation angle on
the fan plane is (b). When the hole is projected onto a vertical plane (dashed line), the rotation
angle is (c). The difference between (b) and (c) increases as angle (a) increases.
Showing the hole rotation angles on the display in vertical mode improves
drilling accuracy in mines where the drilling plan rotation angles are given
on a vertical plane and the tilt angle is given separately. When the rotation
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
angle display is set to the vertical plane, the operator does not need
separate conversion tables; the rotation angle value displayed corresponds
with the rotation angle given in the drilling plan.
4.6.1 Drilling angle display TMS D, TMS DD and TMS DDS
This function displays the current rotation and tilt angle values when
aligning the feed with a new hole.
Press the ANGLE DISP key.
* DRILLING ANGLES *
V
TILT 0.0 ROT 137.2
...ESC
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.6.2 Drilling angle display FAN

Drilling angle display for fan rigs.
* DRILLING ANGLES *
F
TILT -2.4 ROT 90.4
PP V: 1.87 m DM : - 44 cm RST : OUT
H: 0.00 m FST : OUT
Besides the drilling angles, the drilling angle display shows the vertical
distance of the hole starting point from the tunnel floor (PP.V) and the
horizontal distance from the navigation zero point (PP.H).
The distance from the boom swing axle pivot point to the tunnel floor is
defined with a fixed system value.
Figure: Distance from assumed floor level to swing axis.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
3 4
1
2
1 Navigation reference point, zero point

2 Reference point distance from the floor level
3 Distance from the reference point to the left
4 Distance from the reference point to the right
4.6.3 Drilling angle display FAN + REMOTE USE
Drilling angle display with FAN and REMOTE CONTROL options.
* DRILLING ANGLES *
F
TILT -2.4 ROT 90.4
PP V: 1.87 m DM : - 44 cm RST : OUT
H: 0.00 m FST : OUT
RST shows the rear stinger status information. When both rear stingers
are fully in, the RST value is IN. In all other cases the RST value is OUT.
The rear stinger status information is shown on the drilling angle display
when using the remote use option.
FST shows the front stinger status information. When the front stinger is
fully in, the FST value is IN. In all other cases the FST value is OUT. The
front stinger status information is shown in the drilling angle display when
using the remote use option.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.6.4 Operating principle of the TMS for DL43x

TMS for DL43x angle measuring system can be operated in two separate
modes: boom mode and carrier mode. Boom mode is the mode in which
the reference plane is set during navigation (see Setting and clearing the
angle reference plane). In boom mode, the rotation angle can be shown in
the tilted fan plane (F) or as a projection in the vertical plane (V).
Carrier mode is the mode in which the tilt angle reference plane is cleared
(see Setting and clearing the angle reference plane). In carrier mode, the
rotation angle value shown on the display is identical both in the vertical (V)
and fan mode (F). The reference plane is identical in both modes (V, F).
To switch to boom mode, set the tilt angle reference plane as explained in
the chapter Setting and clearing the angle reference plane.
To switch to carrier mode, clear the tilt angle reference plane as explained
in the chapter Setting and clearing the angle reference plane.
Note! When the tilt angle reference plane is cleared, the drilling angle
display shows REFTILT value 0.0. To be absolutely sure that system
is in carrier mode, clear the tilt angle reference plane: if the fan
was/is drilled in the boom mode using tilt angle reference 0.0
(vertical fan), the drilling angle display also shows REFTILT value
0.0.
1.4 137.2
F
TILT ROT
ZOOM PIV.
OFFS VERT
REF TILT : 0.0 PIV.

OFFS
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Boom mode
Rotation plane in vertical mode (V)

In this mode, the display shows the rotation angle projected in the
reference plane (1). This reference plane (1) is defined during navigation
and is vertical and perpendicular to the boom direction. If the boom lift or
swing is used after navigation, the reference plane (1) stays in its original
place.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
90
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Rotation mode in fan mode (F)

In this mode, the screen shows the rotation angle in the actual tilted fan
plane. This reference plane (1) is defined during navigation and is
perpendicular to the boom direction. The fan tilt angle is set during
navigation. If the boom lift or swing is used after navigation, the reference
plane (1) stays in its original place.
90
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Carrier mode
Rotation plane in vertical mode (V)

In this mode, the display shows the rotation angle projected in plane (1),
which is always vertical and perpendicular to the carrier front chassis
longitudinal axis.
Rotation plane in fan mode (F)

In this mode, the display shows the rotation angle projected in plane (1),
which is always vertical and perpendicular to the carrier front chassis axis.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.6.5 Drilling angle display mode (DL43x)

In addition to the drilling angle display shown in the Drilling angles
chapter, the DL43x drilling angle display shows the tilt angle reference (see
chapter Setting and clearing the angle reference plane).
The rotation angle can be shown in the fan plane (F) or vertical plane (V),
as explained in the previous chapter.
1.4 137.2
F
TILT ROT
ZOOM PIV.
OFFS VERT
REF TILT : 0.0 PIV.

OFFS
Viewed from the operators seat of a DL43x machine, the boom's drilling
module rotation joint comes before the drilling module tilt joint in the joint
order of the boom. This causes both the tilt angle and rotation angle values
to change when either the tilt or rotation movement is used.
Note! If the boom swing movement is used after navigation, the pivot point
distance from the original navigation plane is changed. To
compensate this, the operator has to use the boom zoom movement
in order to bring the new pivot point back to the original reference
plane (= navigation plane), as illustrated in the figure below.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
1 Reference line
2 New boom position
3 Telescopes compensation distance
Note! If the boom lift movement is used after navigation, the pivot point
distance from the original navigation plane is changed. To
compensate this, the operator must use the boom zoom movement
in order to bring the new pivot point back to the original reference
plane (= navigation plane), as illustrated in the figure below.
1 Reference line
2 New boom position
3 Telescopes compensation distance
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.6.6 Setting and clearing the angle reference plane (DL43x)

In this context, setting the angle reference plane means that the rig is
navigated to a planned position in the tunnel with the help of lasers
mounted on the front of the boom. During navigation, the operator sets the
angle reference plane.
1
1400
3
2
1 Positioning laser
2 Positioning marks
3 Drilling line
The navigation determines the actual fan drilling plane (1400 mm difference
between the lasers and the drilling center).
The desired fan tilt angle can be entered in the system. This defines the
reference plane. See the figure below.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
1 Vertical plane
2 Reference plane (fan plane)
3 Tilt angle reference
To enter the tilt angle reference value, press the ZERO SET key in the
main display. The adjacent display is opened. Select SET REF.
SET ZERO
TUBE SET CLEAR DEPTH
COUNT REF. REF. COUNT
Align the boom with swing and zoom movements so that the laser beams
hit the laser reference markers on the drift walls. Then set the tilt angle
reference value by turning the GUI-1 panel adjustment knob. When ready,
confirm the reference plane by pressing the OK key.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
* SET ANGLE REFERENCE *

ALIGN TO LASER REFERENCE
5.00 DEGREES
SET FAN TILT ANGLE WITH KNOB

Note! It is not possible to reset the tilt angle reference value without
renavigating the rig.
Clearing the tilt angle reference plane switches the system to carrier mode.
Select CLEAR REF. in the ZERO SET display. Press the OK key if you
want to clear the tilt angle reference plane setting.
OK = CLEAR ANGLE REFERENCE

4.7 Data display

DATA
The Data displays are accesed by pressing the DATA DISP button DISP in
the GUI1 panel
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.7.1 Manual rigs (TMS)

The initial data display contains the following information:
Hole depth (m) (versions TMS DD and TMS DDS)
Penetration rate (m/min) (version TMS DDS)
Feed pressure (bar)
Percussion pressure (bar)
Rotation pressure (bar)
Flushing pressure (bar)
HOLE PEN.
DEPTH 21.45 RATE 2.45
FEED PERC.
PRESS. 85 PRESS. 150
ROT. FLUSH.
PESS 65 PRESS. 4
To return to the SANDVIK main display, press the Esc key.

Press OK. The display that opens contains the following information:
Tube count (versions TMS DD and TMS DDS)
Feed pressure (bar)
TUBE PEN.
COUNT 4 RATE 2.45
FEED PERC.
ROT. FLUSH.
PRESS. 65 PRESS. 4

Percussion time used for the hole being drilled (min)
Accumulated drilling meters (m)
Accumulated percussion hours (h)
Accumulated powerpack on hours (h)
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Accumulated power extractor on time

*DATA LOG*
PERC TIME/HOLE: 12 min
TOTAL METERS: 1253 m
TOTAL PERC. TIME: 3 h
TOTAL PWRPACK ON: 10 h
TOTAL PWR EXT: 00 h 05min 12 S
OK = Next page, ESC = Quit
To return to the SANDVIK main display, press the Esc key. To return to the
first display, press the OK key.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.7.2 One hole data rigs

The initial data display contains the following information:
Feed pressure (bar)
Drilling control mode indicator, feed or rotation pressure control ( # )
Drilling control pressure request (bar)
Rushing control indicator (# next to percussion pressure)
Extra flushing indicator (+ next to flushing pressure)
HOLE PEN.
FEED PERC.
PRESS. 85 PRESS. 150 #
ROT. # FLUSH. +
PESS 65 65 PRESS. 4

Tube count (versions TMS DD and TMS DDS)
Feed pressure (bar)
TUBE PEN.
COUNT 4 RATE 2.45
FEED PERC.
ROT. FLUSH.
PRESS. 65 PRESS. 4

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Hole depth setting (m)

Pivot point distance (m) (available with fan rigs only)
Feed rotation angle (deg)
Feed tilt angle (deg)
Estimated total time for the hole being drilled (min)
Estimated drilling time for the hole being drilled (min)
Estimated uncoupling time for the hole being drilled (min)
HOLE DEPTH SETTING: 12.5 m
PIV. POINT SETTING: 0.5 m
ROT. ANGLE SETTING: 12.5 deg
TILT ANGLE SETTING: 5 deg
TIME LEFT: Total 12 min
Drilling 10 min
Uncoupling 2 min
OK = Next page ESC = Quit

Total time used for the hole being drilled (min)
Total drilling time used for the hole being drilled (min)
Total uncoupling time used for the hole being drilled (min)
ELAPSED TIME: Total 120 min
Drilling 90 min
Uncoupling 30 min
PERC. TIME/HOLE: 12 min
TOTAL METRES: 1254 m
TOTAL POWERPACK ON: 3 h

Break-through mode (ON/OFF)
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Indication whether drilling is continued if no break-through takes place

within the break-through range (ON/OFF). ON = no break-through within
the break-through range, continue directly to final percussion and
uncoupling of the equipment. OFF = rock drill is driven to the rear
position and drilling is stopped.
break-through range lower limit (m)
break-through range upper limit (m)
TOTAL PWR EXT: 00 h 03 min 02 s
BREAKTHROUGH: ON
Cont: ON Min 34.6 m Max 34.6 m
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.7.3 Fan automation rigs

Feed pressure (bar)
Drilling control mode indicator, feed or rotation pressure control ( # )
Drilling control pressure request (bar)
Rushing control indicator (# next to percussion pressure)
Extra flushing indicator (+ next to flushing pressure)
HOLE PEN.
FEED PERC.
PRESS. 85 PRESS. 150 #
ROT. # FLUSH. +
PESS 65 65 PRESS. 4

Number of the hole to be drilled and number of holes in the drill plan
Meters drilled with the drill bit (m)
Number of tubes/rods (pcs)
Drill bit lifetime (m)
Front stinger pressure (bar)
Rear stinger pressure (bar)
HOLE BIT
NO. 1/4 MTRS 36
TUBE BIT
COUNT 3 MAX. 200
FRONT REAR
STING. 95 STING. 94

Number of tubes/rods (pcs)
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Rock drill position (cm)

Feed pressure (bar)
Front position (cm) - drill to this position before unthreading shank to add
next tube/rod
Rear position (cm) - when uncoupling, pullback to this position before
unthreading and putting tube back into cassette
TUBE DFTR
COUNT 1 POS. 0 cm
FEED FRONT
PRESS 0 POS. 188 cm
ROT REAR
PRESS 0 POS. 22 cm

Hole depth setting (m)
Pivot point distance (m) (distance of the hole starting point from the drill
plan pivot point = navigation point)
Feed rotation angle (dgr)
Feed front and rear tilt angle (dgr)
Estimated total time for the hole being drilled (min)
Estimated drilling time for the hole being drilled (min)
Estimated uncoupling time for the hole being drilled (min)
Drilling 10 min
Uncoupling 2 min

Total time used for the hole being drilled (min)
Total drilling time used for the hole being drilled (min)
Total uncoupling time used for the hole being drilled (min)
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel

Drilling 90 min
Uncoupling 30 min

break-through mode (ON/OFF)
Indication whether drilling is continued if no break-through takes place
within the break-through range (ON/OFF). ON = no break-through within
the break-through range, continue directly to final percussion and
uncoupling of the equipment. OFF = rock drill is driven to the rear
position and drilling is stopped.
break-through range lower limit (m)
break-through range upper limit (m)
Multiple flushing mode (ON/OFF)
Flushing depth (m)
Number of flushings (pcs)
BREAKTHROUGH: ON
MULTIFLUSH: ON
Depth (m): 0.20 Count: 2
4.8 Special functions

The special functions display is accessed by pressing the SPEC key. This
opens the first submenu, SPECIALS:
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE MENU PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE MENU
ESC=QUIT OPERATION ESC=QUIT OPERATION
SPECIALS SPEC. SET

BASIC CAL. SERVICE NEXT CONTROL DISABLE POWER
CALIBR. L. SEN. METHOD ALARMS EXTR.
The SPECIALS display can be used to perform the following functions:

Basic calibration
Calibrate linear sensor
Checking of sensors and electric controls, control system
troubleshooting, and error log
Select control method
Disable alarms
Power extractor usage (if power extractor installed)
4.8.1 Basic calibration
Calibration displays can be accessed by pressing the SPEC button to open
the SPECIALS menu. When BASIC CALIBR. is selected, the system
requires a password to continue to the calibration functions. The calibration
displays can be used to select the following functions:
CAL. SENSOR - angle sensor (feed tilt and rotation angle) calibration
CAL. HYDR. - hydraulic valve calibration
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Rotation angle sensor calibration

Select rotation angle calibration (CAL. ROT.) by pressing the orange key.
CALIBR ATE ROT. CALIBR ATE ROT.

GROWTH SCALE SCALE NEXT SCALE ROT
DIREC. ZERO CALIBR. MENU SYS. PLANE
The rotation angle calibration display can be used to select the following
functions:
GROWTH DIREC. = setting of the angle sensors angle reading growth
direction
SCALE ZERO = setting of the angle sensor zero point
SCALE CAL. = angle sensor calibration
SCALE SYS. = rotation angle scale selection
ROT. PLANE = show rotation angle display plane
Note! If the angle sensor reading is incorrect, the sensor must be
calibrated before setting the zero point.
Rotation sensor calibration

Proceed as follows:
1. Select rotation sensor calibration (SCALE CALIBR.) by pressing the
black key.
CALIBR ATE ROT.

GROWTH SCALE SCALE NEXT
DIREC. ZERO CALIBR. MENU
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
2. Set the rotation scaling factor for angle sensor 1 by turning the adjusting
knob. The factor is marked on the sensor packaging and on the sensor
type plate. The value is approx. 6000.
90 TYPE IAS U 360

DATE XXXXX X
INFO 1773263 8
2 1
TYPE IAS U 360
DATE XXXXX X
INFO 1.XXX X 2.XXX X
1
2
1 Scale factor (1).

2 Scale factor (2).
ROT. SCALING FACTOR 1:
6000
Press the OK key. The display will enter the next step in the calibration.
ROT. SCALING FACTOR 2:
6000
5. Press the OK key. The display will enter the next step in the calibration.
6. According to the display instructions, run the feed to a vertical position so
that the centralizer is pointing downwards.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
7. Check the position with a precision spirit level.

8. Once the sensor values at the top of the display have settled (i.e., the
sensor is stable), press the OK key. The display will enter the next step in
the calibration.
T1= 6294 T2= - 121

POSITION. PRESS OK WHEN READY
1
9. According to the display instructions, run the feed to a horizontal position
so that the centralizer is pointing to the right when viewed from the front.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
sensor is stable), press the OK key. The display will enter the next step
in the calibration.
T1= 6294 T2= - 121
ROTATE FEED TO HORIZ. RIGHT

90
1
12. According to the display instructions, run the feed to a position 50
degrees counter-clockwise from horizontal when viewed from the front.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
in the calibration.
T1= 6294 T2= - 121
DEG., AND PRESS OK WHEN READY
3
50
2
15. According to the display instructions, run the feed to a vertical position
so that the centralizer is pointing upwards.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
in the calibration.
T1= 6294 T2= - 121
ROTATE TO VERTICAL UP,

4
3
18. According to the display instructions, run the feed to a position 50

degrees counter-clockwise from vertical when viewed from the front.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
in the calibration.
T1= 6294 T2= - 121
DEG., AND PRESS OK WHEN READY
50 4
21. According to the display instructions, run the feed to a horizontal

position so that the centralizer is pointing to the left when viewed from
the front.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
sensor is stable), press the OK key. The calibration procedure is now
completed, and the display will enter the basic calibration mode for
rotation.
T1= 6294 T2= - 120
ROTATE FEED TO HORIZ. LEFT

Note! Once the sensors have been calibrated, the rotation angle zero point
must be checked and, if necessary, adjusted.
Setting the rotation angles angle reading growth direction

Proceed as follows:
1. Select the setting of the rotation angles angle reading growth direction
(GROWTH DIREC.) by pressing the white key.
CALIBR ATE ROT.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
2. Select the desired growth direction:

CW = angle reading grows clockwise
CCW = angle reading grows counter-clockwise
CW CCW
3. Confirm the selection with the OK key, which takes you back to the
previous menu.
Rotation angle scale selection

Proceed as follows:
1. Select NEXT MENU by pressing the orange key.
CALIBR ATE ROT.

2. Select scale selection (SCALE SYS.) by pressing the white key.

CALIBR ATE ROT.

SCALE ROT.
SYS. PLANE
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
3. Select the scale by pressing the white or orange key.

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SCALE
FROM 0 FROM 0
TO +-180 TO 360
previous menu.
Setting the rotation angle zero point

Note! The sensor must be calibrated before the zero point is set.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select setting of the rotation angle zero point (SCALE ZERO) by pressing
the grey key.
CALIBR ATE ROT.

2. Turn the feed to the desired zero point.

4. Confirm the zero point by pressing the OK key. This resets the rotation
angle reading on the display to zero. The display will now show rotation
angles in relation to this zero point.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
5. Confirm the selection with the OK key. To reject the change, press the
ESC key. The display returns to the previous view.
ROTATE FEED TO DESIRED 0 DEG.
PRESS OK WHEN READY
275.9 DEGREES
6. Press the ESC key to return to the basic calibration mode.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Tilt angle sensor calibration

Select tilt angle calibration (CAL. TILT) by pressing the white key.
The tilt angle calibration display can be used to select the following
functions:
GROWTH DIREC. = setting of the angle sensors angle reading growth
direction
SCALE CALIBR. = angle sensor calibration
CALIBR ATE TILT

GROWTH SCALE
DIREC. CALIBR.
Note! If the angle sensor display shows an incorrect reading, the sensor
must be calibrated before any other settings.
1 0 tilt angle calibration point
Angle sensor calibration

Proceed as follows:
1. Select angle sensor calibration (SCALE CALIBR.) by pressing the orange
key.
ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
2. Set the tilt sensor scaling factor by turning the knob. The factor is marked
on the sensor packaging and on the sensor type plate. The value is
approx. 6000.
SF
XXXX
U
P
-- +
45 45
TYPE IASU 45
DATE XXXXXX 0
INFO 17733498 XXXX
1 Scaling factor
3. Press the OK key. The display will enter the next step in the calibration.
To reject the change, press the ESC key.
SENSOR SCALING FACTOR
6000
4. According to the display instructions, run the feed to a vertical position so

that the centralizer is pointing downwards.
sensor is stable), press the OK key. Calibration is now completed, and
the display will return to the tilt angle calibrations basic mode.
T1= 6294 T2= - 121

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Setting the angle sensors angle reading growth direction

Proceed as follows:
1. Select the angle sensors angle reading growth direction (GROWTH
DIREC.) setting by pressing the white key.
BACKWARD = angle reading grows when the boom is tilted
backwards
FORWARD = angle reading grows when the boom is tilted forwards
The selected option is indicated by a double border around the option.

BACKWARD FORWARD
previous menu.
4. Press the ESC key to return to the tilt angle calibrations basic mode.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Angle sensor calibration
Hydraulic valve calibration

The hydraulic valve calibration display can be used to select the following
functions:
PERC. PRESS. - percussion pressure calibration
FEED. PRESS. - feed pressure calibration
CAL. FLOW - magazine rotation speed adjustment and threading setting
CAL. STAB. - stabilizer pressure calibration (proportionally controlled
stabilizer option)
CAL HYDR
PERC. FEED CAL. CAL.
PRESS PRESS FLOW STAB.
Pressure regulators are calibrated so that the actual pressure corresponds

as closely as possible to the set value. Percussion pressure is calibrated
manually. Feed pressure and stabilizer pressure are calibrated
automatically.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Percussion pressure calibration

CAL HYDR
PERC. FEED CAL.
PRESS PRESS FLOW
1. Select PERC. PRESS. to access the percussion pressure calibration

display.
2. Start manual drilling with full power.
3. Select 100 bar percussion pressure calibration (PERC. 100) by pressing
the white key.
VALUES AND PRESS OK. ESC=QUIT
BAR [ ]
PERC. PERC.
100 150
4. During drilling, turn the adjustment knob until the displayed percussion
pressure is 100 bar.
5. Select 150 bar percussion pressure calibration (PERC. 150) by pressing
the grey key.
6. During drilling, turn the adjustment knob until the displayed percussion
pressure is 150 bar.
The display returns to the previous view.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Feed pressure calibration

1. Drive the rock drill forward and close the retainer (or if no tube attached,
drive rock drill to forward end stop) so that the rock drill is prevented from
moving forward.
2. Select FEED. PRESS. to access the feed calibration display.
CAL HYDR
3. From the following display press the OK key to start the calibration.
* * FEED PRESSURE AUTO CALIB. * *
CAL. PHASE : 0/40
MESSAGE : IDLE
CONTROL OUT :0
FEED PRS : 0 BAR
4. Feed pressure will be incremented to maximum value and then

decremented back to the starting value. After this the calibration is
complete and calibration results are displayed. From the results display a
calibration report can be copied to USB stick for documentation.
Feed pressure calibration
Calibration can be halted without changes by pressing the ESC key.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Adjusting the magazine rotation speed and the rotation and feeding speeds for
threading
This view is used for setting the magazine movement speeds and the
rotation and feeding speeds during threading.
Proceed as follows:
Select magazine rotation speed and threading adjustment (CAL. FLOW)
by pressing the grey key.
CAL HYDR
PERC. FEED CAL.
PRESS PRESS FLOW
Magazine rotation speed adjustment

1. Select magazine rotation speed adjustment (MAGAZ. ROT.) by pressing
the white key.
TINGS. ESC=QUIT OPERATION
CAL FLOW
MAGAZ. ROT. THREAD
ROT. SPEED ADJUST
2. Select the speed to be adjusted:

MAGAZ. IN = speed of magazine to the in position
MAGAZ. OUT = speed of magazine to the out position

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
3. Set the desired speed by turning the adjusting knob.

MAGAZ. MAGAZ.
IN OUT

Adjusting the rotation and feeding speeds for threading

1. Select the threading adjustment (THREAD ADJUST) by pressing the
orange key.
TINGS. ESC=QUIT OPERATION
CAL FLOW
MAGAZ. ROT. THREAD
ROT. SPEED ADJUST
2. Select the speed to be adjusted:

THREAD FWD = feed speed forward
THREAD CCW = rotation speed to close
THREAD BWD = feed speed backward
THREAD CW = rotation speed to open
3. Set the desired speed by turning the adjusting knob.
THREAD THREAD THREAD THREAD

FWD CCW BWD CW
4. Once the necessary changes have been made, confirm the calibration by
pressing the OK key.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Rotation speed calibration

Note! The rotation speed calibration cannot be performed correctly without
a rotation tachometer.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the SPEC key in the SANDVIK display to open the SPECIALS
display.
2. Select BASIC CALIB.
3. Enter the PASSWORD and confirm it with the OK key.
PSW?
+
OK
If the password is correct, the following display opens.

4. Select the CAL. HYDR.
CALIBRATION
CAL. CAL. CAL. CAL.
SENSOR HYDR. TIME RUSH

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
5. Select CAL. FLOW.

CAL HYDR
CAL. CAL.
PRESS FLOW
6. Select ROT. SPEED. and the rotation speed calibration display will open.
CAL FLOW
MAGAZ. ROT. THREAD
ROT. SPEED ADJUST
7. Set the lower rotation speed control output for the flow valve with the
adjusting knob. Confirm the value with the OK key.
SET ROT. LOWER CAL SPEED:
320

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
8. Measure the corresponding rotation speed with a tachometer. Set the

rotation speed value with the adjusting knob and confirm it with the OK
key.
GIVE ACTUAL LOWER RPM MEAS.:
35
9. Set the reference value for the upper rotation flow valve with the
adjusting knob. Confirm the value with the OK key.
SET ROT. UPPER CAL SPEED:
850
10. Measure the corresponding rotation speed with a tachometer. Set the
rotation speed value with the adjusting knob and confirm it with the OK
key.
If the display shows an error message saying ROT.VALUEA.TOO
LOW after the last confirmation (OK key), the measured rotation (RPM)
values are too close to each other. The difference between R1 and R2
must be at least 40 RPM (see the following picture). To increase the
difference between measured rotation speeds, recalibrate and reset the
reference values for the rotation flow valves (lower/upper) .
GIVE ACTUAL UPPER RPM MEAS.:
80

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
RPM
R2
R1
Flow
F1 F2
F1 rotation flow setting that corresponds to R1

F2 rotation flow setting that corresponds to R2
R1 is the lower rotation speed value.
R2 is the upper rotation speed value.
Note! R1 - R2 > 40 RPM.
Based on these calibration points (F1, R1) and (F2, R2), the control system
calculates the right control value for the rotation proportional valve when
the rotation speed is set.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Stabilizer pressure calibration (with proportionally controlled stabilizer option)

1. When calibrating the stabilizer feed forward must be on. Drive the rock
drill forward and close the retainer (or if no tube attached drive rock drill
to forward end stop) so that the rock drill is prevented from moving
forward.
2. Select CAL. STAB. to access the stabilizer pressure calibration display.
CAL HYDR
3. From the following display press the OK key to start the calibration.
* * STAB PRESSURE AUTO CALIB. * *
CAL. PHASE : 0/40
MESSAGE : IDLE
CONTROL OUT :0
STAB. PRS : 0 BAR
4. Stabilizer pressure will be incremented to maximum value and then

decremented back to the starting value. After this the calibration is
complete and calibration results are displayed. From the results display a
calibration report can be copied to USB stick for documentation.
Calibration can be halted without changes by pressing the ESC key.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Calibration of fan automation rigs

The fan automation rig calibration menu differs from the menus of the basic
units as there are more sensors to be calibrated.
1. To open the SPECIALS menu, press the SPEC key.
2. Select BASIC CALIBR. > CAL. SENSOR.
3. Select fan sensor calibration (CAL. FAN).
CAL SENSOR
CAL. CAL. CAL.
TILT ROT. FAN
A display opens with selections for swing sensor, rock drill position
sensor and zoom sensor calibration.
CAL. FAN
SWING DM POS ZOOM
4. Select boom swing sensor calibration (SWING SENSOR).

5. Set the desired sensor scaling factor by turning the adjusting knob.
SENSOR SCALING FACTOR :
6000
6. Confirm the value by pressing the OK key. The display enters the next
step in calibration. To reject the change, press the ESC key.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
7. Drive the boom swing to the vertical position. Check the position with a
precision spirit level.
T1= 0
DRIVE BOOM SWING TO VERTICAL

8. Confirm the calibration by pressing the OK key. The display returns to the
fan sensor calibration menu.
9. Select drilling module position calibration (DM POS. SENSOR).
10. Drive the drilling module to the rear position.
DM Pos sensor raw : 204
DRIVE DRILLING UNIT TO

BACK POSITION
ESC = Cancel operation
11. Press the OK key. The display enters the next view.
12. Drive the drilling module to the front position.
DM Pos sensor raw : 1024
DRIVE DRILLING UNIT TO

FRONT POSITION
ESC = Cancel operation
13. Confirm the calibration by pressing the OK key. The display returns to
the fan sensor calibration menu.
14. Select zoom sensor calibration (ZOOM SENSOR).

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
15. Retract the boom zoom fully.
Zoom sensor raw: 22
DRIVE BOOM ZOOM TO

FULLY IN POSITION
17. Extract the boom zoom fully.
Zoom sensor raw: 1022
DRIVE BOOM ZOOM TO

FULLY OUT POSITION
the fan sensor calibration menu.
The percussion and feed pressure calibration of the fan automation rigs
(CAL. PRESS.) as well as the magazine rotation speed and threading
adjusting (CAL. FLOW) are performed similarly to those of the basic units.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Calibration of the DL43x angle measurement system

The DL43x angle measurement system differs significantly from the
previous TMS-versions (D, DD, DDS). It uses 3 inclinometers and 2 angle
sensors, all of which must be calibrated before use.
2. Select BASIC CALIBR. > CAL. SENSOR.
3. Select carrier inclinometer calibration (CAL. CARR.).
CAL SENSOR
CAL. CAL. CAL. NEXT
CARR. BOOM. FEED MENU
4. Using a spirit level or inclinometer, level the carrier in both the side and
forward directions by adjusting the jacks. The display shows the sensor
values for both directions (SIDE and FWD).
LEVEL CARRIER IN SIDE AND

FORWARD TILT DIRECTIONS
SIDE= -83 FWD= -79

ESC=CANCEL
5. Confirm the calibration by pressing the OK key. The display returns to the
previous view.
6. Select boom swing and lift sensor calibration (CAL. BOOM).

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
7. Using a measuring instrument such as total station if available, or

markings made to floor, drive the boom swing in line with the carrier as
shown in the picture below. The display shows the angle sensor value.
DRIVE BOOM SWING TO ZERO POS

BM SWING=18114
ESC=CANCEL

9. Level the boom horizontally. The boom lift sensor works as an
inclinometer, and the display shows values measured by the sensor in
both the forward (X) and side (Y) directions. The carrier forward angle
(CARR.FWD) is shown on a separate line.
LEVEL BOOM LIFT HORIZONTAL.

PRESS OK WHEN READY.
B.LIFT X= 550 B.LIFT Y= 313
CARR.FWD= 0.00
ESC=CANCEL
the angle sensor calibration menu.
11. Select feed tilt and rotation sensor calibration (CAL. FEED).

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
12. Drive the feed to the vertical position in the forward direction (drill bit
up). The display shows the feed tilt sensor raw value and carrier and
boom lift forward angles.
DRIVE FEED TILT VERTICAL
WHEN READY.
FEED TILT= - 141
CARR.FWD= 0.00 BM LIFT= 0.00
ESC=CANCEL
13. Confirm the calibration by pressing the OK key. The display enters the
next view.
14. Drive the feed to the vertical position. The feed rotation sensor works as
an inclinometer. The feed should be vertical in both the forward and
side directions (drill bit up). The display shows the sensor values and
the forward angles from the previously calibrated sensors.
DRIVE FEED ROT. VERTICAL,
WHEN READY.
ROT X= - 89 Y= - 89
CARR.FWD= 0.00 BM LIFT= 0.00
FD TILT= 0.00
ESC=CANCEL
the angle sensor calibration menu.
16. Select NEXT MENU for rotation angle, tilt angle and boom zoom sensor
calibration.
CAL SENSOR
CAL. CAL. CAL. NEXT
CARR. BOOM. FEED MENU
Note! CAL ZOOM option available only if boom linear sensor installed.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
17. Select rotation angle calibration (CAL. ROT.).

CALIBR ATION
CAL. CAL. CAL.
ROT TILT ZOOM
18. Select the setting of the rotation angles angle reading growth direction
(GROWTH DIREC.).
CALIBRATE ROT.

CW = angle reading grows clockwise
CCW = angle reading grows counter-clockwise
CW CCW
previous menu.
21. Select setting of the rotation angle zero point (SCALE ZERO).

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
22. Turn the feed to the desired zero point.

ROTATE FEED TO DESIRED 0 DEG.
PRESS OK WHEN READY
275.9 DEGREES

24. Confirm the zero point by pressing the OK key. This resets the rotation
angle reading on the display to zero. The display will now show rotation
angles in relation to this zero point.
25. Confirm the selection with the OK key. To reject the change, press the
ESC key. The display returns to the previous view
26. Select scale selection (SCALE SYS.).
27. Select the scale by pressing the white or orange key.
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SCALE
FROM 0 FROM 0
TO +-180 TO 360
previous menu.
29. Go to the rotation angle display selection (ROT. PLANE).
30. Select fan plane by pressing the white key or vertical plane by pressing
the orange key. A bold line above the text indicates the current
selection.
ROT.PLANE
FAN VERT
PLANE PLANE

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
previous menu.
32. Press the ESC key to return to the CALIBRATION menu.
33. Select tilt angle calibration (CAL. TILT).
CALIBR ATION
CAL. CAL. CAL.
ROT TILT ZOOM
34. Select the angle sensors angle reading growth direction (GROWTH
DIREC.) setting.
CALIBR ATE TILT

GROWTH
DIREC.

BACKWARD = angle reading grows when the boom is tilted
backwards
FORWARD = angle reading grows when the boom is tilted forwards
The selected option is indicated by a double border around the option.

BACKWARD FORWARD
previous menu.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
37. Press the ESC key to return to the CALIBRATION menu.

If the boom zoom linear sensor is installed carry out the following:
38. Select CAL. ZOOM.
CALIBR ATION
CAL. CAL. CAL.
ROT TILT ZOOM
39. Retract the boom zoom fully.
Zoom sensor raw: 22
DRIVE BOOM ZOOM TO

FULLY IN POSITION
41. Extract the boom zoom fully.
Zoom sensor raw: 1022
DRIVE BOOM ZOOM TO

FULLY OUT POSITION
the CALIBRATION menu.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.8.2 Selecting the rotation angle display

This function is used to select the rotation angle display of either the tilted
fan plane (F) or the vertical plane (V). Refer to the more detailed
description in the chapter Drilling angle display mode.
Proceed as follows:
1. In the calibration view, select sensor calibration (CAL. SENSOR) by
pressing the white key.
CALIBR ATION
CAL. CAL. CAL. CAL.
2. Select rotation angle calibration (CAL. ROT.) by pressing the grey key.
CAL SENSOR
CAL. CAL. CAL.
TILT ROT. FAN
3. Select the next menu by pressing the orange key.

CALIBR ATE ROT.


ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4. Go to the rotation angle display selection (ROT. PLANE) by pressing the

orange button.
CALIBR ATE ROT.

SCALE ROT.
SYS. PLANE
5. Select fan plane by pressing the white key or vertical plane by pressing
the orange key. A bold line above the text indicates the current selection.
ROT.PLANE
FAN VERT
PLANE PLANE
6. Confirm the selection by pressing the OK key.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.8.3 Hole depth sensor calibration (TMS DDS, DD)

This function is available with the LF 600 and LF 1500 feeds.
Proceed as follows:
2. Select linear sensor calibration (CAL. L. SEN.).
ESC=QUIT OPERATION
SPECIALS
BASIC DISABLE CAL. SERVICE
CALIBR. ALARMS L. SEN.
3. If required, enter the password.

4. Drive the rock drill to the rear position, and then press the OK key.
Linear sensor raw: 23
DRIVE ROCK DRILL TO

BACK POSITION
5. Drive the rock drill to the front position, and then press the OK key.
Linear sensor raw: 1022
DRIVE ROCK DRILL TO

FRONT POSITION
6. Calibration is now completed, and the display returns to the SPECIALS

menu.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.8.4 Control method

There are three alternative methods for control of drilling. The main factors
affecting choice will be rock conditions and the drilling direction.
1. Torque control Controller maintains rotation pressure at request level
set by user.
2. PI control Fast controller that maintains feed pressure at request level
set by user.
3. Integral control Slow feed pressure controller that maintains feed
pressure at request level set by user. This is the control method used in
older versions of the control system ( up to v03.400.169 ).

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Torque control
Torque control means that the controller keeps the rotation pressure at the
request level set by the user, by continually adjusting feed pressure. If
rotation pressure rises over the request level then feed pressure is
reduced, if it falls below the request level then feed pressure is increased.
Rotation pressure request is set with the drilling control potentiometer. The
pressure request value is displayed on the main drilling display to the right
of the current rotation pressure value.
The main advantage of using torque control is that the feed pressure will
adapt to changing rock conditions. When rotation pressure rises due to
difficult rock conditions then the feed pressure will be reduced and
unnecessary jamming errors are avoided.
A second advantage is that the effect of factors such as increasing drill
string mass when tubes are added, and drilling direction are automatically
corrected for.
Torque control stages are

1. At start of drilling feed pressure is ramped up until rotation pressure is
within the window for torque control.
The ramp phase is used in the following situations:
a) Start drilling of new tube/rod
b) Restart drilling after being stopped by user or due to an error
c) After antijamming error
d) After rushing error
e) After flushing error
f) After extra flushing midtube
2. Within the window the torque controller takes over and maintains rotation
pressure at the user request level.
3. If rotation pressure moves out of the control window then the ramp mode
is reentered (ramp up or ramp down).
Tuning of torque control

The starting feed pressure level for the ramp is calculated from base feed
pressure, rock drill mass compensation, tube mass compensation
multiplied by tube count and minimum feed pressure value. It is important
that these value are correctly set. Too low compensation values or base
feed will result in longer ramping times than necessary.
In addition the feed pressure valve must be correctly calibrated.
Example of torque control

In the following example,
Rock drill mass compensation = 16 bar

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Tube mass compensation = 1.2 bar

Tube count = 5
Base feed setting = 36 bar
Minimum feed pressure (system parameter) = 12 bar
Drilling angle = vertical up
120
100
80
Pressure ( bar )
60 Rot. Prs
Rot. Req
40 Feed. Prs
20
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Time ( seconds )
1. Feed press at ramp start = 16 + (5*1.2) + 12 + 36 = 70 bar

2. After 5 seconds rotation pressure is within torque control window and
torque controller takes over.
3. At 9 seconds rotation pressure increases over rotation pressure request.
Feed pressure is reduced to bring rotation pressure back to request level.
4. At 12 seconds rotation pressure goes below rotation pressure request.
Feed pressure is increased to bring rotation pressure back to request
level.
At the end of the tube/hole, the rotation pressure request is automatically
reduced for reduced power drilling, similar to the other control methods.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
PI Control
With PI control the controller keeps the feed pressure at the request level
set by the user, by monitoring the difference between actual and requested
feed pressure and adjusting for any differences. If feed pressure rises over
the request level then control signal to valve is reduced, if it falls below the
request level then control signal to valve is increased.
Feed pressure request is set with the drilling control potentiometer. The
pressure request value is displayed on the main drilling display to the right
of the current feed pressure value.
PI control might offer shorter drilling times compared with torque control
especially for up holes in relatively homogenous rock conditions.
90
80
70
60
Pressure ( bar )
50
40 Feed Prs Req

Feed. Prs
30
20
10
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Time ( seconds )
Mass compensation
The feed pressure request is calculated from the base feed and feed
deviation values compensated for the following factors (see also 4.4.1 Feed
pressure settings (27)).
Rock drill mass compensation
Tube string mass compensation
Feed rail rotation angle
For good results especially for long holes It is important that these value
are correctly set. Incorrect settings will result in feed pressure request
which is incorrect for the drilling situation.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Integral control
Integral control is the method that was used in the older control system
versions. Normally this method will not offer advantages over torque or PI
control and its use is not recommended.
Integral control is similar to PI control as the controller keeps the feed
pressure at the request level set by the user, adjusting for any differences
between the feed pressure request and actual pressure. The main
difference compared to PI control is that this method takes significantly
longer to reach the request pressure.
90
80
70
60
Pressure ( bar )
50
40 Feed Prs Req

Feed. Prs
30
20
10
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Time ( seconds )
Mass compensation
The feed pressure request is calculated from the base feed and feed
deviation values compensated for the following factors (see also 4.4.1 Feed
pressure settings (27)).
Rock drill mass compensation
Tube string mass compensation
Feed rail rotation angle
For good results especially for long holes It is important that these value
are correctly set. Incorrect settings will result in feed pressure request
which is incorrect for the drilling situation.
In addition the feed pressure value must be correctly calibrated.
Selecting drilling control method

1. Select the submenu SPECIALS.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
2. Select NEXT option, for menu SPEC. SET.

3. Select the CONTROL METHOD menu option. Give the password.
4. Select the control method with the color keys. Press OK to save. ESC to

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.8.5 Disable alarms

This function can be used to prevent error messages from appearing on the
GUI-1 control panel when the control system is activated but the rig has not
been connected to the water and/or air supply system. The disable mode is
intended for simplifying the maintenance and adjustment procedures when
it is not possible to connect the rig to the water and air supply.
To disable the alarms, proceed as follows:
2. Select DISABLE ALARMS.
ESC=QUIT OPERATION
SPECIALS
3. If required, enter the same password as for calibration.

4. Select DISABLE ALARMS. A bold line above the text indicates the
current selection.
DISABLE OR ENABLE WATER.PR.,
AIR PR.,SLU,DR.STOP ALARMS
DISABLE ENABLE
ALARMS ALARMS
5. Confirm the selection by pressing the OK key.

In this mode, activation of the following alarms is disabled:
Low air pressure (signal coming through the QN panel)
Low water pressure (signal coming through the QN panel)
Shank lubrication error
Drilling stop signal
The system automatically aborts the disable alarm mode when
water or air flushing is used
the powerpack is stopped
the mode is cancelled by selecting ENABLE ALARMS.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.8.6 Power extractor usage (automatic drilling if power extractor installed)

If the power extractor is installed, it can be configured for use during
automatic drilling in the following situations:
Opening shank/tube thread ( uncouple and uncoupling ) if the thread is
tight and does not open normally
Final percussion for down holes and breakthrough holes.
If the rock drill jams and does not move backwards during the anti-jam
sequence.
After flushing error during the pullback stage.
To configure the power extractor for use in automatic drilling do the
following (or to disable its use if the power extractor has been removed
from the rock drill):
1. From the main SANDVIK display press the SPEC key for the SPECIALS
menu.
2. Select the NEXT option with the orange key.
3. Select the POWER EXTR. option.
4. Select ON or OFF with the color keys. Press OK to save or ESC to quit
without changes.
4.8.7 Service
The service menu is accessed via the special function display by pressing
the Service key.
The service menu can be used for verifying the operation of sensors and
control-panel switches, for browsing the error log, and for verifying the
status of the control system. In addition, you can copy the rig's register files
from a USB memory to the rig, and from the rig to the USB memory.
The service menu can be used to select the following functions:
FILE TRANSFER = transferring of register files
TEST I/O = operation of sensors and control-panel switches
SHOW ERRORS = error log
SHOW STATUS = control-system status
SERVICE
FILE TEST SHOW SHOW

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Test I/O
Select I/O test (TEST I/O) by pressing the grey key in the service menu.
This menu can be used for separate viewing of the operation of switch-type
sensors, control panel joysticks and switches, and the status of the
actuators they control, as well as the operation of the machines position
and angle sensors.

SERVICE
FILE TEST SHOW SHOW

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Test I/O displays, normal TMS sensors

The status of the switches is indicated after the sensor identifier by the
numbers 0 (off) and 1 (on).

S8 : 0 S33 : 0 DST : 0
S9 : 0 S34 : 0 PP : 0
S10 : 0 S35 : 0 JACK : 0
S11 : 0 S41 : 0 CKEY : 0
S30 : 0 S125 : 0
S32 : 0 SLU : 0
S8 Retainer pressure
S9 Water flushing switch
S10 Air flushing switch
S11 Feed unit rotation limit
S30 Cassette rotation
S32 Long arms drilling
S33 Long arms in cassette
S34 Short arms out of cassette
S35 Short arms in cassette
S41 Tube/rod in cassette jaws
S125 Stabilizer pressure
SLU Shank lubrication error
DST Drill stop error
PP Powerpack running
JACK Jacks moving
CKEY Carrier key switch
Press OK to move to the next section.

Changes in the status of a control panel switch and the resulting operation
of the actuator are indicated by the numbers 0 and 1 after the device
identifiers. This function can be used to search for faults in the control
panel, as well as for checking the machines functions without studying the
electric and hydraulic charts.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
MONITOR: OK=Next page, ESC=Quit

The control panel joysticks and the feed pressure potentiometer values are
indicated, with the position of the potentiometer shown after its name as a
percentage of the maximum value.
Below this are the manual and automatic feed pressure requests
corresponding to the current potentiometer position.
The lower part of the display shows the input states and selected position
of the S78 panel mode switch. Below that are the four CPU digital inputs.
These are currently only used in systems with remote option to monitor for
remote restart of the system.
PANEL: OK = Next page ESC = Quit

Right joystick X-turn : 0 %
Right joystick Y-turn : 0 %
Feed potentiometer : 0 %
Pr. Rq MAN: 0.0 AUTO: 0.0
S78: DI12 : 0 DI 13 : 0 POS : 2
CCX4 : 0 0 0 0

The next display shows sensor and user values for the pressure sensors.
Also included is percussion frequency.
INPUTS : OK = Next page ESC = Quit
Sensor User
Feed press. B3 :0 36.0
Rot. press. B2 :0 52.0
Wat. press. B9 :0 8.0
Perc. press. B1 :0 0.0
Perc. freq. : 0.0
Stab. press. :0 0.0

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel

This display shows the values for linear sensor as well as those for rotation,
tilt and swing sensors.

Linear sensor 1 raw :0
Lin. sensor 1 (mm/10) :0
Rotation sensor 1 raw :0
Rotation sensor 2 raw :0
Tilt sensor raw :0

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Test I/O displays, DL43x

Since the sensors of the TMS-ZRU version differ from those of the standard
TMS, some test I/O displays also differ from the aforementioned displays.
Operate as with the TMS sensors.

S8 : 0 S33 : 0 DST : 0
S9 : 0 S34 : 0 PP : 0
S10 : 0 S35 : 0 JACK : 0
S11 : 0 S41 : 0 CKEY : 0
S30 : 0 S125 : 0 PPBY : 0
S32 : 0 SLU : 0
JACK Jacks moving
PPBY Powerpack bypass (Cabolt)

Operate as with the TMS sensors.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel


S78: DI12 : 0 DI 13 : 0 POS : 2
CCX4 : 0 0 0 0


Sensor User
Perc. freq. : 0.0
Stab. press. :0 0.0

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel

This display shows the linear sensor raw values and corresponding depth
readings. Carrier inclinometer raw values and corresponding angle values
are also displayed.
Linear sensor 1 raw : 0
Lin. sensor 1 [mm/10] : 0
Boom zoom sensor raw: 0
Boom zoom [mm/10] : 0
Carrier X B140 : -76 -0.76
Carrier Y B140 : -78 -0.78

The rest of the TMS-ZRU sensor raw values and corresponding angle
values are shown in this display, except for the rotation inclinometer. Only
one rollover angle value (DM roll) is calculated from the rotation sensor raw
values.
Bm sw. B20 18098 -180
Bm lift X B26 -244 -2.44
Bm lift Y B26 2456 24.56
DM tilt B6 -142 1.42
DM rot. X B7 -398
DM rot. Y B7 -9000
DM roll. B7 0

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Test I/O displays, fan

The status of the switches is indicated after the sensor identifier by the
numbers 0 (off) and 1 (on).

S8 : 0 S33 : 0 DST : 0
S9 : 0 S34 : 0 PP : 0
S10 : 0 S35 : 0 JACK : 0
S11 : 0 S41 : 0 CKEY : 0
S30 : 0 S125 : 0
S32 : 0 SLU : 0
JACK Jacks moving

Changes in the status of a control panel switch and the resulting operation
of the actuator are indicated by the numbers 0 and 1 after the device
identifiers. This function can be used to search for faults in the control
panel, as well as for checking the machines functions without studying the
electric and hydraulic charts.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel

The raw values of the fan automation sensors are shown in this display.
The numbering of the sensors corresponds to the numbering in the
electrical drawings.

Front stinger S151 0
Front stinger B152 261
Rear stinger S14 0
Rear stinger B15 204
Zoom sensor B101 59
DM pos sensor B16 317


ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel

S78: DI12 : 0 DI 13 : 0 POS : 2
CCX4 : 0 0 0 0


Sensor User
Perc. freq. : 0.0
Stab. press. :0 0.0

This display shows the values for all three linear sensors as well as those
for rotation, tilt and swing sensors.
Linear/feed [mm/10] 1500
Linear/DM [mm/10] 2000
Linear/zoom [mm/10] 200
Rotation sensor 1 raw: -537
Rotation sensor 2 raw: 1347
Tilt sensor raw: 139
Swing sensor raw: 317

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Error message follow-up

Select error log browsing (SHOW ERRORS) by pressing the black key in
the service menu.
SERVICE
FILE TEST SHOW SHOW
The lines show the first three alarms with dates and times of occurrence. If
there are more than four alarms, press OK to view them in sets of six.
ALARMS: OK=Browsing ESC=Quit
ALARM DATE DATE

Electr.disturb. 10-04-24 05:58
Electr.disturb. 10-04-24 08:25
Alarm panel err. 10-04-24 11:33
Browse the report by pressing OK, and return to the service menu by
pressing ESC.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Control system status follow-up

Select system status report browsing (SHOW STATUS) by pressing the
orange key in the service menu.
SERVICE
FILE TEST SHOW SHOW
The lines show the status of the I/O modules. Code 0000 indicates that the
module is OK. In case of any other code number, write the number down
and report it to the Sandvik Mining and Construction Oy specialist for
further actions. The SCOMM CHECK value is CSUM (not remote version)
or CRC (remote version). The value indicates the checksum used for serial
communication between the control panel and the rig.
STATUS: OK=Browsing ESC=Quit
MOD0:0000 MOD1:0010 MOD2:0000

MOD3:0000 MOD4:0000 MOD5:0000
MOD6:0000 MOD7:0000 MOD8:0000
MOD9:0000 MOD10:
SCOMM CHECK: CSUM
To browse the error messages in more detail, press OK.

A plus sign indicates that there is a problem with that particular item.
STATUS: OK = Browsing ESC = Quit
UC off bus error 4

BC_queue_o/flow 0
VC status error +1
Mod0 off bus err 0
Mod1 off bus err 0
Mod2 off bus err 0

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.9 File transfer

The file transfer menu enables copying of the rig's register files from a USB
memory to the rig, and from the rig to the USB memory.
1. In the SERVICE screen, select FILE TRANSFER to access the FILE
TRANSFER screen.

SERVICE
FILE TEST SHOW SHOW
2. The FILE TRANSFER screen (a USB memory has not yet been
connected).
FILE TRANSFER: ESC = QUIT
USB:
STATUS: Not connected
FROM TO
USB USB
Screen fields:
USB: is empty when no memory stick has been connected.
STATUS: indicates whether a USB memory stick has been
connected to the USB connector on the rig's drilling-control box (the
NN box).
FROM USB: select this when you want to copy a file from the USB
memory to the rig.
TO USB: select this when you want to copy a file from the rig to the
USB memory.
ESC: return to the previous screen.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
3. The FILE TRANSFER screen (a USB memory has been connected to

the rig).
USB: DataTraveller 2.0

STATUS: Connected
FROM TO
USB USB
Screen fields:
USB: when the USB memory has been connected, the field indicates
the USB memory stick's ID data, e.g., DataTraveller 2.0.
STATUS: indicates whether a USB memory stick has been
connected to the USB connector on the rig's drilling-control box (the
NN box).
FROM USB: select when you want to copy a file from the USB
memory to the rig.
TO USB: select when you want to copy a file from the rig to the USB
memory.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.9.1 File transfer from the rig to the USB memory

Connect a USB memory stick to the USB connector on the rig's drilling-
control box (the NN box).
1. In the FILE TRANSFER screen, select TO USB.

STATUS: Connected
FROM TO
USB USB
2. This will open the next screen.
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE

ESC = QUIT
TO USB
INSTR. HYDR. CALIB. COUNT.
In the screen, select the register file you want to transfer to the USB
memory.
Screen fields:
INSTR.: the values of the rig's instrument registers.
HYDR.: the values of the rig's hydraulics registers.
CALIB.: the values of the rig's calibration registers.
COUNT.: the values of the rig's counter registers.
3. For example, select INSTR:, and the next screen will open.
TO USB: ESC = QUIT
TYPE: Instrument
SAVE AS: Instrument_110121_135119.xml
SAVE

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Screen fields:
TYPE: indicates the register file to be copied on the USB memory.
SAVE AS: indicates the name of the file to be saved on the USB
memory. The file name is formed from the register name, the date,
and the time. E.g., Instrument_110121_135119.xml is interpreted as:
an instrument register file saved on 1 Jan 2011 at 13:51:19. This will
avoid the creation of files with the same name, as at least the time in
seconds will differ.
SAVE: saves the register file.
The files are saved in XML format, and can be viewed using, e.g., Internet
Explorer.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
4.9.2 File transfer from the USB memory to the rig

1. In the FILE TRANSFER screen, select FROM USB.

STATUS: Connected
FROM TO
USB USB
2. In the screen that opens, select the register file you wish to transfer from
the USB memory to the rig.

ESC = QUIT
FROM USB
INSTR. HYDR. CALIB. COUNT.
Screen fields:
INSTR.: the values of the rig's instrument registers.
HYDR.: the values of the rig's hydraulics registers.
CALIB.: the values of the rig's calibration registers.
COUNT.: the values of the rig's counter registers.
3. For example, select INSTR:, and the next screen will open.
FROM USB: ESC = QUIT

TYPE:Instrument
DATE: 21/01/11 13:51
NEXT PREV. COPY
TYPE: indicates the register file to be copied from the USB memory.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
DATE: indicates the time when the register file on the USB memory
was saved.
- the name of the register file appears between these two previous
fields.
NEXT: the next register file, e.g., if INSTR. was selected earlier, then
only instrument register files will be browsed.
PREV.: the previous register file, e.g., if INSTR. was selected earlier,
then only instrument register files will be browsed.
COPY: saves the file viewed on the screen in the rig's memory.
4. When the file has been saved, a message will appear on the screen:
FROM USB: ESC = POISTU

TYPE:Instrument
NEXT PREV. COPY
Note! The rig memory can only contain one instrument-, hydraulic-,
calibration-, and counter-register file at a time.
Note! The register file copied to the rig will be applied as soon as the file
has been copied successfully.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
5 AUTOMATIC DRILLING AND UNCOUPLING

5.1 Starting automatic drilling and uncoupling
Three main automatic operating modes exist:
DRILL UNCPL = Drilling and uncoupling of one hole
DRILL = Drilling only of one hole
UNCPL = Uncoupling only of tubes/rods in the hole
A8150-1(V1.0)(TS), 3.400.22
SANDVIK
09-01-15 09:45
SPEC W G B O SET
DRILL
DRILL UNCPL BIT ESC OK
UNCPL
If the DRILL UNCPL or DRILL option is selected, you will first be prompted
to enter the depth of the hole and set the breakthrough status (TOGGLE
BT). Resolution of depth input can be selected to 10, 1, or 0.1 meters.
SET DEPTH WITH KNOB AND START

DRILLING: OK=START, ESC=CANCEL
0.0 METRES

BT 10 1 0.1
Note! If the breakthrough setting is changed to ON it will remain set for all
following holes until set OFF again.
After accepting the depth with the OK key the system will carry out startup
checks and begin automatic drilling of the hole. Start of drilling can be
cancelled by pressing the ESC key. If the depth is not accepted within the
delay period the system will return to the SANDVIK display.
Note! If you start drilling from the remote control panel, the display will
show a text saying WAIT and the rig's horn will sound for 15
seconds. You can start the power pack when the text on the display
changes to START.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
Note! When automatic drilling or uncoupling is in use, the rigs red warning
light will warn those approaching the rig that automatic functions are
in use.
If DRILL is selected then the system will halt after the required depth is
drilled.
If DRILL UNCPL is selected then after the required depth is reached, and
depending on system settings, breakthrough status and hole angle the
system will first clean the hole and carry out final percussion to loosen
tube/rod threads. After this the tubes/rods will be automatically uncoupled
and placed back in the magazine. Automation will be halted when
uncoupling is completed.
A detailed description of automatic drilling is given in section 5.1.1.
Automatic drilling.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
5.1.1 Automatic drilling

Automatic drilling of a hole using drill and uncouple, drill, or fan automation
involves the following main steps:
1. Collaring
Automatic drilling starts with a short collaring stage using half power
settings. In drill and uncouple, and drill modes, the default collaring depth
is 10 cm (normally the operator will have already have collared the hole
manually). In fan mode the default collaring depth is 40 cm.
2. Half feed
If automatic drilling has been halted by the operator, or due to an error
during the drill, approach, or half feed states, then after restart, the
system initial state is the half feed state. In this state the system drills at
half feed settings for 5 seconds.
3. Drilling
Drilling with normal drilling settings (see also section 4.4 Settings menu
options (26)).
4. Approach
Approaching the end of the current tube or hole. Half feed settings are
used.
5. Clean up/down
After drilling a tube, and if extra flushing is set on (see section Extra
flushing (automatic drilling) (45)) then the hole is flushed out.
6. Open shank thread and fast feed backward
After drilling a tube length the shank thread is opened, the rock drill is
moved to the back position and the next tube is brought into the drilling
center.
7. Threading (add next tube)
After bringing the rock drill back, the threading sequence is executed to
add the next tube to the drill string.
8. Start new tube
After adding a tube, the next tube is then rotated into the gripper jaws,
and if necessary the drill string is filled with water (up holes) before
starting drilling again.
9. Tolerance
If the hole is a break-through hole, then the tolerance state is entered
after drill depth exceeds the value (planned depth - positive breakthrough
tolerance ). See section 4.4.7 Breakthrough settings (automatic
drilling) (39).
10. Final percussion
After completing the hole then the drill string is hammered (feed and
percussion without rotation) to loosen the threads before uncoupling.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
[Invalid starting conditions] Check starting

conditions
[Valid starting conditions]
[Restarting drilling]
Halt automatic
drilling [Starting new hole]
Collaring
[Drilled depth > collaring setting]
Drilling Half feed
[Hole completed AND

Approaching end of drill hole only] Halt automatic
hole or tube drilling
[Normal approach] [Break-through approach]
[Tube drilled] [Hole drilled]

[No break-through] Check for
break-through
[Extra flushing required] [Cont. off] [Cont. on] [Tube drilled]
[Extran flushing
[Start tube
Clean up required]
completed]
Clean up
Rock drill [No extra flushing]
Uncouple
[No extra flushing backwards Clean up
after tube drilled]
Clean Clean Halt
down down auto drilling
Clean
down
[Not last tube] [Last tube]
[Not last tube]

Clean
down
[Drill only] [Drill and uncouple]
[Shank opened]
[Last tube drilled
Rock drill [Tube count = 1] [Tube count > 1] Final percussion without break-through]
Fast feed backwards state includes
backwards washing of hole
[Rock drill in back position] if hole is a down
Halt Final hole, and not a
Halt [Cont. on]
auto drilling percussion break-though hole
auto drilling
Execute threading sequence [Final percussion complete]
(add tube to string) [Cont. off]
[Drill and
[Tube added] [Drill] uncouple]
Rock drill
Uncouple
backwards
Start new tube
(fill tubes if uphole) Rock drill
Uncouple
backwards
Halt
auto drilling
Halt
auto drilling
Figure: The overall state behavior during automatic drilling

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel
6 TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 Troubleshooting
For control system fault finding, refer to the following technical instructions:
DL Control System; Operation, Maintenance and Fault finding.

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
GUI-1 Control panel

ID: BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24
www.sandvik.com
560 3 en 2011-12-16
DL400 series control system

Operation, maintenance and fault finding
Table of Contents
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................................. 7
2. TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ................................................................................................... 9
3. CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURE ............................................................................................... 10

3.1. Mobile computer (A904) .................................................................................................................................. 15
3.2. Serial device server (A909) ............................................................................................................................ 21
3.3. JB21-box ............................................................................................................................................................. 23
3.4. Can-bus ............................................................................................................................................................... 23
3.4.1. General features of CAN bus ....................................................................................................................... 24
3.4.2. Control system CAN cables ......................................................................................................................... 25
3.5. CAN modules ..................................................................................................................................................... 26
3.5.1. Module location on the control system ....................................................................................................... 26
3.5.2. Fast Proportional Valve Controller Module (FPVC) ................................................................................. 29
3.5.3. DPW adapter board module (DAB) ............................................................................................................ 33
3.5.4. RD-module ...................................................................................................................................................... 36
3.5.5. UNI adapter board (UAB) ............................................................................................................................. 40
3.6. Other components ........................................................................................................................................... 44
3.6.1. Graphical user interface (GUI-1) ................................................................................................................. 44
3.6.2. Indicator panel (QN) ...................................................................................................................................... 45
3.6.3. BUP2 converter .............................................................................................................................................. 49
3.6.4. Danfoss valve ................................................................................................................................................. 51
3.6.5. Fuse protection for TAS components ......................................................................................................... 52
3.6.6. Fan option ....................................................................................................................................................... 53
3.7. TMS-ZRU ............................................................................................................................................................. 54
3.8. Serial remote control interface ..................................................................................................................... 56
3.8.1. Remote start ................................................................................................................................................... 56
4. SENSORS ...................................................................................................................................... 57
4.1. Water flushing flow control switch S9 and air flushing flow control switch S10 (extra
equipment) ......................................................................................................................................................... 57
4.1.1. Adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................... 58
4.2. Series 5010 ......................................................................................................................................................... 59
4.2.1. Electrical connection ..................................................................................................................................... 59
4.2.2. Operating and display elements .................................................................................................................. 60
4.2.3. Setting up for water media ........................................................................................................................... 62
4.2.4. Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................... 64
4.2.5. Scale drawing ................................................................................................................................................. 65
4.2.6. Technical data ................................................................................................................................................ 65
4.3. Boom tilt angle sensor IASU 45 (B6) with TMS (optional) ..................................................................... 66
4.4. Rotation sensor IASU 360 (B7) with TMS (optional) ............................................................................... 68
4.5. Rock drill position sensor (B8) with TMS, DDS, and DATA equipment ............................................. 70
4.6. Pressure sensor ................................................................................................................................................ 73
4.7. Inductive proximity switch ............................................................................................................................. 74
4.8. Boom extension (B101) and rock drill unit (B16) linear position sensors with the fan
option ................................................................................................................................................................... 75
Copyright Sandvik Mining and Construction 3 (154)

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.9. Inclinometer angle sensors (B140, B26, and B7), TMS-ZRU ................................................................. 77
4.10. Angle sensors (B20 and B6), TMS-ZRU ...................................................................................................... 78
4.11. Linear sensor ..................................................................................................................................................... 79
5. REPLACING COMPONENTS ........................................................................................................ 80

5.1. Replacing a valve cable .................................................................................................................................. 80
5.2. Replacing an inductive sensor cable (automatic and semi-automatic models) ............................. 81
5.3. Replacing the inductive sensors .................................................................................................................. 82
5.4. Replacing the angle or position sensors (B6, B7, and B11) (fan option) .......................................... 82
5.5. Replacing the angle or position sensor cables ........................................................................................ 83
5.6. Replacing the position sensors (B16 and B101) (fan option) ............................................................... 85
5.7. Replacing the angle or position sensor cables ........................................................................................ 86
5.8. Module replacement (FPVC, RD) .................................................................................................................. 86
5.9. Replacement of the mobile computer ......................................................................................................... 86
5.10. Replacement of the Ethernet serial traffic converter .............................................................................. 87
5.11. Replacing the BUP2 module (A1) ................................................................................................................. 87
5.12. Replacing the angle sensors (TMS-ZRU) ................................................................................................... 87
5.13. Changing the linear sensor (the zoom sensor of the boom) ................................................................ 88
6. ALARMS AND ERROR MESSAGES (GUI1) ................................................................................ 90

6.1. GUI-1 alarms ...................................................................................................................................................... 90
6.2. Electric disturbance message ....................................................................................................................... 108
6.2.1. Reasons for the electrical disturbance message ...................................................................................... 110
6.2.2. Module PWM error ........................................................................................................................................ 111
7. MODULE STATUS AND ERRORS ............................................................................................... 112

7.1. FPVC module error states (module 0) ......................................................................................................... 113
7.2. FPVC module error states (for modules 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9) ......................................................... 113
7.3. Normal Boot up and operation ..................................................................................................................... 114
7.4. RD module error states (modules 3, 6, and 7) .......................................................................................... 115
7.5. --->!<--- shown in the GUI ............................................................................................................................... 116
7.5.1. The mobile computer has started normally ............................................................................................... 117
7.5.2. The mobile computer starts with an error condition ................................................................................. 121
8. ERRORS NOT INDICATED BY MESSAGES IN THE GUI PANEL .............................................. 122

8.1. Angle display errors ........................................................................................................................................ 122
8.2. Pressure sensor errors ................................................................................................................................... 123
8.3. Inductive switch errors ................................................................................................................................... 124
8.4. Function does not start ................................................................................................................................... 125
8.5. Jacks or front frame are not working .......................................................................................................... 126
8.6. Depth display errors ........................................................................................................................................ 127
8.7. QN panel errors ................................................................................................................................................. 128
8.8. Danfoss flow valve errors (feed or rotation) ............................................................................................. 129
8.9. GUI-1 panel faults ............................................................................................................................................. 130
4 (154) Copyright Sandvik Mining and Construction

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
9. MEASUREMENTS FOR THE VALVES AND PRESSURE SENSORS ......................................... 131
9.1. ON/OFF and PWM valves ............................................................................................................................... 131
9.2. Danfoss valves .................................................................................................................................................. 131
9.3. Pressure sensors ............................................................................................................................................. 132
10. MEASUREMENT OF LINEAR SENSORS FOR THE BOOM AND FEED MODULE ................... 133
11. THE DL431 BOOM LINEAR SENSOR .......................................................................................... 136
12. ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................. 137

12.1. FPVC/RD modules operation check ............................................................................................................ 137
12.1.1. Checking the supply voltage ........................................................................................................................ 137
12.2. Valve and pressure sensor electrical measurements ............................................................................ 138
12.3. Electrical measurements for panel and module inputs and outputs ................................................. 140
12.3.1. Control panel .................................................................................................................................................. 140
12.3.2. Carrier .............................................................................................................................................................. 142
12.3.3. Boom ................................................................................................................................................................ 144
12.3.4. Drilling unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 146
12.3.5. QN panel ......................................................................................................................................................... 149
12.4. Measurements for the CAN cable ................................................................................................................ 150

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Untrained operators could cause death or severe injury.
Do not use this machine unless you are fully trained to do so.
The operator must be familiar with the machines performance
and properties.

instructions of the machine. The operator must also be familiar
with the relevant regulations and instructions in force at the
work site. Plan your work in advance in order to avoid accidents,
damage, and injury.
DANGER
Work on the electrical system and devices can only be
performed by a person with sufficient expertise and the
qualifications required by the authorities or under the
supervision of a person with said expertise and qualifications.
Before performing any action, read the machines operating,
maintenance, and safety instructions.
DANGER
Before starting any electrical work, make sure that the system
is disconnected from the power supply and that the power has
been switched off.
Make sure that the power supply cannot go into a feedback loop
during electrical work.
After electrical work and before use of the rig, an electrical
inspection must be carried out on the electrical systems to
detect any errors or other faults related to the installation.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD!
Movement of the machine and its parts could cause death or
severe injury.
Make sure that nobody enters the machines danger zone when
the machine is in use.
Service and adjustment procedures must only be performed by

persons who have had appropriate training. Read the
instructions for adjusting the control panel before making any
adjustments.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
2. TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Abbrevia- Source term Description

tion
CAN Controller Area Network A fast serial bus connecting modules with each other.
CPU Central Processing Unit Computer processor that executes data processing ac-
cording to program instructions.
DAK Drilling Adjust Keypad A new remote control panel / keypad module.
DCM Data Control Master Control system unit that contains the main components
of the TCAD system.
DCR Data Control Resolver Control system unit that contains the RD cards.
FPGA Field-programmable gate A programmable electronics component that supports
array field programming.
FPVC Fast proportional valve con- Drilling control system's general-purpose I/O module
troller that can be programmed according to the application.
PDCS Potentiometer-to-digital Control panel / keypad module.
converter serial output
PLC Programmable logic control- Programmable logics.
ler
RD Resolver to Digital converter A general-purpose measurement unit that converts an
module analog signal to digital form.
R-PDCS Remote-potentiometer-to- An old remote control panel / keypad module.
digital converter serial out-
put
SIL Safety Integrity Level The functional safety integrity level of machines' control
systems (EN IEC 61508).
TAS The functional unit formed by the modules of an electro-
hydraulic control system.
TCAD Measurement system for drill bit location and feed di-
rection.
TDATA Automatic control system for boom positioning and drill-
ing functions.
THC Hydraulically controlled drill rig.
TMS Drilling measurement instrument for measuring feed
direction, hole depth, and penetration rate.
TPC Electrically controlled drill rig.
USB Universal Serial Bus Universal connection method for a computer's auxiliary
devices.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3. CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURE
The electro-hydraulic control system is based on the modular TAS system.

This system includes the following components:
1. PC i.e., mobile computer (A904)
2. Serial traffic server (A909)
3. 5Eight modules (located around the rig, close to the actuators)
PC (A904)
Mobile computer responsible for the rigs control functions.
GUI-1
The GUI1 panel is an intelligent unit that reads the user keystrokes and the status of the switches,
joysticks, and the potentiometer of the active control panel (Note: Only one control panel can be active
at a time) and sends that information to the PC via the serial traffic line mentioned above. In addition,
the PC receives serial data from the CAN-RD card to control the GUI display and control unit indicator
lights via the same bus.
Serial traffic server
A signal converter (RS-232/422/485) to create serial traffic between the PC and the control system
interface (optional: multiple interfaces), as well as the data collection system (optional).

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
ALARM PANEL
MAIN ELECTRICS
MAIN CONTROL
R S 422
PC FPVC
ON/OFF
CARRIER
5450
24 V
Serial Device Server ON/OFFSOLENOID VALVES
CAN
RS 422 BUS BUS PROPO RTIONAL
SOLENOID VALVES
LOCAL FPVC
PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
CONTROL PANEL
GUI1
SELECT
ROCK DRILL
POSITION SENSOR
BUP2
RD
ON/OFF
ANALOG
ANGLE SENSOR
ON/OFFSOLENOID
VALVES
CONTROL LIGHTS
FPVC
ON/OFFPROXIMITY SWITCHES
REMOTE GUI1
(OPTION)
The modules are the muscles and the senses of the system. They communicate with the CAN-RD
card via a high-frequency serial traffic bus. This serial traffic bus is called a CAN (Controller Area
Network) bus. In practice, it is a long cable that connects all of the rig modules.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
FPVC module
reads the digital inputs i.e., the ON/OFF data (proximity switches, pressure switches, flow
switches, etc.)
switches the digital outputs (valves, relays, etc.) on and off
controls the proportional valves
reads main electrical system alarms (oil level low, power pack running, compressor overloaded,
etc.) from the QN indicator panel via serial bus (RS422)
The FPVC module can be used in systems where there are flow control proportional valves for
controlling rock drill feed and rotation.
The FPVC module is described in more detail in the section "Fast Proportional Valve Controller
Module (FPVC)" (p. 29) .
RD module
reads the status of the angle sensors and the rock drill position sensor
converts analog signals into digital form
The RD module is described in more detail in the section "RD-module" (p. 36) .

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
X910
X900
S900 S901
A904
A909
Figure: NN box, cabin model.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
S901
S900
X910
X900
A904
A909
Figure: NN box, safety canopy model.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.1. Mobile computer (A904)
The PC calculation module is an efficient control device with two CAN buses.
Properties
Controls drilling.
24 VDC rated feed voltage.
Allowable range for feed voltage: 830 VDC.
Power supply designed for 2 A fuses. This limits the condenser charging current, which can manifest
itself when the power is switched on.
2 GB internal flash memory.
The housing is grounded.
Connections
Power supply
CAN 2
USB host 1
USB device 1
Ethernet 1
Digital I/O Two connectors, each with four inputs and one
output
Data being written to the memory will not be damaged, even if

the power to the module is interrupted. Data recording during
power failure has been ensured with batteries for 200 ms
NOTE!
before the module is shut down in a controlled way. All active
outputs and unnecessary peripheral devices are shut off
immediately when a drop in the power supply is detected.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Indicator lights
X1
USB 1 X8
(Device) CAN1 IN
POWER
X2
USB 2 X9
(Host) CAN1 OUT
X3 X10
ETHERNET
CAN2 IN
X4 X11
I/O 1
CAN2 OUT
X5
I/O 2
LNK CAN1
ACT STATUS CAN2
Figure: Mobile computer (A904) connections and LEDs
1. The status LED has three colors to indicate the status: green, yellow, and red.
Status LED state Purpose More information

OFF The device is off. The power supply is off or the
device is damaged.
STEADY GREEN LIGHT The device is on. The device is working properly.
FLASHING GREEN LIGHT, 2 Factory setting restoration state. Special updates, running of a
Hz secondary system, etc. are pos-
sible without deletion of user in-
formation.
STEADY YELLOW LIGHT The device is restarting. Start-up and running of the core
software.
FLASHING YELLOW LIGHT, 2 The device is restarting. Running of the user-mode mem-
Hz ory area; some peripheral devi-
ces may have started.
FLASHING YELLOW LIGHT, 7 Device shutdown. Normal shutdown of the device
Hz is started.
FLASHING YELLOW LIGHT, 15 System check. Checking of the system and file
Hz systems, and similar operations.
STEADY RED LIGHT The device is faulty. Internal fault or unrecoverable
device breakdown.
FLASHING RED LIGHT, 2 Hz Firmware update. The device is updating the firm-
ware.
FLASHING RED LIGHT, 7 Hz System repair and restoration. The system is restoring factory
settings, deleting all user infor-
mation.
2. CAN indicator:

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
CAN1/CAN2 LED status Purpose More information

OFF The CAN bus has not started. Reboot the mobile computer.
YELLOW LIGHT ON Application intialization and also
during power down sequence
FLASHING GREEN LIGHT, 15 The CAN bus is on, with no er-
Hz rors.
FLASHING RED LIGHT, 2 Hz Error in the CAN bus, or a mod- Check the bus cable and mod-
ule has been disconnected from ule statuses.
the bus.
3. The LNK indicator light
is yellow
is illuminated in yellow when the Ethernet cable is connected and the connection works
4. The ACT indicator light, indicating Ethernet activity, is green.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Device connections
1. Power supply.
Pin Default signal More informa- M12 x 1 male connector, five-pin, A-coded
tion
1 830 VDC, max. 2 A Power supply 2
2 830 VDC, max. 2 A Power supply
3 GND Grounding 3 1
4 GND Grounding
4 5
5 NC
2. CAN 1 and CAN 2 input.
tion
1 V+ 2
2 CANL
3 CAN_GND 3 1
4 CANH
4 5
5 CAN protection
Box CAN protection
3. CAN 1 and CAN 2 output.
Pin Default signal More informa- M12 x 1 female connector, five-pin, A-coded
tion
1 V+ 2
2 CANL
3 CAN_GND 3 1
4 CANH
4 5
5 CAN protection
Box CAN protection
4. Ethernet.
Pin Default signal More informa- M12 x 1 female connector, four-pin, D-coded
tion
1 Tx+ 2
2 Rx+
3 Tx- 3 1
4 Rx-
4
Box Protection
5. USB host.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Pin Default signal More informa- M12 x 1 female connector, five-pin, A-coded
tion
1 Vbus out 5V 2
2 D-
3 GND 3 1
4 D+
4 5
5 NC
Box Protection
6. USB device.
tion
1 Vbus out 5V 2
2 D-
3 GND 3 1
4 D+
4 5
5 NC
Box Protection
7. Digital I/O 1.
Pin Default signal More informa- M12 x 1 female connector, eight-pin, A-coded
tion
1 DI1 Digital input 5
2 DI2 Digital input 4 6
3 DI3 Digital input
4 DI4 Digital input
5 DO1 Digital input 3 7
6 NC Reserved
7 GND 2 1
8 GND 8
Box Protection
8. Digital I/O 2.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Pin Default signal More informa- M12 x 1 female connector, eight-pin, A-coded
tion
1 DI5 Digital input 5
2 DI6 Digital input 4 6
3 DI7 Digital input
4 DI8 Digital input
5 DO2 Digital input 3 7
6 NC Reserved
7 GND 2 1
8 GND 8
Box Protection

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.2. Serial device server (A909)
General notes
The serial device server is used to connect the control system mobile computer via the RS422/232
serial buses to the control system interfaces and any optional data collection systems.
Connections
4 3
RESET
2
V + V-
LAN
1
5
5450
{
Serial Device Server
Figure: Ethernet RS converter i.e., serial device server.
Part More information

1 Ethernet port RJ45 10/100 Mbps, connected with cable 55152667
2 Power supply terminal strip 1248 VDC
3 Power supply plug Not in use
4 Reset button A short push resets the device to factory settings.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Part More information

5 LED indicators LAN and serial bus statuses
6 Four serial ports Port 1 RS422, port 2 RS422, port 3 RS232, port 4 not
in use
Pin RS-232 RS-422/ Connector D89, male

RS-485-4w
1 DCD TxD-(A)
2 RxD TxD+(B)
3 TxD RxD+(B)
4 DTR RxD-(A)
5 GND GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
Indicator lights
LED name LED color Explanation

Ready Steady red light The power is on and the device is start-
ing.
Flashing red light Indicates an IP error, or the DHCP or
BOOTP server is not responding prop-
erly.
Steady green light The power is on and the device is oper-
ating normally.
Flashing green light The device has been located with the
main users location function.
Off Power off, or power error state.
Ethernet Orange 10 Mbps Ethernet connection.
Green 100 Mbps Ethernet connection.
Off Ethernet cable disconnected, or poor
connection.
P1, P2, P3, P4 Orange The serial port is receiving data.
Green The serial port is transmitting data.
Off There is no traffic via the serial port.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.3. JB21-box
X910 JB21-pin
11 1
12 2
13 3
14 4
15 5
16 6
17 7
The connection from the GIC connector (X910) goes to junction box (JB21), which is situated near
the local remote panel connector (2XH).
JB21-pin RS422-definition
1 RX +
2 RX -
3 TX +
4 TX -
5 GND
The JB21 now provides the RS422 connection to/from the rig. JB21 pins 6 and 7 provide the remote
system reset option. With DL430 rigs these pins are connected as follows:
JB21-pin TAS-module TAS-module connec- FPVC-connector

tor
6 06 OUT X2.5 XJ1:9
7 06 GND X1.14 XJ2:5
With other DL400 series models the remote reset connection is a little bit different.
JB21-pin TAS-module TAS-module connec- FPVC-connector

tor
6 07 OUT X2.10 XJ2:8
7 07 GND X1.15 XJ1:5
3.4. Can-bus
The control of the actuators and the collecting of measuring data is done by the decentralized modules
(FPVC ja RD). The modules are connected to the control system via the fast serial CAN-bus (CAN
= Controller Area Network).

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.4.1. General features of CAN bus
Open topology
New modules can be easily added and old ones removed from the bus. Modules (stations) have no
actual addresses but one or more pieces of data that another station connected to the bus can use
by referring to them with the data number, without any information as to which of the stations has the
data. Messages are sent into the bus for public reception. Each message has its identifying number,
e.g. rotation pressure data could have the number 3. The station that measures rotation pressure
sends the number 3 into the bus and after it the rotation pressure data. Other stations receive the
data without information on where it originates. The sending station is not concerned which station(s)
receive the data. If a new station is connected to the bus, and it requires rotation pressure data, the
sending station need not be programmed to be aware of this new station and its need of rotation
pressure data, and the new station need not have the information on which station sends the rotation
pressure data. This manner of organization makes the control system flexible and modular.
Broadcast transmission
Messages are transmitted into the bus for public reception, whereby each station that needs the
message is able to receive it. Thus, the information each recipient station receives was concurrently
measured and they receive it simultaneously.
Architecture with several masters and priorised transmission of messages.
Any station can, at will, act as a sending station at the desired moment. If two stations send a message
simultaneously, the message with a lower priority will be destroyed, but the higher priority message
will be transmitted intact. After this, the lower priority message will be retransmitted.
Resistance to interference
The control system must be resistant to electromagnetic interference caused by humidity, motors,
solenoids, and relays. This is realized by detecting the errors caused by interference and correcting
it by retransmitting. A station with constant errors in transmission or reception is labelled faulty and
disconnected from the bus. The faulty station is able to do this itself.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.4.2. Control system CAN cables
The CAN bus is divided into two branches. One branch covers the modules of the boom and drilling
unit. The other branch covers the modules of the carrier. These two branches are connected to each
other by CAN card connector X903. In both branches, only one cable runs between the modules for
data transfer as well as provision of supply voltage for the modules. Data transmission is via the CAN
wires in the middle of the cable. The cable wires are paired, and all wires are surrounded by a common
screen. At the ends of the CAN bus, the wires are equipped with 180 ohm terminal resistors to match
the bus impedance.
CAN Device CAN Device
180 1 180
CAN_Low
2 CAN_High
3 +24V
4 GND
5 Shield
CAN cable
Wires CAN Low (1) and CAN High (2) are used for transferring the CAN signal.
Wires (3) and (4) are for voltage supply to the modules.
Screening (5) is used as an interference protection conductor (PE). It must be connected to rig ground
at both ends of the cable.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.5. CAN modules
3.5.1. Module location on the control system
The modules are inside rugged junction boxes designated as R box. The number of R boxes varies
depending on the level of automation of the control system. Each R box may contain 2 modules.
DL410
2 3 4
1 R1 (mod. 0, 1)
2 R2 (mod. 2, 3)
3 R3 (mod. 4, 5)
4 R4 (mod. 6 + BUP2)

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
DL420
4 3 6 2 5 1
1 R1 (mod. 0, 1)
2 R2 (mod. 2, 3)
3 R3 (mod. 4, 5)
4 R4 (mod. 6 + BUP2)
5 R5 (mod. 7)
6 R6 (mod. 8, 9)
DL430
1
4 3
1 R1 (mod. 0, 1)
2 R2 (mod. 2, 6)
3 R3 (mod. 4, 5)
4 R4 (mod. 7 + BUP2)

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
SOLO RTS
1 5 3 4
1 R1 (mod. 0, 1)
2 R2 (mod. 2, 6)
3 R3 (mod. 4, 5)
4 R4 (mod. 7 + BUP2)
5 R5 (mod. 3)

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.5.2. Fast Proportional Valve Controller Module (FPVC)
Figure: FPVC Module.
General
The FPVC is an I/O-module designed for valve control.

The FPVC includes the following I/Os:
1. 7 analog inputs 4...20 mA
2. 18 multifunction I/O connections which can be configured as any of the following:
current-controlled proportional valve output (closed loop with a current output of 0...2 A)
PWM output, open loop
digital output
digital input
12-bit counter (impulse or phase difference) input (4 pcs).
Module's operating range description
Operating voltage range +8+35 VDC

Operating temperature range 25 +60 C
Valve's control current range 02 A
Valve's voltage control (PWM) impulse ratio 080 %
Digital output's maximum load 2A
Milliampere input's measuring range 420 mA

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Connectors
XJI I/O connec- Pin Signal type Default value More information
tor
XJ1 1 AI AI
XJ1 2 AI AI
XJ1 3 GND
XJ1 4 IO DI
XJ1 5 GND
XJ1 6 IO DI
XJ1 7 GND
XJ1 8 IO DI
XJ1 9 IOC DI
XJ1 10 GND
XJ1 11 IOC DI
XJ2 I/O connec- Pin Signal type Default value More information
tor
XJ2 1 AI AI
XJ2 2 AI AI
XJ2 3 GND
XJ2 4 IO DI
XJ2 5 GND
XJ2 6 IO DI
XJ2 7 GND
XJ2 8 IO DI
XJ2 9 IO DI
XJ2 10 GND
XJ2 11 VIO
tor
XJ3 1 AI AI 24 V to I/O, overcurrent and re-
verse polarity protection
XJ3 2 AI AI
XJ3 3 GND
XJ3 4 IO DI
XJ3 5 GND
XJ3 6 IO DI
XJ3 7 GND
XJ3 8 IO DI
XJ3 9 IO DI

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
tor
XJ3 10 GND
XJ3 11 VIO
tor
XJ4 1 VREF 24 V, 500 mA, sensor power sup-
ply with overcurrent protection
XJ4 2 AI AI
XJ4 3 GND
XJ4 4 IO DI
XJ4 5 GND
XJ4 6 IO DI
XJ4 7 GND
XJ4 8 IO DI
XJ4 9 IO DI
XJ4 10 GND
XJ4 11 IO DI
XJ5 program- Pin Signal type Default value More information

ming plug
XJ5 1 VS
XJ5 2 Rx Programming of RS232 receiver
input
XJ5 3 Tx Programming of RS232 receiver
output
XJ5 4 PGM Open Programming status when short-
circuited to GND
XJ5 5 GND
XJ5 6 GND
XJ6 CAN 1 con- Pin Signal type Default value More information
nector
XJ6 1 VS 24 V supply to module
XJ6 2 CAN1H
XJ6 3 CAN1H
XJ6 4 CAN1L
XJ6 5 CAN1L
XJ6 6 GND
XJ7CAN2 Pin Signal type Default value More information


ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
XJ7CAN2 Pin Signal type Default value More information

XJ7 3 CAN2H
XJ7 4 CAN2L
XJ7 5 GND
XJ7 6 GND
XJ6CAN1 con- Pin Signal type Default value More information

nector
XJ8 1 BR2 Open Both open = 250 kbit/s
XJ8 2 BR1 Open
XJ8 3 ID3 Binary coding (refer to table be-
low)
XJ8 4 ID2 All open = 0 (refer to table below)
XJ8 5 ID1 All connected to GND = 8 (refer to
table below)
XJ8 6 GND (refer to table below)
Node 0 Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Node 5 Node 6 Node 7

GND x x x x x x x
ID1 x x x x
ID2 x x x x
ID3 x x x x
x = connectors connected with cable

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.5.3. DPW adapter board module (DAB)
General description
DAB is an adapter board for FPVC to make externally signals that are compatible with older TAS
system signalling. This board enables use of FPVC as spare part for old TAS modules.
DAB connects directly to FPVC connectors XJ7 and XJ8.
Figure: DAB assembled to FPVC connectors XJ7 and XJ8.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
DAB card connectors
Connector /
pin Signal name Description
RS-232 serial traffic, connected to the FPVC module
XJ10.1 Tx, RS232 transmit pin XJ5.2.
RS-232 serial traffic, connected to the FPVC module
XJ10.2 Rx, RS232 receive pin XJ5.3.
RS-422 serial traffic connection to the PDCS module
XJ10.3 T-, RS422 transmit (transmit - signal).
XJ10.4 T+, RS422 transmit (transmit + signal).
The CAN2 bus of the FPVC module, connected to the
XJ10.5 CAN2L DAK keypad.
The CAN2 bus of the FPVC module, connected to the
XJ10.6 CAN2H DAK keypad.
The filtered control signal sent to the feed speed Dan-
XJ10.7 DAO0, Danfoss PVEH drive foss valve.
The filtered control signal sent to the rotation speed
XJ10.8 DAO1, Danfoss PVEH drive Danfoss valve.
Unfiltered feed speed control signal from the FPVC
module. Connected to the XJ3.4 pin of the FPVC
XJ10.9 PWM1 module.
Unfiltered rotation speed control signal from the FPVC
module. Connected to the XJ3.6 pin of the FPVC
XJ10.10 PWM2 module.
XJ11.1 ID1
XJ11.2 ID2
XJ11.3 R-, RS422 receive (receive - signal).
XJ11.4 R+, RS422 receive (receive - signal).
XJ11.5 GND
Short-circuit-protected voltage output, 24 V (can be
XJ11.6 VOUT1 used e.g. as the voltage supply for the sensors).
XJ11.7 VOUT2 Short-circuit-protected voltage output, 24 V.
XJ11.8 VOUT3 Short-circuit-protected voltage output, 24 V.
Short-circuit-protected voltage output, approx. 13.5 V
(can be used e.g. as the voltage supply for the sen-
XJ11.9 XVS sors).
XJ11.10 XVS Short-circuit-protected voltage output, approx. 13.5 V.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
General diagram
FPVC signals External signals
5V power
supply
4x 500mA multifuse
converter
The DAB is connected to the FPVC module connectors XJ7 and XJ8. The DAB connectors XJ10 and
XJ11 are for external signals. The CAN2 and ID signals pass through them.
The DAB has an RS232RS422 converter. The DAB's electrical connections, VOUT1, VOUT2,
VOUT3, and XVS, are overload-protected.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.5.4. RD-module
Figure: RD-module.
General
RD - (Resolver to - Digital) module is general purpose measurement unit for high accuracy
applications demanding with intensive local computing power. The module is intended to be used in
Sandvik drilling machine control systems.
The architecture is designed with awareness of SIL2 class safety requirements.
The RD module provides the following I/O:
1. 4 pieces of resolver to digital converters
2. 4 pieces of analog inputs (4 to 20 mA)
3. 4 pieces of digital I/O which can be configured as any of the following
digital output PNP (0 to 2 A current output)
digital input PNP 24 V
16 bit counter (pulse, pulse width or quadrature) input
4. 2 pieces of digital input which can be configured as
digital input PNP 24 V
16 bit counter (pulse, pulse width or quadrature) input
5. 2 pieces of CAN interface
6. 1 pcs RS232 serial interface for programming of module, can be used for application purposes

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
CPU core
72 MHz ARM7 32-bit processor

BOOT Flash
Program / data FLASH 512kB
20 kB SRAM
Internal monitoring
Internal monitored voltages:

Supply voltage
24V I/O supply
12 V supply
5V supply
3.3 V
Internal temperature measurement
All inputs and outputs are able to handle over voltages, reverse polarity and short circuit to ground
or any signal (RD inputs NOT protected for short circuit to supply voltage)
Power supply
Input power +15+35 VDC for RD measurements. Other functions +8 35 VDC. Over voltage, load
dump and reverse polarity protected.
Connectors
XJ1 I/O con- Pin Marking Default Comments

nector
XJ1 1 refH Resolver 1
XJ1 2 refL
XJ1 3 sinH
XJ1 4 sinL
XJ1 5 cosH
XJ1 6 cosL
XJ1 7 GND
XJ1 8 DI DI1
XJ1 9 GND
XJ1 10 VREF 24 V 500 mA Multifused for sensor supply
XJ1 11 AI AI1

nector
XJ2 2 refL
XJ2 3 sinH
XJ2 4 sinL

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

nector
XJ2 5 cosH
XJ2 6 cosL
XJ2 7 GND
XJ2 8 DI DI2
XJ2 9 GND
XJ2 10 VIO
XJ2 11 AI AI2

nector
XJ3 2 refL
XJ3 3 sinH
XJ3 4 sinL
XJ3 5 cosH
XJ3 6 cosL
XJ3 7 GND
XJ3 8 DI/DO DI DI3 / DO1
XJ3 9 GND
XJ3 11 AI AI3

nector
XJ4 2 refL
XJ4 3 sinH
XJ4 4 sinL
XJ4 5 cosH
XJ4 6 cosL
XJ4 7 GND
XJ4 9 GND
XJ4 11 AI AI4
XJ5 Program- Pin Marking Default Comments

ming connec-
tor
XJ5 1 VS 24 V power supply
XJ5 2 Rx Programming RS232 receive input

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
XJ5 Program- Pin Marking Default Comments

ming connec-
tor
XJ5 3 Tx Programming RS232 transmit output
XJ5 4 PGM open Programming state when shorted to GND
XJ5 5 GND
XJ5 6 GND
XJ6 CAN1 Pin Marking Default Comments

Connector
XJ6 1 VS
XJ6 2 CAN1H
XJ6 3 CAN1H
XJ6 4 CAN1L
XJ6 5 CAN1L
XJ6 6 GND
XJ7 CAN2 Pin Marking Default Comments

XJ7 1 VS
XJ7 2 VS
XJ7 3 CAN2L
XJ7 4 CAN2H
XJ7 5 GND
XJ7 6 GND
XJ8 Configu- Pin Marking Default Comments

ration connec-
tor
XJ8 1 BR2 Both open = 250 kbit/s
XJ8 2 BR1
XJ8 3 ID3 Binary coding. See table below.
XJ8 4 ID2 All open = 0. See table below.
XJ8 5 ID1 All connected to gnd = 8. See table below.
XJ8 6 GND See table below.
Indicators
The device has two digit seven segment display for application related diagnostics.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.5.5. UNI adapter board (UAB)
Figure: UAB-module.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
General description
UAB is an adapter board for RD to make externally signals that are compatible with older TAS system
signalling. This board enables use of RD as spare part for old TAS modules.
Figure: UAB connects directly to RD connectors XJ5 and XJ6.
Connector pinouts
Connector pinouts are listed in following tables.
RD Connector XJ5 pin Signal name Direction (seen from UAB)

1 VS, supply voltage Input
2 Tx ,RS232 transmit output
3 Rx ,RS232 receive Input
4 PGM Not used
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
Table: RD Connector XJ5 pinout

1 VS, supply voltage Input
2 CAN1L Input / output

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

4 CAN1H Input / output
6 GND Ground
Table: RD Connector XJ6 pinout
UAB Connector XJ10 pin Signal name Direction (seen from UAB)
1 T-, RS422 transmit Output
2 T+, RS422 transmit Output
3 R-, RS422 receive Input
4 R+, RS422 receive Input
7 VOUT Output
8 XVS1 Output (+13.5 V)
9 XVS2 Output (+13.5 V)
10 TRIG, 1k5 pulldown Input
Table: UAB Connector XJ10 pinout

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
General diagram
RD signals External signals
XJ5, XJ6 XJ10

CAN1L/H CAN1L/H
500 mA multifuse
VS VOUT
300 mA multifuse
13,5V power XV S1
supply XV S2
5V power
supply
RS232 RS422
Tx Rx RS232 / T+
RS422 T-
Rx Tx R+
converter
R-
1k5
TRIG
The UAB is connected to the RD module's connectors XJ5 and XJ6. UAB connector XJ10 is for
external signals. CAN1 signals are transmitted via this connector.
The UAB has an RS232RS422 converter. The UAB electrical connections, VOUT, XVS1, and XVS2,
are all overload-protected.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.6. Other components
3.6.1. Graphical user interface (GUI-1)
The user interface has a graphical display for showing drilling data, settings, alarms, and other
important messages to the operator. The operator can use the keys and adjustment knob of the GUI-1
for making the drilling settings and adjustments. In addition, the GUI-1 reads the signals from the
panel switches and joystick, and it controls the indicator lights in the panel. All of these signals are
connected through screw terminals. All control signals between the control panel and the rig use the
serial bus (RS422), except the emergency stop, fire extinguishing system (ANSUL), and signal horn,
which are hard-wired.
All control panels to which the GUI-1 is connected are identical and interchangeable. Selection
between the local and remote panels is carried out with a two-position switch in the NN control box
of the rig. The switch position is read by the control system. Both control panels are receiving and
displaying data simultaneously. The control system determines which panel is allowed to send data.
GUI-1 control panel

The serial remote interface option requires the GUI-1 software version to be V05.300 or higher.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.6.2. Indicator panel (QN)
1 1-H613 1 2-H613 1 3-H613 2 H618 3 H619 4 H620
5 1-H612 5 2-H612 5 3-H612 6 H605 7 H606 8 H615
9 1-H611 9 2-H611 9 3-H611 10 H609 11 H601 12 H604
13 H602 14 H610 15 H614 16 H621 17 H617 18 H622
19 H608 20 H607 21 H603 22 H616 23 H623 24 H624
1 Powerpack running (H613)

2 Compressor 1 running (H618)
3 Water booster pump running
(H619)
4 Compressor 2 running (H620)
5 Powerpack motor overload The indicator light goes on if the motor's circuit breaker
(H612) (F100) or the electronic motor protector relay (F101) has
been triggered or if the thermal protection system issues
an alarm (motor temperature exceeds 110 C). The circuit
breaker must be reset by moving its control switch first to
position 0 and then back to position 1. The electronic
motor protector relay must be reset by pressing the
"Reset" button (S300) which is in the door of MP-
switchgear (1000V switchgears). The thermal protection
is reset automatically once the motor temperature has
dropped sufficiently. The indicator light also goes on if the
circuit breaker's magnetic trigger is activated while the
power pack is being started.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
6 Compressor 1 motor overload The indicator light goes on and the power pack,
(H605) compressor, and water pumps stop when the
compressor's circuit breaker (F240) or the electronic
motor protector relay (F241) has been triggered. The
circuit breaker must be reset manually. Turn the main
switch to position 0 before resetting the circuit breaker.
Theelectronic motor protector relay must be reset by
pressing the "Reset" button (S300) which is in the door of
MP-switchgear (1000V switchgears).
7 Water booster pump motor The indicator light goes on and the power pack,
overload (H606) compressor, and water pumps stop when the water
pump's circuit breaker (F230) or the electronic motor
protector relay (F231) has been triggered. The circuit
breaker must be reset manually. Turn the main switch to
position 0 before resetting the circuit breaker. The
electronic motor protector relay must be reset by pressing
the "Reset" button (S300) which is in the door of MP-
switchgear (1000V switchgears).
8 Compressor 2 motor overload The indicator light goes on and the power pack,
(H615) compressor, and water pumps stop when the
compressor's circuit breaker (F240.2) or the electronic
motor protector relay (F241.2) has been triggered. The
circuit breaker must be reset manually. Turn the main
switch to position 0 before resetting the circuit breaker.
The electronic motor protector relay must be reset by
pressing the "Reset" button (S300) which is in the door of
MP-switchgear (1000V switchgears).
9 Powerpack pressure filter clogged The indicator light goes on if the pressure filter has
(H611) become so dirty that it must be replaced. The filter control
device does not stop the drilling functions. When the oil is
cold (below 30 C), the monitoring system is bypassed to
avoid alarms caused by thick oil.
10 Air pressure low (H609) If the air pressure remains below 2.8 bar for more than 10
seconds (default threshold), the pressure control system
stops the drilling. The indicator light remains on, and it can
be turned off by pressing the acknowledgement button
(S505).
11 Water pressure low (H601) If the water pressure remains below 2.8 bar for more than
four seconds (default threshold), the pressure control
system stops the drilling. The indicator light remains on,
and it can be turned off by pressing the acknowledgement
button (S505). Drilling can then be continued normally.
If the water pressure remains below 2.8 bar for more than
a minute, the pressure control system stops the drilling
water pump. The indicator light remains on, and it can be
turned off by pressing the acknowledgement button
(S505). After this, the water pump must be started using
the switch (S501).
12 Compressor air too hot (H604) If the temperature of the output air from the compressor
rises too high, the indicator light goes on and the power
pack, compressor, and water pumps stop.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
13 Hydraulic receiver or shank The indicator light goes on and the power pack,
lubrication device oil level too low compressor, and water pumps stop if the oil level drops
(H602) below the allowed minimum. The level monitoring system
has a three-second time delay for preventing false alarms
if the oil level is momentarily too low for instance, when
the rig rocks.
The indicator light goes off when a sufficient amount of oil
is added and control system is reset by pushing the button
S505.
If the indicator light blinks, the oil level in the shank
lubrication is too low.
14 Hydraulic oil too hot (H610) The indicator light goes on and the powerpack,
compressor, and water pumps stop if the hydraulic oil
temperature exceeds 75 C. The indicator light goes off
automatically when the oil temperature has dropped
sufficiently.
15 Emergency stop activated (H614) When one of the emergency stop buttons is activated, this
indicator light goes on and all electric motors and the
diesel engine stop. The indicator light goes off when the
button(s) are released, but the motors must be started
separately.
16 Electric motor of the air
conditioning compressor running
(H621)
17 Main power switched on (H617) The indicator lights up when the main switch is turned to
the ON position.
18 External pump running (H622)
19 Shank lubrication unit oil level low
(H608)
20 Return oil filter clogged (H607) The indicator light goes on if the return oil filter has become
so dirty that it must be replaced. The filter control device
does not stop the drilling functions. When the oil is cold
(below 30 C), the monitoring system is bypassed to avoid
alarms caused by thick oil.
21 Phase sequence fault (H603) When the main switch is turned on, the relay (K120)
checks the three-phase current for correct direction of
rotation. If the direction of rotation (i.e., the phase
sequence) is incorrect, the indicator light comes on and
the motors are prevented from starting.
22 Air-conditioning compressor The indicator light goes on and the compressor stops if the
motor overload (H616) circuit breaker (F260) is triggered. The circuit breaker
must be reset manually.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
23 Earth fault detected (H623)

24 External pump overflow (H624) The indicator light goes on and the power pack,
compressor, and water pumps stop when the circuit
breaker (F290) or the electronic motor protector relay
(F291) has been triggered. The circuit breaker must be
reset manually. Turn the main switch to position 0 before
resetting the circuit breaker. The electronic motor
protector relay must be reset by pressing the "Reset"
button (S300) which is in the door of MP-switchgear
(1000V switchgears).

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.6.3. BUP2 converter
General
The purpose of the BUP2 converter is to serve as an interface the bipolar (RS422-type) depth sensors
and the RD module inputs (PW).
A low-going 56 ms TTL-level trigger pulse from the RD module is shortened to a 2 ms RS422-level
bipolar trigger pulse for the sensor. The sensor then sends back a pulse-width-modulated RS422-
level pulse. This pulse is converted back into a high-going TTL-level pulse for the RD module.
Properties
15 V sensor supply.
All connections short-circuit-protected, GND / +24 V.
2 3
Figure: BUP2 connections
1 BUP2
2 RD
3 Linear sensor

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Diagnostics
In normal operation, the green 24 V OK indicator light should be on and both yellow LEDs blinking
rapidly.
- The green 24V OK indicator light is on when supply voltage is available.
- The yellow TRGout OK indicator light blinks rapidly when the BUP2 receives trigger pulses from
the RD module and sends them to the sensor. (NOTE: If the RD module has not been initialized
through the CAN bus, it does not send the trigger signal.)
- The yellow PWin OK indicator light blinks rapidly when the BUP2 receives pulse-width-modulated
measurement data from the sensor.
Compatibility with the old BUP2 module (ID-17736678)
The BUP2 is fully compatible with the old BUP module. If the BUP (ID-17736678) is replaced with
the BUP2 (ID-10737848) and the BUP2 does not work properly (TRGout indicator light blinks but
PWin is off), interchange the TRGout+ and TRGout- wires coming from the sensor.
Checking the operation
To quickly check the operation, follow these steps:

- Connect 24 V voltage (X1/4: +24 V, X1/5: GND).
- Connect the TRG outputs to the PW inputs (X1/11 to X1/8 and X1/12 to X1/7).
- Connect wire X1/10 to the TRGin- connection, and quickly touch the 24 V terminal with it.
- If the BUP2 is intact, both yellow indicator lights blink when the terminal is touched.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.6.4. Danfoss valve
The Danfoss valve is not part of the control system but an actuator. However, it must be noted that
the valve self-diagnostics affect valve behavior.
The Danfoss proportional valves, for rotation flow (Y5-6) and feed flow (Y3-4), operate with a
proportional input signal. This means that the input signal (connector pin 2) is defined as a proportion
of the supply voltage (connector pin 1).
The active signal range is 2575% of the supply voltage. The neutral position has been defined as
50%.
Connector pin order:
1 = power supply, 2 = control, 3 = fault signal, 4 = ground
Fault monitoring system
Danfoss valves have fault monitoring built into the valve control unit. The indicator light is on top of
the valve control unit.
Danfoss valve control unit indicator light

When the indicator light is green, the valve is operating normally. If a fault is detected by the valve
monitoring system, the indicator light turns red and an error signal is sent to connector pin 3 (= 20
V).
The following events may cause a fault message in the fault monitoring system:
- Control signal monitoring: The control signal voltage is continuously monitored. The allowed
range is 1585% of the supply voltage. The DL control system supply voltage may be 2428 V.
- Spool position: The valve measures the spool position continuously. If, on account of a broken
sensor or a short circuit, the measurement cannot be done, an error signal is given.
- Spool position compared to the control signal: The actual position of the spool must always
correspond to the required position (control signal). If the distance from neutral to the actual position
is greater than the required distance, the system detects an error and issues an error signal.
Two types of Danfoss valves have been used in DL control systems. Fault monitoring is active in the
old type and passive in the new type of valves. The valve type was changed in 1997.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Active type
The error state is retained in the memory. Even when the error condition disappears, the alarm signal
(red indicator light) will not go off (turn green) until the control system has been restarted. When the
indicator light turns red, it disables the operation of the valve and the spool moves to the middle
position.
Passive type
The error state is not retained in the memory. When the error condition disappears, the alarm signal
(red indicator light) goes off (turns green) and the valve can be used without restarting ofe system.
3.6.5. Fuse protection for TAS components
DL400-series models Other DL models Component power supply

F451.1 F321.1 Modules at the boom and feed
unit
F451.2 F321.2 Modules at the carrier
F451.3 F321.3 Control panel / GUI
F451.4 F321.4 Mobile computer (PC)
F is replaced with CB in American and Canadian DL control systems.
Module-internal protection
Each FPVC drilling control module has one built-in 24 VDC, 500 mA Vref output (XJ4.1) protected
by a semiconductor fuse. When the fault is eliminated, this fuse is reset automatically.
The FPVC module is described in more detail in the section "Fast Proportional Valve Controller
Module (FPVC)" (p. 29) and the RD module in the section "RD-module" (p. 36) .
GUI panel internal protection
There is a 1.6 A glass tube fuse inside the GUI-1 panel.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.6.6. Fan option
The fan option makes it possible to drill an uphole fan with DL420 ZRF and DL410 ZRC rigs. The fan
option requires optional equipment to be installed on the rig. Required equipment:
- Linear position sensors for:
- boom extension (B101)
- drilling unit (B16)
- Boom swing angle sensor (B11) The structure and operation corresponds to the boom tilt angle
sensor.
- Stinger pressure sensors, front (B152) and rear (B15).
- Stinger proximity switches, front (S151) and rear (S14, S14.2).
The above components are connected to the system via the free analog and digital inputs of the
existing TAS modules. The connections are made as follows:
1. Module no. 03, in the R2 box:
- boom extension linear position sensor B101
- boom swing angle sensor B11
- front stinger proximity switch S151
- rear stinger proximity switch S14.1, S14.2
- drilling unit position sensor B16
- front stinger pressure sensor B152
- rear stinger pressure sensor B15
For more information about the connections, refer to the DL400-series fan control circuit diagram.
Implementation of the fan option also requires rig's software to be updated.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.7. TMS-ZRU
TMS-ZRU is an angle indicator system intended for devices equipped with SB120P booms. The
system is based on a completely different set of sensors than the current TMS system. TMS-ZRU
utilizes a TAS module serial communication interface that has so far been used only to connect the
QN panel to the DL control system.
The system consists of five angle sensors, three double-axled tilt sensors, two potentiometer angle-
sensors and one linear sensor. The sensors are placed and connected as follows:
- 1. Angle sensor B140 is located in the front of the carrier and measures the tilt angle of the carrier
both from the front and from the sides. The sensor is connected to the FPVC in box R1..
- 2. Angle sensor B20 is installed on the swing joint of the boom and measures the swing angle of
the boom. The sensor is connected to the FPVC in box R2.
- 3. Tilt sensor B26 is located below the outer boom and measures the elevation of the boom both
from the front and from the sides. The sensor is connected to the FPVC in box R2
- 4. Angle sensor B6 is installed on the tilt joint of the drilling module and measures the tilt angle of
the drilling module. The sensor is connected to the FPVC in box R3.
- 5. Tilt sensor B7 is located in the drilling module and measures the rotation angle of the drilling
module. The sensor is connected to the FPVC in box R3.
- 6. Linear sensor B17 is installed on the drilling boom, attached to the outer boom and has a
measuring wire in the inner boom. The sensor measures the length of the boom according to the
changes in length of the measuring wire when the zoom movement of the boom is used. The sensor
is connected to the RD module in box R2.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
1 6
6 1
2
Figure: Locations of the TMS-ZRU sensors
1 B20 Angle sensor

2 B6 Angle sensor
3 B7 Tilt sensor
4 B26 Tilt sensor
5 B140 Tilt sensor
6 B17 Linear sensor
The implementation of TMS-ZRU requires that the device is installed with software that includes TMS-
DDS

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
3.8. Serial remote control interface
The serial remote control interface is an option that enables connection of the DL control panel to the
DL control system via an RS422 serial connection. If the serial remote control interface is
implemented, the local remote control panel cannot be used and the panel selection switch selects
between the local panel and the serial remote control panel. To add the serial remote control interface
to the DL control system, the following components are required:
- junction box (JB21), installed near the 2XH connector
- wiring between the NN-box's terminal strip and JB21 and from JB21 to 06 (DL430 model) or to 07
(other DL400 models)
In addition to hardware components, software changes are required:

- DL application program with the remote control option
- GUI-1 software version V05.300 or higher for the serial remote control panel
3.8.1. Remote start
A DL control panel operated through the serial remote control interface works like a normal control
panel. The DL control system can be started remotely from this control panel. This cannot be done
with the local panel or the local remote control panel. Remote starting is possible only if
communication between the remote control panel and the DL control system is working.
Remote starting can be performed by pressing the power pack stop button (SH71) and horn button
(S81) simultaneously and holding for five seconds. The bypass button (SH80) light and horn button
light will then start to blink slowly. The DL control system is reset within a maximum of four minutes.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4. SENSORS
4.1. Water flushing flow control switch S9 and air flushing flow control switch
S10 (extra equipment)
Flushing flow is monitored by an electronic flow control sensor.
1 BN
2 L+
4 BK
3 1 A
3 BU
4 L--
Figure: Normally open (NO) TAS CONTROL SYSTEM
3 BU
2 L+
4 BK
3 1 A
1 BN
4 L--
Figure: Normally closed (NC) RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
Core colours of sockets:

1 = BN (brown), 3 = BU (blue), 4 = BK (black).

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.1.1. Adjustment
Before adjustment
Do the adjustment when the drilling equipment is in the hole and the maximum drilling hole lenght is
drilled.
Connect the power on to the control system.
The sensor can be adjusted when power has been switched on for flushing by the flushing control
lever.
Wait 10 seconds with water and 20 seconds for air to allow the flow to become constant.
Adjusting
Press the Learn/Set button and keep it pressed

until the outmost green LEDs on the right and
on the left will flash.
After 3 s the LED bar (green) fills from left to
right.
Release the button as soon as the first LED light
comes steady (the LED bar (green) continues
filling from left to right).
The indication goes off briefly.
The unit stores the current flow rate.
The unit is ready for normal operation.
Adjusting scales the units maximum flow, 100%. If flow lowers to 70% of the maximum flow, sensor
activates and gives flow failure information.
100 %
70 %
ERROR
t

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.2. Series 5010
4.2.1. Electrical connection
The unit must be connected by a qualified electrician.

The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical equipment must be adhered
to.
Disconnect power.
Connect the unit as follows:
A B
Figure: Normally open (NO) TAS CONTROL SYSTEM
A: SI5010 (positive switching); B: SI5011 (negative switching)

Core colours of sockets:
1 = BN (brown), 2 = WH (white), 3 = BU (blue), 4 = BK (black)
Use 4-wire connection cables without a link between pins 2 and
NOTE! 4. With 3-wire sockets with a link between pin 2 and pin 4
switching of the output stage triggers the remote adjustment.
See section "Setting up for water media". (configure the switching output) for normally closed (NC)
operation for RELAY CONTROLLED SYSTEM.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.2.2. Operating and display elements
F low
Lo w H igh
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Setpo int
2 3
1. Operation display:
The green LEDs indicate the current flow (the LEDs 0 to 9 represent the range between no
flow and maximum flow).
A lighting LED indicates the position of the switch point (orange = output closed, red = output
open).
2. Setting button for adjustment and configuration.
3. Setting button for adjustment and configuration.
Operation
After every power on all LEDs light and go out again step by step (during this time the output is closed
if configured as normally open). The unit is then ready for operation.
In case of power failure or interruption all settings remain.
Operating indicators
Green LED bar: Current flow within the represen-
tation range. Indication of the switch point (SP):
LED orange: output closed.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LED red: output open.
LED 9 flashes: current flow above the represen-
tation range.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LED 0 flashes: current flow far below the repre-

sentation range.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Interference indicators
Short circuit at the switching output: The operat-
ing indicator and red LEDs light alternately.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
If the short circuit has been rectified, the unit im-
mediately passes into the normal operating state.
The current operating state is displayed.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Display OFF (no LED lights): Operating voltage too low (< 19 V) or failed. En-
sure a correct voltage supply.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Basic functionality of set-up
Switch on the supply voltage.

- All LEDs light and go out again step by step. During this time the output is open (Normally closed
operation) (if configured as normally open). The unit is in the operating mode.
Let the normal flow circulate in the installation.
Check the display and determine further actions.
F low The factory setting is suitable for the applica-

Lo w H igh
tion.
1
No further settings are required.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
F low Your normal flow is below the representation

Lo w H igh
range of the display. 2 setting options:
2
Change the switch point.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Carry out high flow adjustment.
F low Your normal flow exceeds the representation
Lo w H igh
range of the display (LED 9 flashes).
3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
You can restore the factory setting any time.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.2.3. Setting up for water media
High flow adjustment for water flow sensor S9 and air flow sensor S10
The unit determines the existing flowas normal flow and adapts the display representation (all LEDs
except the switch point LED light green).
Let the normal flow circulate in the installation. Note that different kind of drill steel (tubes/rods and
drill bits) effects the flow. As well as the maximum drilling hole length.
Press the pushbutton and keep it pressed.
- LED 9 lights, after approx. 5 s it flashes.
Release the pushbutton.
The unit is now adapted to your flow conditions. It passes into the operating mode, the display should
now show example 1.
F low The factory setting is suitable for the applica-

Lo w H igh
tion.
1
No further settings are required.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NOTE! The switching point (LED 7) is now set to 70% of the normal flow.
Switch point can be adjusted in case of switch point differs from 70%.See section Change the switch
point.
The adjustment affects the switch point: It is increased
NOTE!
proportionally (maximum up to LED 7).
Low flow adjustment for air flow sensor S10
When using other media than water, it is highly recommended

NOTE! that you should additionally adapt the unit to the minimum flow
(flow as 0 %).
The following adjustment must only be carried out after the high
NOTE!
flow adjustment.
Let the minimum flow circulate in the installation or ensure flow standstill.
Press the pushbutton and keep it pressed.

Release the pushbutton. The unit adopts the new value and passes into the operating mode.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Change the switch point (optional)
For the factory setting the switch point is at LED 7. A change makes sense if:
1. Nytt nytt, kuten esimerkiss 2.
F low Your normal flow is below the representation

Lo w H igh
range of the display. 2 setting options:
2
Change the switch point.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2. The flow fluctuates much or pulsates.

3. If a faster response time of the unit is requested (low switch point = fast response with rising flow,
high switch point = fast response with falling flow).
Briefly press the pushbutton or .
- The switch point LED flashes.

Press the pushbutton or as often as required. Each press of the pushbutton shifts the LED
by one position in the indicated direction.
If no pushbutton is pressed for 2 s, the unit returns to the

NOTE!
operating mode with the newly set value.
The typical response time of the unit is 1...10 s. It can be

influenced by the setting of the switch point:
NOTE!
Low switch point = quick reaction with rising flow
High switch point = quick reaction with falling flow
Configure the switching output
The unit is delivered as normally open. In case of need you can change the output to normally closed:
Press the units pushbutton for at least 15 s.

- After 10 s the current setting is displayed: LEDs 5...9 light orange (= output normally open).
- After approx. 15 s LEDs 0...4 flash orange.
Release the pushbutton. The output is changed to normally closed operation.
For a new changeover repeat the operation.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Restore the factory setting (reset)
If the unit is not working properly or connecting the settings failed, the unit can be reset to factory
settings. After this continue connecting the settings, see section "Setting up for water media".
Press the units pushbutton for at least 15 s.
- After approx. 15 s LEDs 0...9 flash orange.
Release the pushbutton. All settings are reset to the factory setting:
- Operating area: 5 ...100 cm/s for water.
- Switch point: LED 7
- Output function: NO
- Unlocked.
Lock / unlock the unit
The unit can be locked electronically to prevent unintentional settings.

Press both setting pushbuttons simultaneously for at least 10 s in the operating mode.
- The indication goes out, the unit locks or unlocks.
On delivery: unlocked.
Error during adjustment
If no adjustment is possible, all LEDs flash red. The unit then passes into the operating mode with
unchanged values.
Possible cause / aid:
Error during installation Check whether all requirements have been met.
The difference between maximum flow and min- Increase the flow difference and carry out the ad-
imum flow is too small. justment once again.
The sequence high flow / low flow adjustment Carry out the two adjustment operations again in
was not adhered to. the right sequence.
4.2.4. Maintenance
Recommended maintenance:
Check the sensor tip for build-up from time to time.
Clean it using a soft cloth. Stubborn build-up (e.g. lime) can be removed using a common vinegar
cleaning agent.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.2.5. Scale drawing
1 2
50 63
27
M12x1
113
14
65
22
60
45
7,7
1 LED bar display

2 Set button
4.2.6. Technical data
Application area Liquids and gases

Operating voltage [V] 19 ... 36 DC
Current rating [mA] 250
Short-circuit protection, pulsed; reverse polarity / < 2.5
overload protection Voltage drop [V]
Current consumption [mA] < 60
Power-on delay time [s] 10, optically indicated

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.3. Boom tilt angle sensor IASU 45 (B6) with TMS (optional)
This text refers also to the boom swing angle sensor (B11), which is required for the fan option.
The tilt sensor is used for measuring the feed

tilt angle.
SF XXX
The transducer is enclosed in an aluminum cas-
ing and connected to the control system
through a five-pin MIL connector. Supply volt- UP
age is 15 VDC from the RD module.
The sensor is an inclinometer-type angle sen-
sor. It utilizes Earth's gravity, and its measure- --- +
ment range is 45. It operates on a capacitive 45 45
principle, so there are no moving mechanical
parts in the sensor. The angle value is deter- 0
mined on the basis of the level changes of the

liquid inside the sensor as the sensor tilts.
The RD module sends a triggering signal to the
angle sensor at a set frequency (80 ms inter-
val). When the sensor has received the trigger-
ing signal, it sends a so-called PW (pulse width)
signal to the RD module. The raw value of the
angle corresponds to the width of the PW sig-
nal.
The POL signal indicates the change of the
transducer's range from positive to negative.
BOOM TILT ANGLE SE NSOR

Old UNI New RD
C ON TR OL S Y S TE M
GND X1.8 <=> GND XJ8:6
XVS.15V X1.20 <=> XSV2 XJ10:9
TRIG X2.10 <=> CAN2H XJ7:4
in0/pol0 X2.12 <=> DI/DO XJ3:8
in6/ctr0 X2-5 <=> DI XJ1:8
B6
TRIG
PULSE WIDTH EQUALS

ANGLE RAW VALUE
Each sensor has a scaling factor. The factor is marked on the sensor and on the sensor type plate.
The value consists of four numbers and is approximately 6000. Note: This figure is needed every
time the sensor is calibrated.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
BOO M TI LT SE N SO R IAS U RAW VALU E BOO M SWI NG SE NSO R IAS U R AW VALUE

DIRECTION OF THE BOOM IN DEGREES DIRECTION OF THE BOOM IN DEGREES
C BACKWARD FORWARD D E LEFT RIGHT F
A RAW VALUE A RAW VALUE
B POLARITY--SIGNAL B POLARITY--SIGNAL
A. Raw value
B. Polarity signal
Direction of the boom in degrees:
C. Backward
D. Forward
E. Left
F. Right

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.4. Rotation sensor IASU 360 (B7) with TMS (optional)
The rotation sensor is used for measuring the feed rotation angle.
The twin sensor is enclosed in an aluminum casing and connected to the control system through a
10-pin MIL connector. The supply voltage is 15 VDC from the RD module.
The sensors are inclinometer-type angle sensors. They utilize the Earth's gravity, and their
measurement range is 360. The operating principle is capacitive; i.e., there are no moving
mechanical parts in the sensors. The angle value is determined on the basis of liquid level changes
as the sensors tilt.
The RD module sends a triggering signal to the angle sensors at a certain frequency (80 ms interval).
After receiving the triggering signal, the sensor sends a PW (pulse-width) signal to the RD module.
The raw value of the angle corresponds to the width of the PW signals.
The POL signals indicate the change of the sensors' range from positive to negative.
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL
2 1
GND X1.16 <=> GND XJ2:7
XVS.15V X1.20 <=> XVS2 XJ10:9

A
in1/pol1 X2.13 <=> DI/DO XJ3:10
in7/ctr X2-6 <=> DI 1XJ2:8
in0/pol0 X2.12 <=> DI/DOXJ3:8

in6/ctr0 X2-5 <=> DI XJ1:8
Figure: Rotation sensor and it's connection to the RD module.
1 Boom rotation angle sensor B7

2 RD
A Control system
B Pulse width corresponding to
angle raw value 1
C Pulse width corresponding to
angle raw value 2

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Figure: Raw values from rotation sensor IASU 360.
1. Value 1
2. Value 2
A. Raw value
B. Polarity signals
C. Drilling unit direction in degrees, viewed from in front of the feed

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.5. Rock drill position sensor (B8) with TMS, DDS, and DATA equipment
This sensor is used for measuring the rock drill penetration rate, measuring the hole depth in
automatic rigs, and determining the rock drill position.
Signal processing
The RD module sends a unipolar triggering signal to the BUP2 module at a certain frequency (30 ms
interval). The BUP2 module transforms this signal into a bipolar triggering signal for the depth sensor.
After receiving the triggering signal, the sensor sends a bipolar PW (pulse-width) signal to the BUP
module. The depth value corresponds to the width of the PW signal. The BUP2 transforms the PW
signal back into a unipolar signal for the RD module.
3 2 1
GND X1.16 <=> GND XJ2:7
VCC.24 V X1.7 <=> VS XJ??
CNTR2 X2-7 <=> DI/DO XJ4:10

A
B
B
1 Rock drill position sensor B8

2 Signal converter BUP2
3 RD
A Control system
B Pulse width corresponding to the
raw angle value

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Operation of the sensor
In the sensor, a torsional strain pulse is induced in a specially designed magnetostrictive waveguide
by the momentary interaction of two magnetic fields. One of these fields emanates from a permanent
magnet that passes along the outside of the sensor tube. The other is produced by a current pulse
launched along a wire inside the waveguide.
The interaction between the two fields produces a strain pulse, which travels at ultrasonic speed down
the waveguide. This strain pulse is detected by a coil at the end of the device.
The position of the permanent magnet can be measured precisely by measuring the wave travel time.
2 3 4
5
1
6 7 8
B8
1 Waveguide
2 Waveguide twist
3 External magnetic field
4 Interaction of the magnetic fields
makes the waveguide twist
5 Magnetic field caused by a current
pulse
6 Connecting element
7 Strain tape
8 Magnet
9 Sensing coil

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
A Distance
B Current pulse and strain pulse current pulse time + strain pulse = distance = pulse width
Rock drill position sensor change
In 2004, the position sensors of Solo 200/07/7 and Solo Sixty rock drills were changed from TTS-RX-
M-1280-D-E-004 and TTS-RX-M-2000-D-E-004 to GHS1280MW052DE3 and
GHS2000MW052DE3. This change was because the depth sensor manufacturer stopped
manufacturing the TTS models. Just before the change, the conductive material inside the sensor
waveguide was also changed. The current/strain pulse propagation velocity was lower in the new
material. Because of this, the pulse-width values grew so high that they caused failure of the linear
sensors. To avoid the linear sensor failures, the sensor pulse circulation factor was changed from 4
to 3. The circulation factor indicates the number of times that the sensor signal converter unit
measures the magnet location before passing the result to the RD module. This causes a problem
in some very old Solo rigs, since they have a fixed depth scaling factor; i.e., they had no depth sensor
calibration feature. If the new sensor model is installed on such old Solos, the software must be
upgraded. In this case, please contact Sandvik's customer service department.
These new GH-series sensors have error indi-

LEDS cator lights.
Green Red Description

On Off Normal operation
On On Magnet not detected
On Blinking External output signal missing
Blinking Off Programming mode

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.6. Pressure sensor
The drilling pressures (percussion, feed, rotation, and flushing) are measured by pressure sensors.
The pressure sensors transform the pressure values into electrical signals that the control system
can use for making adjustments and controlling the display.
1 15 V DC
SIG. OUT
1 Valve block
2 Percussion pressure gauge
Percussion (B1), feed (B2), and rotation (B3)
- pressure range 0250 bar
- output signal 420 mA
- supply voltage 1036 VDC
Flushing (B9)
- pressure range 025 bar
- output signal 420 mA
- supply voltage 1036 VDC

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.7. Inductive proximity switch
An inductive proximity switch is used for determining the movements of the rod changer in automatic
rigs.
It detects the position of certain actuators. The switch is activated when a metal object approaches
its sensor head.
brown
24V
S11 blue
3 x 0,75 + C
OV
SIG
black
The sensors are of the PNP type with normally open contacts. The cable is connected to the sensor
via a connector.
Possible faults:
Broken cable
Sensor adjusted too close or too far from target
Iron ore on the sensor
The sensor and its cable can be ordered separately as spare parts.
Avoid welding near the sensors, and prevent the flow of welding current via the sensor installation
boxes.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.8. Boom extension (B101) and rock drill unit (B16) linear position sensors
with the fan option
These sensors are used for measuring the drilling unit position during positioning of the feed beam
for the hole to be drilled.
Signal processing
The sensor generates an initial pulse with a frequency of 2 kHz. This pulse is reflected back from the
point where the magnet is. The reflected pulse is converted to a 420 mA current message inside
the sensor. The current message is then sent to the RD module analog input. The depth value
corresponds to the current value of the message.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Operation of the sensor
The sensor generates a short current pulse, the initial pulse, which starts the measurement. The pulse
generates a magnetic field that spirals around the sensor waveguide. A permanent magnet at the
measurement point is used as the marker element for the position. Its magnetic field is at a right angle
to the magnetic field generated by the current pulse. In the area of the waveguide, where these two
magnetic fields intersect, a magnetostrictive effect causes an elastic deformation of the waveguide,
which propagates along the waveguide in the form of a mechanical deformation wave at 2830 m/s.
The component of the deformation wave that reaches the far end of the waveguide is damped, and
the component that arrives at the signal converter is converted into an electrical signal through
reversal of the magnetostrictive effect. The deformation wave travel time from the point of origin to
the signal converter is directly proportional to the distance between the permanent magnet and the
signal converter.
1 7
6
5
2 4
1 Initial pulse
2 Copper wire
3 Signal converter
4 Receiver
5 Waveguide
6 Mechanical wave
7 Permanent magnet
8 Magnetic field
9 Damper

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.9. Inclinometer angle sensors (B140, B26, and B7), TMS-ZRU
This sensor type has a dual-axis accelerometer,

measuring the sensor movement in the X-axis
X+ and Y-axis, which are perpendicular to each
other. The sensor is installed such that the pos-
itive x-direction (X+) is pointing forward as seen
from the operator's seat. The sensor has a male
Y+ Y M12 connector, and the transmission uses the
RS422 protocol. The sensor is packed in a plas-
tic case, and its protection class is IP65.
M12
AWhen the sensor is started, there is a 10-second delay before it starts to send angle data. The
sensor detects new angle data once every 500 ms. Since the sensor need not be configured before
use, only the sensor's serial transmission lines are in use.
M12 connector pin order:

1 VCC +9...+30 V
4 2 TX-
3
5 3 GND
4 TX+
5 Protection
1 2
Technical data for the sensor:

- inclination angle measurement range 90 in both X and Y directions
- measurement accuracy 0.1
- operating voltage +9....+30 VDC
- operating current 60100 mA
- operating temperature -35...+65 C
- storage temperature -55...+95 C
- dimensions 110 (W) x 75 (H) x 56.5 (D) (mm)

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4.10. Angle sensors (B20 and B6), TMS-ZRU
The operation of this sensor is based on the use of a potentiometer. The sensor has a rotating center
flange, whose position is measured in relation to the frame of the sensor. The measurement is
performed by means of an accuracy potentiometer with a linearity of 0.05% within the measurement
range. The sensor is installed such that its zero direction is parallel to the rig's corresponding angle
zero direction. The sensor has a male M12 connector, and the transmission uses the RS422 protocol.
The sensor is packed in a plastic case, and its protection class is IP65.
Nominal
Turning area
0
-- 175
+175

Sensor mounting holes

In the frame (behind)
M12--male
connector
When the sensor is started, there is a 10-second delay before it starts to send angle data. The sensor
detects new angle data once every 500 ms. Since the sensor need not be configured before use,
only the sensor's serial transmission lines are in use.
Pin order for the M12 male connector: PIN Explanation

1 VCC +9...+30 V
4 2 TX-
3
5 3 GND
4 TX+
5 Protection
1 2
Technical data for the sensor:

- nominal measurement range 175
- measurement accuracy 0.1
- operating voltage +9....+30 VDC
- operating current 60100 mA

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
- operating temperature -35...+65 C

- storage temperature -55...+95 C
- dimensions 100 () x 85 (H) (mm)
4.11. Linear sensor
Measurement is based on a resolver element and

a 15:1 reduction gear. The linear sensor is con-
nected directly to the RD module housed in box
R2 with a 6-poled conductor.
Output: Resolver
Measuring area: 4500 mm
Accuracy: 2 mm
Operating temperature: -40...+70 C
Operating current: 24 VDC
Housing class: IP67 (water and dust proof)

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
5. REPLACING COMPONENTS
5.1. Replacing a valve cable
Use only original valve cables.
1. Turn off the control system power with switch S900.

2. Open the valve-end connection. Memorize the Y number of the valve (e.g., Y44).
3. Open the installation box of the module (e.g., R2). Refer to the electrical diagram for the
connectors of the valve (e.g., brown wire X2.19 and blue wire X1.8), and disconnect them.
4. Loosen the sealing bushing of the connector cable, and pull the old cable out.
5. Install a new cable in reverse order to the above. Ensure that no water or dirt is left inside the
installation box of the module. Remember to connect the screen of the cable.
6. Apply protective grease to the module connections after connecting them. Close the installation
box carefully.
7. Mark the new cable with the correct Y number (e.g., Y44) at the valve end.
1 2 3
Y44
brown
blue
1 LED
2 Y number
3 Blocking diode

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
5.2. Replacing an inductive sensor cable (automatic and semi-automatic

models)
Always use original connection cables with a sensor connector

at the sensor end.

2. Remove the sensor bracket.
3. Open the plastic cap of the sensor bracket.
4. Remove the sensor from the sensor bracket by twisting.
5. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.
6. Pull the sensor cable out through the rubber grommet of the sensor bracket. Memorize the S
number of the sensor (e.g., S30).
connectors of the sensor, and disconnect them.
installation box. Remember to connect the screen of the cable.
10. Apply protective grease to the connections after connecting them.
11. Close the installation box carefully and check the sealing bushing tightness.
12. Check the sensor operation as described in this manual.
brown
24V
S11 blue
3 x 0,34 + C
OV
SIG
black

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
5.3. Replacing the inductive sensors
Always use original sensors with a cable connector.
Figure: Example image for the sensor mounting.

2. Remove the sensor bracket.
3. Remove the sensor from the sensor bracket by twisting.
4. Disconnect the connector from the sensor, and replace the sensor.
5. Adjust the sensor according to the instructions.
6. Check the sensor operation as described in this manual.
5.4. Replacing the angle or position sensors (B6, B7, and B11) (fan option)
Always use original sensors.

2. Disconnect the connector from the angle or position sensor.
3. Replace the sensor.
4. Write down the scaling factor for the sensor. It is found on the type plate on the right side of the
sensor box.
5. Calibrate the sensor according to the instructions (GUI1).
6. Check the sensor operation as instructed in this manual.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
5.5. Replacing the angle or position sensor cables
8
6 6 6
4
3 5
1 Protective plate
2 Protective housing
3 Protective housing cover
4 Mounting screws
5 Plug
6 Seal ring
7 Lead-through screw
8 Sensor cable
9 Protective tube
1. Run the rock drill close to the rear stopper (about 30 cm).
2. Rotate the drilling module to the horizontal. The minimum clearance to the wall on the feed beam
side is 1.5 m.
4. Disconnect the linear sensor cable from the BUP2 module.
5. Remove the protective tube (9) of the cable.
6. Remove the protective plate (1) at the end of the feed beam.
7. Remove the screws (4) and the protective housing cover (3), and loosen the lead-through (7).
8. Remove the sensor cable (8) connector by twisting, and pull the sensor cable out through the
rubber grommet of the protective housing cover.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
9. Remove the linear sensor and its protective housing (2) from the end of the feed cylinder by
twisting. Beware of oil spillage!
10. Install intact seal rings (6) around the threads of the new sensor. If the seal rings are not
installed, the sensor will be filled with oil during use.
11. Install a new linear sensor in the protective housing.
12. Carefully slide the sensor into the feed cylinder. Keep the sensor aligned with the cylinder while
pushing it in (the sensor must go inside the tube holding the magnet).
13. Screw in the sensor cable connector, screw the protective housing onto the feed cylinder, and
tighten it to 40 Nm.
14. Pull the sensor cable in through the rubber grommet of the protective housing.
15. Fill the protective housing (2) with protective grease.
16. Fill the sensor cover (3) with protective grease.
17. Attach the protective housing cover (3) to the housing. Place it in the position that best fits the
cable lead-through.
18. Before tightening the sensor cover screws (4), lubricate the screws with graphite grease and
replace the plug (5) with a grease nipple.
19. Tighten the screws (4) to 13 Nm.
20. Remove the grease nipple and plug the hole.
21. Tighten the cable lead-through.
22. Connect the cable to the BUP2 module.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
5.6. Replacing the position sensors (B16 and B101) (fan option)
4 3 2
Figure: Position sensor.
1 Sensor element
2 Protective cover
3 Sensor cover
4 Lead-through
2. Remove the sensor cover (3) bolts from the boom or drilling module body.
3. Remove the sensor protective cover (2) by removing the cover bolts.
4. Disconnect the linear sensor cable from the sensor element (1).
5. Pull the linear sensor out of the protective housing.
6. Remove the linear sensor from the protective cover (2) by twisting, and loosen the lead-through
(4).
7. Disconnect the cable from the RD module connector, and pull the sensor cable out through the
rubber grommet of the protective housing cover.
8. Install a new linear sensor in the protective housing.
9. Carefully slide the sensor into the feed cylinder. Keep the sensor aligned with the cylinder while
pushing it in (the sensor must go inside the tube holding the magnet).
10. Pull the new sensor cable in through the rubber grommet of the protective housing cover.
11. Fill the protective housing with protective grease.
12. Attach the sensor protective cover to the housing. Place it in the position that best fits the cable
lead-through.
13. Tighten the cable lead-through.
14. Connect the cable to the RD module.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
5.7. Replacing the angle or position sensor cables
Always use original connection cables.

2. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. Memorize the B number of the sensor (e.g., B6).
connectors, and disconnect the cables.
installation box. Remember to connect the screen of the cable.
6. Apply protective grease to the connections after connecting them.
7. Close the installation box carefully and check the sealing bushing tightness.
8. Check the sensor operation as described in the manual.
5.8. Module replacement (FPVC, RD)

2. Open the installation box of the module (e.g., R3).
3. Disconnect module connectors XJ1XJ8.
4. Remove the module from the bottom of the box.
5. Replace the module with a new one with the same ID code (e.g., FPVC).
6. Apply protective grease to the connectors, and connect them.
7. Check the operation of the new module from the modules display. For further information, refer
to the diagnostics instructions: "RD module error states (modules 3, 6, and 7)" (p. 115) , "FPVC
module error states (for modules 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9)" (p. 113) and "FPVC module error
states (module 0)" (p. 113) .
8. Close the installation box carefully.
9. Check the module operation as instructed in this manual.
10. Calibrate the proportional valve outputs, if necessary.
5.9. Replacement of the mobile computer

2. Open the NN box.
3. Disconnect the M12 connectors.
4. Remove the mobile computer from the mounting plate.
5. Install the new mobile computer on the mounting plate.
6. Apply protective agent to the M12 connectors in line with the greasing instructions (571).
7. Connect the M12 connectors.
8. Turn on the control system power with switch S900.
9. Check the operation of the mobile computer as instructed in this manual.
10. Close the NN box cover.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
5.10. Replacement of the Ethernet serial traffic converter

2. Open the NN box.
3. Disconnect the M12 connectors.
4. Remove the Ethernet converter from the mounting plate.
5. Install the new converter in its place.
6. Apply protective agent to the M12 connectors in line with the greasing instructions (571).
7. Connect the M12 connectors.
8. Turn on the control system power with switch S900.
9. Check the operation of the serial traffic converter as is described in this manual.
10. Close the NN box cover.
5.11. Replacing the BUP2 module (A1)

2. Open the installation box of the module (R4).
3. Disconnect connector X1.
4. Remove the module from the bottom of the box.
5. Replace the module with another one with the same ID code.
6. Apply protective grease to the connector, reconnect it, and close the installation box carefully.
7. Check the operation of sensor B8 according to the GUI-1 manual.
5.12. Replacing the angle sensors (TMS-ZRU)

2. Remove the sensor box cover.
3. Disconnect the M12 connector of the sensor cable.
4. Check the sensor's connection direction.
5. Remove the sensor mounting bolts and remove the sensor.
6. Replace the sensor with another one with the same ID code.
7. Install the sensor mounting bolts. Check that the new sensor is installed such that it points in the
same direction as the removed one.
8. Connect the M12 connector of the sensor cable.
9. Reinstall the sensor protective cover.
10. Check the sensor operation from the service screen.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
5.13. Changing the linear sensor (the zoom sensor of the boom)
3 1
9
8
10
14
13
11
7
12
Before starting maintenance, retract the boom.
1. Shut down the diesel engine and/or power packs.

2. Turn both the battery isolation switch and the drill rig main switch to the 0 position.
3. Remove the cuttings guard (2) of the boom by unscrewing the fastening screws (1).
4. Open the sealing bushing of the sensor cable and remove the conductors from the sensor
(14). If the conductors have not been marked, mark them so that they can be correctly
connected to the new sensor.
5. Remove the sensor cover (3) by unscrewing the covers fastening screws (4).
6. Remove the sensor cable cover (5) by unscrewing the fastening screws (6).

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
7. Detach and open the sensor wires (12) locking nut (8).
8. Pull the wire (12) through the entry (parts 9, 10 and 11).
9. If necessary, replace the wear piece (11) of the entry. To do this, first remove the fastening
pieces (10, 11) of the entry by unscrewing the fastening screws (9).
10. Remove the sensor (14) by unscrewing the fastening screws (13).
11. Replace the old sensor (14) with a new one.
12. Place the sensor (14) back to its housing and screw in the fastening screws (13).
13. Pass the conductors through the sealing bushing and connect the marked conductors to
the sensor in the same order as they were connected to the replaced sensor.
14. Fasten the cable in place with the fastening nut on the sealing bushing.
15. Pass the sensor wire (12) through the wear piece (11) of the entry.
16. Push the sensor wire (12) through the hole in the wires fastening screw (7).
17. Tighten the end of the wire (12) with the locking nut (8).
18. Install and attach covers (2), (3) and (5) with the fastening screws (1, 4 and 6).
For more information on the linear sensor and measuring the resistor of linear sensor, see
"Measurement of linear sensors for the boom and feed module" (p. 133) .

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
6. ALARMS AND ERROR MESSAGES (GUI1)
6.1. GUI-1 alarms
The following table describes the cause of each alarm message. The alarms are listed in alphabetical
order. If the alarm is used in DL400 models only, this is indicated in the table.
The first column shows the alarm text. The second column provides the cause of the alarm and
instructions on how to repair the fault. The third column lists the messages that are displayed via the
GUI-1 when the INFO button is pressed while the alarm is active.
Alarm text Cause/solution GUI-1 INFO text

TUBE Automatic operation and add rod sequence. During No tube in jaws. Check sensor
DROPPED automatic operation: (Adding rod sequence has S41.
been halted) AND (No rod in jaws) AND (Not drilling
the final rod) AND (Retainer open) During add rod
sequence: If magazine sensors have gone on and
off, and rotation timeout period of 8 seconds excee-
ded.
LOW STA- If stabilizer pressure under 70 bar for 2 sec when Too low pressure for stabilizer.
BILIZER percussion is on. Check the operation of stabilizer Check switch S125 and read-
PRESSURE pressure switch. (S125) by using the Service I/O just it if needed.
mode. If the state does not change then: 1. Measure
the hydraulic pressure at switch. 2. If needed read-
just the switch to 70 bar. 3. Check the switch cable.
4. Replace the switch.
TUBE LEFT When starting uncoupling sequence. If tube in jaws Automatic uncoupling is disa-
IN JAWS signal is ON, and hole is not a breakthrough hole. bled because there is a tube left
Check the inductive switch S41 according to instruc- in jaws. Check sensor S41 for
tions given in chapter Inductive switch errors . tube sensing.
LONG During manually activated sequences, if long arm Long arms can't reach the drill-
ARMS OUT does not move to drill center (sensor does not acti- ing center position. Check also
ERROR vate) before timeout period (5 sec). Check the in- switch S32.
ductive switch S32 according to instructions given in
chapter Inductive switch errors .
MOVE Long arms not in magazine position. Check the in- Percussion is disabled untill
LONG ductive switch S33 according to instructions given in long arms are in magazine po-
ARMS TO chapter Inductive switch errors. sition. Check also switch S33.
MAG

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

SHORT Can be generated during automatic drilling, uncou- Short arms can't reach the out
ARMS OUT pling, add tube sequence and threading sequence. of magazine position. Check
ERROR 1. Automatic drilling (drifter type not 1500). After switch S34.
drilling tube/rod, and opening thread on shank side,
the drifter moves to back position. In addition if drifter
type is not 1500 then short arm should move simul-
taneously from magazine. Message appears after
fast feed backward times out. Conditions for error
are as follows, (Drifter type is not 1500) AND (Fast
feed has timed out) AND (Short arm is in magazine)
2. Add tube sequence If user tries to start add tube
sequence with short arms not away from magazine.
3. Uncouple sequence After pulling rod/tube from
hole, short arms should move out. Error message
appears if this does not happen within timeout period
of 5 seconds. Also when starting uncouple se-
quence, if short arms from magazine signal is OFF,
and hole is not a breakthrough hole. 4. Check the
inductive switch S34 according to instructions given
in chapter Inductive switch errors
LONG Coupling, uncoupling, threading sequences. 1. Dur- Long arms can't move into the
ARMS IN: ing coupling and uncoupling sequence when moving magazine. Check switch S33.
TIMEOUT the long arms to the magazine the long arms at the
magazine center inductive switch has not activated
within timeout period of 5 seconds. 2. Error given
when starting threading sequence if long arms are
not in magazine center. 3. Also when starting un-
couple sequence if long arms from magazine signal
is OFF. Check the inductive switch S33 according to
instructions given in chapter Inductive switch er-
rors.
SHORT Coupling or Uncoupling, during automatic operation Short arms can't move into the
ARMS IN: and sequences. During sequence when moving the magazine Check switch S35.
TIMEOUT short arms to the magazine the shorts arms induc-
tive switch has not been activated within timeout pe-
riod of 4 seconds. Check the inductive switch S35
according to instructions given in chapter Inductive
switch errors .
HIGH WA- Flushing water pressure has been over 15 bar for Disturbance in flushing func-
TER PRES- more than 3 minutes. Check the operation of pres- tion. Check water pressure and
SURE sure sensor B9. flushing pressure sensor (B9).
MAGAZINE During Add rod sequence: If magazine position in- Magazine rotation jammed.
ROTATION ductive switch (S30) has not gone ON or OFF within Check switches S30 and S41.
ERROR 8 seconds. During Uncouple sequence: If magazine
rotation not successful within 9 second timeout pe-
riod. Check the inductive switches S30 and S41 ac-
cording to instructions given in chapter Inductive
switch errors.
SHANK LU- Only DL400 series Shank lubrication error has been Shank lubrication failure.
BRICATION active (signal = 0) for over 30 seconds. Check the Check SLU.
ERROR operation of SLU.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

DRILL STOP Only DL400 series Drill stop error has been active Drill stop signal on. Check air
SIGNAL (signal = 1) for over 5 seconds. Percussion and ro- and water flushing.
tation is only possible in 5 sec intervals. This signal
comes from the PLC if the pressure switches (water
S9 or air S10) are in disconnected state (too low
pressure).
SLU PULL- Only DL400 series After SLU error in automatic Pulling failed after shank lubri-
ING FAIL- mode, drifter tries to pull back to back position. If cation error alarm. Rock drill
URE drifter is not in back position within 40 seconds then sticking or operating failure in
error message appears and drifter halts. 1. Drifter rock drill position transducer
got stuck. 2. The feed cylinder ropes adjusted incor- B8.
rectly. 3. Malfunction of the position sensor (B8).
Follow the instructions given in chapter Depth dis-
play errors.
DRILL STOP Only DL400 series After drill stop error in automatic Pulling failed after drill stop sig-
PULL FAIL- mode, drifter tries to pull back to back position. If nal alarm. Rock drill sticking or
URE drifter is not in back position within 40 seconds then operating failure in rock drill po-
error message appears and drifter halts. 1. Drifter sition transducer B8.
got stuck. 2. The feed cylinder ropes adjusted incor-
rectly. 3. Malfunction of the position sensor (B8).
play errors.
ALARM Serial connection from QN -panel to I/O -module No messages coming from
PANEL ER- number 01 (DIO/FPVC) is not working or QN -panel alarm panel. Check connection
ROR is missing +24V or GND. Open the QN -panel cover cable and alarm panel.
and check also that there are no extra wires between
QN -panel terminals 43 and 32 or between 40 and
31. Check serial connection and power supply using
the control circuit diagram.
FAILURE, Automatic drilling is tried to set on while coupling, Automatic drilling cannot be
SEQ. NOT uncoupling or threading sequence is running. started if threading, uncou-
READY pling, or extension sequence is
in operation.
SHANK When unthreading shank, drifter cannot move 25 Shank not opening. Thread too
OPENING mm from the position where drilling was halted for tight, disturbance of operation
FAILURE tube change in 25 seconds. 1. Thread too tight. 2. in rock drill position sensor B8
Drifter got stuck. 3. Malfunction of the position sen- or rotation pressure sensor B2.
sor (B8). Follow the instructions given in chapter
Depth display errors.
MAX PE- Automatic drilling, penetration rises above max pen- Maximum penetration rate ex-
NETR. EX- etration setting for over 5 seconds. ceeded. Check penetration
CEEDED rate, setting of maximum pene-
tration rate, and operation of
rock drill position transducer
B8.
ANTI-JAM- Automatic drilling, rotation pressure has risen over Message on activation of anti-
MING MES- jamming setting for more than 1 second. jamming automatics.
SAGE

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

A-JAMM. Automatic drilling. During antijam, drifter has not Pulling failure. Rock drill stick-
PULLING pulled back 30 cm within timeout period 20 seconds. ing or operating disturbances in
FAILURE transducer B8 for rock drill po-
sition.
ANTI_JAM- Automatic drilling. If current jamming requires more Rock drill sticking. Set number
MING ER- than 10 attempts to restart drilling, or if the current of retry times for anti-jamming
ROR tube / rod jams more than 50 times. automatics reached.
PENETR. Automatic drilling. Penetration rate has fallen below Penetration rate below mini-
UNDER minimum setting for over 5 seconds. Check linear mum. Check penetration rate,
MINIMUM sensor B8 operation. May also be caused due to a setting of minimum penetration
malfunction of S33. If the signal of S33 is turned off rate, and operation of rock drill
during auto drilling the percussion is set off and this position transducer B8.
message occurs.
MIN PEN After low penetration error in automatic mode, drifter Pulling failed after minimum
PULLING tries to pull back to back position. If drifter is not in penetration rate alarm. Rock
FAILURE back position within 40 seconds then error message drill sticking or operating failure
appears and drifter halts. 1. Drifter got stuck. 2. The in rock drill position transducer
feed cylinder ropes adjusted incorrectly. 3. Malfunc- B8.
tion of the position sensor (B8). Follow the instruc-
tions given in chapter Depth display errors.
MAX PEN After high penetration error in automatic mode, drift- Pulling failed after maximum
PULLING er tries to pull back to back position. If drifter is not penetration rate alarm. Rock
FAILURE in back position within 40 seconds then error mes- drill sticking or operating failure
sage appears and drifter halts. 1. Drifter got stuck. in rock drill position transducer
2. The feed cylinder ropes adjusted incorrectly. 3. B8.
Malfunction of the position sensor (B8). Follow the
instructions given in chapter Depth display errors.
FLUSH After flushing error in automatic mode, drifter tries to Pulling failed after flushing dis-
PULLING pull back to back position. If drifter is not in back po- turbance alarm. Rock drill stick-
FAILURE sition within 40 seconds then error message ap- ing or operating failure in rock
pears and drifter halts. 1. Drifter got stuck. 2. The drill position transducer B8.
feed cylinder ropes adjusted incorrectly. 3. Malfunc-
AUTO Automatic drilling. One of following has occurred: -- Emergency stop button push-
DRILLING Emergency stop pressed -- Stop key pressed -- ed, jaws not in magazine, re-
DISABLED Powerpack signal is OFF -- Retainer pressure switch tainer closed, or powerpack
signal is ON stopped. Check above func-
tions and corresponding sen-
sors.
FLUSHING Water flushing: If water flushing pressure or water Disturbance in flushing func-
FAILURE flow has gone below the minimum settings for over tion. Check flow, flushing pres-
1 second Air flushing: If air flushing pressure or flow sure setting, flow sensors(S9)
has gone below the minimum setting for over 3 sec- for water flushing and (S10) for
onds. 1. Check the main supply. 2. Use booster air flushing, and flushing pres-
pump for water pressure if needed 3. Check mini- sure sensor (B9).
mum pressure settings from GUI. 4. Check mechan-
ical flow settings from the sensors S9 (water flow)
S10 (air flow).

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

BREAK Can occur if automatic drilling and breakthrough tol- Set hole depth + set tolerance
THROUGH erance > 0. 1. Drilled depth has exceeded the hole drilled. Hole not through.
FAILED depth setting + breakthrough tolerance, and break-
through has not occurred. 2. Last tube has been dril-
led and breakthrough has not occurred.
RETAINER Automatic drilling. - During final percussion, retainer Retainer not closing. Check op-
SENSOR pressure switch signal does not go to 1 within 15 eration of pressure switch S8
FAILURE seconds timeout period. - When opening shank, re- for retainer.
tainer pressure switch signal does not go to 1 within
15 seconds timeout period. 1. Check the operation
of retainer pressure switch (S8) by using the Service
I/O mode. If the state does not change as the re-
tainer is activated then 2. Measure the hydraulic
pressure at switch. 3. If needed readjust the switch.
4. Check the switch cable. 5. Replace the switch.
THREAD When opening shank. Before retrying, system re- Shank thread closing failure.
CLOSING threads the shank. Error message is given if after 30 Check operation of rock drill po-
TIMEOUT seconds drifter is not within 4cm of value set in reg- sition transducer B8.
ister, instr.end_perc_pos.
SH. OP. When opening shank. Upholes only. Drifter makes Pulling back failed in shank
PULLING a small movement backwards before using percus- opening. Rock drill sticking or
FAILURE sion. Error message appears if backward movement operating failure in rock drill po-
to 3.5cm (tubes) or 22 cm (rods) from the position sition transducer B8.
where drilling was halted for tube change times out
after 30 seconds. 1. Drifter got stuck. 2. Malfunction
of the position sensor (B8). Follow the instructions
given in chapter Depth display errors.
EX. FL. FOR- In automatic drilling during extra flushing. Error mes- Movement to front position dur-
WARD FAIL- sage given if drifter does not move to the cleaning ing extra flushings failed. Rock
URE down position within 180 seconds. 1. Drifter got drill sticking or operating dis-
stuck. 2. Malfunction of the position sensor (B8). turbance in transducer B8 for
Follow the instructions given in chapter Depth dis- rock drill position.
play errors.
EX. FL. In automatic drilling during extra flushing. If drifter Movement to rear position dur-
BACKW. does not move to the cleaning up position within 60 ing extra flushings failed. Rock
FAILURE seconds then system drills forward for 5 seconds. If drill sticking or operating dis-
after 5 attempts the drifter does not come back to the turbance in transducer B8 for
correct position then error message is given. 1. Drift- rock drill position.
er got stuck. 2. The feed cylinder ropes adjusted in-
correctly. 3. malfunction of the position sensor (B8).
play errors.
PULLING After opening shank, and before adding next rod/ Movement to rear position
FAILURE tube. If drifter does not come back within 70 seconds failed. Rock drill sticking or op-
then error message is generated. 1. Drifter got stuck. erating disturbance in trans-
2. The feed cylinder ropes adjusted incorrectly. 3. ducer B8 for rock drill position.
Malfunction of the position sensor (B8). Follow the
instructions given in chapter Depth display errors.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

SEQUENCE If active loading sequence is interrupted by user or Loading sequence stopped
INTERRUP- system: Automatic operation - System gives stop with joystick S89 push button or
TED 50 command after detecting error. Manually activated emergency stop button or pow-
sequence - Magazine joystick push button pressed. erpack is stopped or has stop-
- Stop button pressed. - Emergency stop pressed. - ped during sequence.
Powerpack not running.
ERROR File copy to USB memory stick failed. Check that File copy to USB memory stick
COPYING memory stick is properly installed or try an other failed. Check memory stick and
FILE! memory stick. Check USB interface cable W921. mobile computer USB interface
cable.
FILE COPY File copy to USB memory stick succeeded. File copy to USB memory stick
SUCCESS- succeeded.
FUL
NO PARAM Parameter file copy from memory stick to mobile File copy from USB memory
FILES computer failed. Check that memory stick is properly stick failed. No parameter files
FOUND! installed or try an other memory stick. Parameter found in root directory of USB
files must be located to the memory stick root direc- memory stick. Check memory
tory. stick.
NO MEMO- Check that memory stick is properly installed or try No USB memory stick found.
RY STICK an other memory stick. Check mobile computer USB Insert memory stick before con-
FOUND! interface cable W921. tinuing. If error repeats check
memory stick and mobile com-
puter USB interface cable.
NO REPLY DL400 series Remote Control --option only. If LAN No connection to remote panel
FROM RE- remote option is included. Serial communications or the remote panel software
MOTE have timed out to remote GUI panel. Remote Control version is incompatible.
system fault finding is described more detailed in
document B73810.
SENSOR At least one of serial angle sensors of the TMS--ZRU No meas data received from
COMM. ER- angle measuring system is not sending serial data angle sensor. Check sensor
ROR packets. The reason can be e.g. faulty sensor or operation from service disp.
broken sensor cable or the sensor is not getting
power. Service / Test io --display tells which sensor
is not working. First check if the sensor is powered
and then measure with the multimeter that the cable
is not broken. If these action dont help change the
sensor.
SEND DL400 series rigs with Fan Automation and Data Drill plan transfer failed be-
FAILED, Collection. cause current fan is still active.
FAN ACTIVE End fan before send.
SEQUENCE If active threading sequence is interrupted by user Threading sequence stopped
INTERRUP- or system: Automatic operation - System gives stop with push button of joystick S89
TED 60 command after detecting error. Manually activated or STOP button of GUI-1, or
sequence - Magazine joystick push button pressed. powerpack is stopped or has
- Stop button pressed. - Emergency stop pressed. - stopped during sequence.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

SHANK During uncoupling, when closing the shank thread, During shank threading, rota-
THREADING after wrong thread has opened, or tube / rod position tion pressure must rise within-
TIMEOUT is incorrect. Either, - Drifter moves past safe posi- set time. Rotation pressure
tion. - Safe position for tubes is 43 cmfrom the back transducer B2 faulty, or no tube
end. - Safe position for rods is 40 cm from the back in gripper.
end.
SHANK During threading shank sequence. If drifter moves If depth sensor is provided (DD/
MOVING past safe position - Safe position for tubes is 43 cm DDS/DATA), cylinders move
TOO FAR from the back end. - Safe position for rods is 40 cm too far in threading. No tube in
from the back end. gripper, or gripper slipping.
TUBE During tube threading sequence when threading During tube threading, rotation
THREADING takes longer than 30 sec. pressure must rise within set
TIMEOUT time. Rotation pressure trans-
ducer B2 faulty, thread mesh-
ing failure, or no tube inretainer.
GRIPPER During threading sequences. If grippers do not open Gripper jaws not enough
JAWS MAL- within timeout period of 25 seconds. opened or tube slipping in grip-
FUNCTION per. Opening speed of gripper
jaws slow or gripper jaws too
worn.
DRILLPLAN DL400 series rigs with Fan Automation and Data Drillplan transfer failed, file
CORRUPT! Collection. Select and transfer an other drillplan. checksum problem.
DRILLPLAN DL400 series rigs with Fan Automation and Data Drillplan transfer failed, be-
DATA INVA- Collection. Select and transfer an other drillplan. cause hole data is out of range.
LID
SEQUENCE If active uncoupling sequence is interrupted by user Uncoupling sequence stopped
INTERRUP- or system: Automatic operation - System gives stop with push button of joystick S89
TED 70 command after detecting error. Manually activated or emergency stop button, or
sequence - Magazine joystick push button pressed. powerpack is stopped or has
- Stop button pressed. - Emergency stop pressed. - stopped during sequence.
UNABLE TO During uncoupling. System has failed to open both Loosen threads properly by
OPEN threads within 7 attempts. hammering, and restart auto-
THREADS matic uncoupling. Check also
operation of rotation pressure
sensor B2 and rock drill posi-
tion sensor B8.
PULLBACK Total time to pullback rod/tube from hole during un- Rear position not reached with-
TIMEOUT coupling has exceeded timeout period of 5 minutes. in set time during tube string
1. Drifter got stuck. 2. The feed cylinder ropes ad- pulling. Check operation of rock
justed incorrectly. 3. Malfunction of the position sen- drill position sensor B8.
sor (B8). Follow the instructions given in chapter
Depth display errors.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

RETAINER When pulling tubes back with fast feed during un- Check operation of retainer
SENSOR coupling, or tightening shank during uncoupling. Re- pressure switch S8.
FAIL 82 tainer does not open (pressure switch signal does
not go off) within timeout period of 2 seconds. 1.
Check the operation of retainer pressure switch (S8)
by using the Service I/O mode. If the state does not
change as the retainer is activated then 2. Measure
just the switch. 4. Check the switch cable. 5. Replace
the switch.
RETAINER During uncoupling, when opening thread on tube Check operation of retainer
SENSOR side. Retainer does not close within 5 seconds. 1. pressure switch S8.
FAIL 84 Check the operation of retainer pressure switch (S8)
by using the Service I/O mode. If the state does not
change as the retainer is activated then 2. Measure
just the switch. 4. Check the switch cable. 5. Replace
the switch.
THR. OPEN- During uncoupling, when opening thread on tube Thread opening fails within set
ING TIME- side. Opening of thread exceeds timeout period of time. Check operation of rock
OUT 85 10 seconds. drill position sensor B8.
THR. OPEN- During uncoupling, when opening thread on shank Thread opening fails within set
ING TIME- side. Opening of thread exceeds timeout period of time. Check operation of rock
OUT 87 10 seconds. 1. Thread too tight. 2. Malfunction of the drill position sensor B8.
position sensor (B8). Follow the instructions given in
chapter Depth display errors.
RAPID MO- During uncoupling, when moving forward with fast Front position not reached with-
TION TIME- feed to get the next tube. Drifter does not reach the in set time during rapid move-
OUT position set in register instr.nt_fast_feed_pos within ment. Check operation of rock
the timeout period of 35 seconds. drill position sensor B8.
THR. CLOS- During uncoupling, when moving forward to get the Thread closing within set time
ING TIME- next tube. Time taken to thread the next tube ex- failed. Check rotation pressure
OUT 90 ceeds timeout period of 30 seconds. Conditions for sensor B2 or rock drill position
threading depend on following, 1. Drifter position > sensor B8.
setting in register instr.nt_threading_shank_pos. 2.
Rotation pressure > setting in register
hydr.tube_threaded_pressure.
SHANK During threading sequence. If threading takes lon- Shank thread closing within set
THREADING ger than 35 seconds. time failed. Check rotation
TIMEOUT pressure sensor B2 and rock
drill position sensor B8.
THR. CLOS- During uncoupling, when closing the shank thread. Thread closing within set time
ING TIME- Shank is not threaded within timeout period of 35 failed. Check rotation pressure
OUT 93 seconds. sensor B2 or rock drill position
sensor B8.
DRIVE DL400 series Bit Changer option. Automatic bit Automatic sequence cannot be
DRIFTER changing sequnce can not be started because the started if drifter is too forwards.
BACK- drifter is too forwards. Check operation of drill position
WARD! sensor B8.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

OPEN RE- When starting uncoupling if retainer is not open. Automatic uncoupling cannot
TAINER! Check retainer pressure switch S8 operation. be started if retainer pressure
switch S8 is activated.
DRIVE When starting automatic uncoupling if drifter position Automatic uncoupling cannot
DRIFTER is less than 40 cm from the back end stop. be started if rock drill is too far
FORWARD! in rear position. Check opera-
tion of rock drill position sensor
B8.
UNCOU- User tries to activate uncoupling when uncoupling is Automatic uncoupling cannot
PLING SE- already active. be started if uncoupling se-
QUENCE quence is on.
ON
EXTENSION If user tries to activate uncoupling while extension Automatic uncoupling cannot
SEQUENCE sequence is active. be started if extension se-
ON quence is on.
THREADING User tries to activate uncoupling but threading se- Automatic uncoupling cannot
SEQUENCE quence is active. be started if threading se-
ON quence is on.
START User tries to activate uncoupling but powerpack is Automatic uncoupling cannot
POWER- off. be started if powerpack is not
PACK! on.
P.EXT. If power extractor has been used for 100 seconds in Use of power extractor not al-
COOL- 10 minutes, starts the cooldown period of 5 minutes. lowd during cooldown period of
DOWN AC- If 100 seconds is reached before 10 minutes limit, 5 minutes.
TIVE starts the cooldown period immediately. Power ex-
tractor can not be used during the cooldown period.
NO ACTIVE DL400 series FAN Active drillplan must be selected No drillplan has been selected
PLAN before starting fan drilling. Drillplan must have a or no hole data has been en-
least one hole. tered.
TUBE User tries to activate uncoupling but the rod count is Tube count must be at least two
COUNT only 1. for uncoupling to start. Check
LESS THAN tube count from data display. If
2 wrong check sensors S32,
S33, S41.
UNCOU- Total allowed time for uncoupling of 10 minutes for Uncoupling of single tube took
PLING GEN. single tube has been exceeded. longer than set maximum time.
TIMEOUT
UNTHREAD DL400 series Bit Changer option. Automatic opera- Automatic sequence cannot be
TUBE! tion can not be started because tube is still threaded started if tube is threaded to bit.
to bit. Check operation of drill position
sensor B8.
HORIZ ARM DL400 series Bit Changer option. Automatic sequence cannot be
NOT IN started if horizontal arm not in
MAG. bit changer cassette pos.
Check operation of sensors
S266 and S267.
TUBE IN DL400 series FAN Automatic operation can not be Automatic sequence cannot be
GRIPPER started because tube is in gripper. started if tube is in gripper arm.
ARM! Check operation of sensor S41.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

START User attempts to start automatic drilling when pow- Automatic drilling cannot be
POWER- erpack is OFF. started if powerpack is not run-
PACK! ning. Start powerpack.
HOLE RDY In automatic mode, drifter tries to pull back to back Hole ready but pulling failed.
PULLING position after finishing the hole. If drifter is not in back Rock drill sticking or operating
FAIL position within 40 seconds then error message ap- failure in rock drill position
pears and drifter halts. 1. Drifter got stuck. 2. The transducer B8.
feed cylinder ropes adjusted incorrectly. 3. Malfunc-
NO COLL DL400 series FAN Hole has to be set as collar pipe No holes in the drill plan are
HOLES TO hole in drillplan. marked as collar pipe holes.
DRILL
BIT LOAD DL400 series Bit Changer option. Operation cannot be activated
PANEL AC- because panel key switch is in-
TIVE bit load position.
BIT MAG. DL400 series Bit Changer option. Check control Bit cassette positioning failed.
POS FAIL- panel switch S86 position. Check sensors S262 andS263.
URE
BC ARM TO DL400 series Bit Changer option. Bit changer arm to drilling cen-
DRL CENT ter movement timeout. Check
ERR sensors S266 and S267.
BC ARM TO DL400 series Bit Changer option. Bit changer arm to bit cass.
BIT MAG. movement timeout. Check sen-
ERR sors S266 and S267.
BC ADAPT- DL400 series Bit Changer option. Bit changer adapter to up (out)
ER OUT position timeout. Check sen-
FAILURE sors S261, S264, S265 and
valve Y264.
BC ADAPT- DL400 series Bit Changer option. Bit changer adapter to down
ER IN FAIL- (in) position timeout. Check
URE sensors S261, S264, S265 and
valve Y265.
BC OPEN DL400 series Bit Changer option. Bit changer hatch open time-
HATCH out. Check sensor S268 and
FAILURE valve Y268.
BC CLOSE DL400 series Bit Changer option. Bit changer hatch close time-
HATCH out. Check sensor S269 and
FAILURE valve Y269.
BC THREAD DL400 series Bit Changer option. During bit threading, rotation
BIT FAIL- pressure must rise within set
URE time. Rotation pressure trans-
ducer B2 faulty, thread mesh-
ing failure, or no bit in retainer.
BC UN- DL400 series Bit Changer option. Thread opening fails within set
THREAD BIT time. Check operation of rock
FAILURE drill position sensor B8.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

BIT MAG. DL400 series Bit Changer option. Bit changer magazine position
POS. TIME- timeout. Check sensors S262
OUT and S263 valves Y262 and
Y263.
BIT MAG. DL400 series Bit Changer option. Operation not allowed because
SLOT EMP- the current bit magazine slot is
TY! empty. Check sensor S270.
BIT MAG. DL400 series Bit Changer option. Operation not allowed because
SLOT NOT the current bit magazine slot is
EMPTY not empty. Check sensor S270.
BC DRIFT- DL400 series Bit Changer option. Drifter positioning to bit change
ER POS ER- position failure. Check opera-
ROR tion of rock drill position trans-
ducer B8.
SYSTEM Part of the program is dead. Follow the instructions NO INFO
ERROR 129 given in section -- -- >!<-- -- shown at GUI.
SYSTEM Part of the program is dead. 1. If the message elec- Switch the main power OFF
ERROR 130 tric disturbance was also shown follow the instruc- and ON to recover from error. If
tions given in chapter Electric Disturbance mes- the same error returns, check
sage. 2. Check CAN -cable. 3. Reload machine pa- the CAN-cable. If the cable is
rameters. OK, try reloading machine pa-
rameters.
SYSTEM Part of the program is dead. 1. Disconnect the CAN Switch the main power OFF
ERROR 131 -cable (X8 and X9). 2. Restart the control system and ON. Try reloading machine
(S900). If This message disappeared: 3. Measure parameters. If error repeats re-
CAN -cable according to instructions given in meas- place mobile computer.
uring CAN -cable. 4. Check the connections and
cables of the angle sensors at RD modules and at
the sensor junction boxes. If this message still ap-
pears: 3. Replace the mobile computer.
SYSTEM Part of the program is dead. Follow the instructions NO INFO
ERROR 132 given in section -- -- >!<-- -- shown at GUI.
SERIAL Serial communications with currently active GUI GUI-1 cannot send data to the
COMM. ER- panel have timed out after 1.5 seconds. Follow the CPU-unit. Check the mobile
ROR instructions given in chapter -- -- >!<-- -- shown at computer-serial device server-
GUI. GUI interfaces.
POSITION In automatic drill, drill and uncouple, or uncouple. Position sensor B8 faulty or its
SENSOR Occurs if drifter position sensor raw value goes out cable damaged or moving
FAILURE of allowed range for over 1 second. Follow the in- magnet incorrectly adjusted. If
structions given in chapter Depth display errors. these are OK, check BUP and
RD/UNI module.
USE BY- If software includes sequences: 1. User has tried to If gripper arm is turned to mag-
PASS BUT- open the jaws when the long arms and short arm in azine centre and loading se-
TON! neither of drilling center or magazine. 2. User has quence start is attempted, soft-
tried to activate loading sequence when the short ware prompts pressing of by-
arms are in magazine. pass button simultaneously
with sequence start button.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

ELECTRIC See section Electric Disturbance message NO INFO
DISTURB-
ANCE
ROT. PR. Rotation pressure sensor raw value has been below Rotation pressure transducer
SENSOR the minimum allowed (approx. 2mA) for over 5 sec- (B2) faulty or its cable dam-
FAILURE onds. Measure the sensor B2 according to instruc- aged. System gives error mes-
tions given in chapter Pressure sensor errors. sage once every 30 minutes.
PERC. PR. Percussion pressure sensor raw value has been be- Percussion pressure sensor B1
SENSOR low the minimum allowed (approx 2mA) for over 5 faulty or its cable damaged.
FAILURE seconds. Measure the sensor B1 according to in- System gives error message
structions given in chapter Pressure sensor errors. once every 30 minutes.
FEED PR. Feed pressure sensor raw value has been below the Feed pressure sensor B3 faulty
SENSOR minimum allowed (approx. 2mA) for over 5 seconds. or its cable damaged. System
FAILURE Measure the sensor B3 according to instructions gives error message once ev-
given in chapter Pressure sensor errors. ery30 minutes.
FLUSH PR. Flushing pressure sensor raw value has been below Flushing pressure sensor B9
SENSOR the minimum allowed (approx. 2mA) for over 5 sec- faulty or its cable damaged.
FAILURE onds. Measure the sensor B9 according to instruc- System gives error message
tions given in chapter Pressure sensor errors. once every 30 minutes.
RELEASE When starting powerpack and the controls are not in Software prompts centralizing
CONTROLS! middle position. In addition with DL400 series used of all joysticks before starting of
when handling SLU and drill stop errors. 1. User has powerpack. Joystick contact
attempted to start the powerpack with controls not in possibly sticking (use TEST I/O
neutral position. 2. SLU or drillstop error has occur- function to check.).
red, drilling has been halted, and user must now
center controls before being allowed to start drilling
again.
REAR ST. DL400 series FAN Rear stinger pressure sensor raw Rear stinger pressure sensor
PR. SEN. value has been below the minimum allowed (approx failure. Check sensor B15.
FAIL. 2mA) for over 5 seconds. Rear stinger pressure sen-
sor B15 is faulty or its cable damaged. Measure the
sensor B15 according to instructions given in chap-
ter Measuring valves and pressure sensors. Sys-
tem gives error message once every 30 minutes.
FRONT ST. DL400 series FAN Front stinger pressure sensor Front stinger pressure sensor
PR. SEN. raw value has been below the minimum allowed (ap- failure. Check sensor B97.
FAIL. prox. 2mA) for over 5 seconds. Front stinger pres-
sure sensor B152 is faulty or its cable damaged.
Measure the sensor B152 according to instructions
given in chapter Measuring valves and pressure
sensors. System gives error message once every
30 minutes.
DM LIN. DL400 series FAN Drill module depth sensor raw Drilling module linear sensor
SENSOR value has been below the minimum allowed for over failure. Check sensor B16.
FAILURE 5 seconds. Linear sensor B16 is faulty or its cable
damaged. Measure the sensor B16 according to in-
structions given in chapter Measuring linear sen-
sors. System gives error message once every 30
minutes.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

BOOM LIN. DL400 series FAN Boom depth sensor raw value Boom zoom linear sensor fail-
SEN. FAIL- has been below the minimum allowed for over 5 ure. Check sensor B101.
URE seconds. Boom depth sensor B101 is faulty or its
cable damaged. Measure the sensor B101 accord-
ing to instructions given in chapter Measuring linear
sensors. System gives error message once every
30 minutes.
ACTIVE FAN DL400 series FAN Current active fan has not been A new fan cannot be selected
NOT ENDED ended before trying to select another fan as active until the currently active fan has
fan. Only one fan can be active at the time. Active been endded.
fan can be ended by pressing ZERO SET in main
display (text TAMROCK) and selecting END FAN
from the opening display.
MOTOR 1 From QN alarm panel. Motor protector switch 1-F100
OVERLOA- is triggered or the protecting
DED thermistor alarms. To reset the
protector, turn its switchoff/on.
The thermistor resets automat-
ically when the motor has
cooled down.
cooled down.
cooled down.
COMPRES- From QN alarm panel. Compressor protector switch is
SOR OVER- triggered. The protector switch
LOADED must be reset manually.
WATER From QN alarm panel. Water pump protector switch is
PUMP triggered. The protector switch
OVERLOA- must be reset manually.
DED
HI.PRES.WA From QN alarm panel. When the high-pressure water
TERPUMP pump motor protector is trig-
O/LOAD gered, the alarm light goes
onand the powerpack stops.
The protector must be reset
manually.
PRESS. FIL- From QN alarm panel. When the alarm light goes on,
TER 1 the pressure filter has become
BLOCKED so dirty that it must be replaced.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

LOW AIR From QN alarm panel DL400 series: The drilling is If air pressure remains below
PRESSURE halted. Other DLs: The power pack is turned off. 1. the set value of the pressure
Check the main air supply. 2. Check the pressure switch S321 longer than 10
setting of carrier air pressure switch (S421). 3. seconds, the powerpack stops.
Check the switch cable. 4. Replace the switch. The alarm light stays on until
the bypass/acknowledgment
button S505 is pressed.
LOW WA- From QN alarm panel. DL400 series: The drilling is If water pressure remains be-
TER PRES- halted. Other DLs: The power pack is turned off. 1. low the set value of the pres-
SURE Check the main water supply. 2. Use booster pump sure switch S322 longer than
for water pressure if needed. 3. Check the pressure 4seconds, the powerpack
setting of carrier water pressure switch (S422). 4. stops. The alarm light stays on
Check the switch cable. 5. Replace the switch. until the bypass/acknowledg-
ment button S505 is pressed.
HOT COM- From QN alarm panel. If the temperature of the com-
PRESSED pressed air rises too high, the
AIR powerpack stops, and the
alarm light goes on. The alarm
light goes off automatically
when the compressor has
cooled down.
LOW OIL From QN alarm panel. If oil level drops below the
LEVEL specified lower limit, the pow-
erpack stops, and the alarm
light goes on. The alarm light
goes off when a sufficient
amount of oil is added.
OIL OVER- From QN alarm panel. If the temperature of hydraulic
HEATED oil rises above 75 C, the pow-
erpack stops, and the indicator
light goes on. The alarmlight
goes off automatically when the
oil temperature has dropped
sufficiently.
EMERGEN- From QN alarm panel. When any of the rig's emergen-
CY STOP cy stop buttons is depressed,
ACTIVE the alarm light goes on and all
motors stop. The light goes off
when the button is released,
but this does not restart the mo-
tors.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

BIT DL400 series Bit Changer option. The maximum allowed drilled
CHANGE meters for the current bit has
MTRS been reached.
REACHED
BIT DL400 series Bit Changer option. The maximum time allowed to
CHANGE pull the drifter to the back end-
PULL TIME- stop has been exceeded.
OUT
TUBE DL400 series FAN Automatic operation can not be Positioning to planned not al-
COUNT started because tube count is too high (> 1). lowed as tube count is greater
TOO HIGH than one. Check if tube in hole
or tube count not set.
LOW From QN alarm panel. This message comes every Shank oil level has dropped be-
SHANK OIL 15 min if the signal is active. low the specified lower limit.
LEVEL
RETURN From QN alarm panel. When the alarm light goes on,
FILTER the return filter has become so
BLOCKED dirty that it must be replaced.
WRONG From QN alarm panel. Check the power cable connec-
PHASE SE- tors.
QUENCE
AIR COND. From QN alarm panel Air conditioning motor protector
OVERLOA- switch is triggered. The protec-
DED tor switch must be reset man-
ually.
EXT. PUMP From QN alarm panel. When the alarm light goes on,
EARTH there is a shortage to ground in
FAULT the external pump. If the main
motor overload lamp is on si-
multaneously, the earth fault is
in the main motor.
EXT. PUMP From QN alarm panel. Eternal pump protector switch
OVERLOA- is triggered. The protector
DED switch must be reset manually.
CHECK DL400 series FAN Drifter movement to alignment The movement was not com-
FEEDER start position was not completed in 2 minutes time. pleted within the time allowed.
TIMEOUT Check retainer and drifter linear depth sensor oper-
ation.
LIFT STING- DL400 series FAN Lifting stingers was not comple- The movement was not com-
ERS TIME- ted in 4 minutes time. Check the operation of front pleted within the time allowed.
OUT and rear stinger proximity switches S151, S14.1 and
S14.2.
DRIVE DL400 series FAN Swing movement was not com- The movement was not com-
SWING pleted in 2 minutes time. Check swing angle sensor pleted within the time allowed.
TIMEOUT B11 operation.
DRIVE DL400 series FAN Zoom movement was not com- The movement was not com-
ZOOM pleted in 2 minutes time. Check zoom linear sensor pleted within the time allowed.
TIMEOUT B101 operation.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

DRIVE DM DL400 series FAN Drilling module movement was The movement was not com-
TIMEOUT not completed in 2 minutes time. Check drilling mod- pleted within the time allowed.
ule linear sensor B16 operation.
DRIVE TILT DL400 series FAN Tilt movement was not completed The movement was not com-
TIMEOUT in 2 minutes time. Check tilt angle sensor B6 oper- pleted within the time allowed.
ation.
DRIVE ROT. DL400 series FAN Rotation movement was not com- The movement was not com-
TIMEOUT pleted in 2 minutes time. Check rotation angle sen- pleted within the time allowed.
sor B7 operation.
PUSH DL400 series FAN Rear stringer movement was not The movement was not com-
R.STING- completed in 3 minutes time. Check rear stinger pleted within the time allowed.
ERS TIME- pressure sensor B15 and proximity switches S14.1
OUT and S14.2.
PUSH DL400 series FAN Front stringer movement was not The movement was not com-
F.STING- completed in 3 minutes time. Check front stinger pleted within the time allowed.
ERS TIME- pressure sensor B152 and proximity switch S151.
OUT
CORRECT DL400 series FAN Tilt correction movement was not The movement was not com-
TILT TIME- completed in 3 minutes time. Check tilt angle sensor pleted within the time allowed.
OUT B6 operation.
CORRECT DL400 series FAN Rotation correction movement The movement was not com-
ROT. TIME- was not completed in 3 minutes time. Check rotation pleted within the time allowed.
OUT angle sensor B7 operation.
CLOSE PI- DL400 series FAN Retainer (PITO) was not closed The movement was not com-
TO TIME- in 30 seconds time. Check retainer proximity switch pleted within the time allowed.
OUT S8 operation. Check also Hydraulic setting 85 re-
tainer_close for retainer closed pressure setting.
OPEN PITO DL400 series FAN Retainer (PITO) was not opened The movement was not com-
TIMEOUT in 10 seconds time. Check retainer proximity switch pleted within the time allowed.
S8 operation. Check also Hydraulic setting 86 re-
tainer_open for retainer closed pressure setting.
FIND ROCK DL400 series FAN Retainer (PITO) was not closed The movement was not com-
TIMEOUT in 3 minutes time. Check feed pressure sensor B3 pleted within the time al-
operation. Check also Hydraulic setting 27 lowed.Check the feed pressure
feed_flow_low and Instrument setting 88 sensor and find rock setting.
rock_found_pres.
START DL400 series FAN option Flushing (multi flush) did The action was not completed
FLUSH not begin in 20 seconds time. within the time allowed.
TIMEOUT
COLLAR DL400 series FAN Hole collaring was not done in 3 Collaring was not completed
HOLE TIME- minutes time. Check feed pressure sensor B3 and within the time allowed.
OUT linear sensor B8 operation.
CONT. DL400 series FAN Drilling did not start in 10 seconds The phase was not completed
DRILLING time after find rock or collaring phase. within the time allowed.
TIMEOUT
ALIGN IDLE DL400 series FAN Alignment for the next fan hole The movement was not com-
TIMEOUT has taken too long time. Check the boom tilt and pleted within the time allowed.
swing movements and corresponding angle sen-
sors.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

STARTUP DL400 series FAN option Starting align did not begin Startup did not begin within the
TIMEOUT in 10 seconds time. time allowed.
CHECK DL400 series FAN Drifter movement to alignment The movement was not com-
FEEDER start position was not completed in 2 minutes time. pleted within the time allowed.
TIMEOUT Check retainer and drifter linear depth sensor oper-
ation.
DM TO DL400 series FAN Drilling module could not be The movement was not com-
HOME POS moved to home position in 2 minutes time. Check pleted within the time allowed.
TIMEOUT DM linear sensor B16 operation.
RESTART DL400 series FAN option Restarting align did not RESTART ALIGN TIMEOUT
ALIGN begin in 10 seconds time. [OK]
TIMEOUT
DRILL COLL DL400 series FAN option Drilling of collar pipe hole Timeout occured waiting for
PIPE TIME- did not begin in 3 minutes time. collar pipe hole to be drilled.
OUT
FIND ROCK DL400 series FAN option Find rock did not begin in Timeout occured waiting for fin-
TIMEOUT 3 minutes time. drock before starting collar pipe
hole drilling.
COLL PIPE DL400 series FAN Collar pipe pullback was not done Timeout occured waiting for
PULL TIME- in 3 minutes time. Check feed pressure sensor B3 drifter to reach pullback posi-
OUT and linear sensor B8 operation. tion.
PIVOT P. DL400 series FAN System can position to planned Zoom or swing joint has
OUT OF pivot point because boom zoom movement or boom reached maximum value be-
RANGE swing movement has reached maximum value. fore the pivot point was
Check the navigation and the planned pivot point reached.
position from the drillplan.
TILT / ROT DL400 series FAN Start fan and navigation require The tilt or rotation angles are
NOT VERTI- that the drill unit is to vertical position, i.e. rotation not within 5 degrees of vertical.
CAL and tilt angles have to be inside +-- 5 degrees from
vertical.
TILT / ROT DL400 series FAN Restarting fan requires that the The current tilt and swing an-
T00 FAR drill unit is to vertical position, i.e. rotation and tilt gles are too far from the plan-
angles have to be inside +-- 5 degrees from vertical ned tilt and swing.angles.
or +-- 5 degrees from the to be drilled next (=planned
hole).
NO HOLES DL400 series FAN Drill plan does not have any holes The status of all holes in the drill
TO DRILL that could be drilled. Check the hole statuses in the plan are ready.or skip.
drill plan or select another drill plan as an active drill
plan.
NO BIT IN DL400 series Bit Changer option. Operation not allowed because
RET/ no bit is detected in retainer
RET.OPEN jaws. Check sensor S8.2.
BC ADAPT- DL400 series Bit Changer option. Operation not allowed because
ER NOT IN! the bit changer adapter is notin
the in positin. Check sensors
S261, S264, S265.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

BC ARM DL400 series Bit Changer option. Operation not allowed because
NOT IN the bit changer arm is not at
MAG.! cassette position. Check sen-
sors S266 and S267.
TUBE NOT DL400 series Bit Changer option. No tube in jaws. Check sensor
IN JAWS! S41.
SLOT NOT DL400 series Bit Changer option. Bit cassette slot is not empty or
EMPTY/ wrong operating mode. Check
MODE ERR sensor S270.
NO SUITA- DL400 series Bit Changer option. Hole depth and bit meters re-
BLE BIT quire bit change to drill hole, but
FOUND no suitable bit in magazine.
Check settings.
SHORT DL400 series Bit Changer option. Short arms are not fully in tube
ARMS NOT magazine position. Check sen-
IN MAG. sor S35.
OPEN DL400 series Bit Changer option. Hatch is not fully open. Check
HATCH! sensor S268.
CURR AND DL400 series Bit Changer option. Operator has se- Operation not started because
NEXT BIT lected the next bit to be the same as the one that is current and next bit the same.
SAME! currently in use or bit magazine position sensors are
giving wrong position. Check bit selection and bit
magazine position sensors S262 and S253
BIT TYPE DL400 series Bit Changer option. Type of selected bit must be
NOT PRO- production.
DUCTION

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
6.2. Electric disturbance message
When this message appears, the power pack stop button light on the control panel goes on as well.
The stop light will turn off only when the control system is restarted with switch S900. There are
several possible reasons for this message. To find out the reason, follow these steps:
QUICK METHOD
A) Press the INFO button to display the reason for the message.
B) If the electric disturbance message has been cleared from the GUI but the power pack stop button
light is still on, press the INFO button twice.
Example:
Status: OK=browsing ESC=quit The message was caused by an error in the
Mod0 PWM0error 1
MOD0 PWM0 output. Refer to the causes of the
error for additional instructions.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
ALTERNATIVE METHOD
The reason for the error message can also be seen in the status display. All the previous reasons for
the electric disturbance message are shown there as well. This information will stay in the memory.
1. Go to the Sandvik main display => service mode => show status.
2. Scroll the windows by pressing OK.
3. Scroll the windows until you can see the "+" sign in front of a number. The error shown in this row
is active and caused the electric disturbance message.
4. For more information, refer to the section "Reasons for the electrical disturbance message" (p.
110) .
Status: OK=browsing ESC=quit

Mod0:0000 Mod1:0010 Mod2:0000
Mod3:0000 Mod4:0000 Mod5:0000
Mod6:0000 Mod7: Mod8:
Each row shows a different error. The number

Status: OK=browsing ESC=quit after each row shows the number of times the
VC off bus error 0
BC queue o/flow 0 error has occurred. The "+" sign indicates a cur-
VC status error 0 rently active error. For more information, refer to
Mod0 off bus err +1
Mod1 off bus err 0 the section: "Reasons for the electrical disturb-
Mod2 off bus err 2
ance message" (p. 110) .
Each module in the DL control system has the

Status: OK=browsing ESC=quit following error rows:
Mod5 out6 error 0
Mod5 out7 error 0 - Mod off bus err
Mod0 PWM 0 error 0
Mod0 PWM 1 error 0 - Mod out error (output error 0...7), excluding
Mod0 PWM 2 error 0
Mod0 PWM 3 error 0 RD
- Mod status error
Status: OK=browsing ESC=quit

Mod4 Status err 0
Mod5 Status err 0
Unknown msg error 0
Unknown msg error 0
Checkpoint 1 0
Checkpoint 2 0

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
6.2.1. Reasons for the electrical disturbance message
Error name Description Action

Mod x off bus err At intervals, the control system re- Check the corresponding module pow-
(x = 08) quests each modules status. If no re- er supply and the CAN connections
ply is received within the timeout peri- and CAN cable. If the error persists,
od, the module is considered to be off replace the module.
the bus. This usually indicates a mod-
ule problem that has caused the mod-
ule to disconnect itself from the bus.
Mod x out y error A digital output error has been detec- Disconnect the cable from the output.
(x = 08) ted in the module. This error is reported Restart the control system and activate
(y = 07) if the output is short-circuited to ground the output. If the error persists, replace
or if the output receives voltage from the module. If the error has disap-
the cable while not active. peared, replace the cable. For the out-
put actuator, refer to the I/O list.
Mod 0 PWM y A PWM error has been detected in the Go to the section "Module PWM error"
error module. This error occurs if the circuit (p. 111) .
(y = 03) from the output to module ground is
broken. The error is also reported if the
output is short-circuited to ground or if
the output receives voltage from the
cable while active.
Mod x status err This message indicates that a new sta- Go to the section "Module status and
(x = 08) tus error has occurred in the module. errors" (p. 112) .
The actual error can be checked from
the module status display.
Unknown msg The system has received unrecog- Go to the section "QN panel errors" (p.
error nized data. The expected message 128) .
consists of QN panel data.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
6.2.2. Module PWM error
Shut off the control system (S900).

Disconnect the wire from the PWM output
given in the error display from electric NO Measure the voltage between the
disturbance + INFO. disconnected wire and module
Measure the resistance between the wire ground while having the control
and module ground. system on.
Is the resistance < 5 ohm? Is the voltage > 5 V?
NO YES
YES
Change the FPVC module Change the cable
Disconnect the cable from the valve

(The valve number can be seen from the
I/O-list.) Measure the resistance of the
valve coil.
Is the resistance < 5 ohm?
NO
YES
Change the cable
Change the valve
Exeption!
If the INFO text shows MOD0 PWM 4
ERROR the actual reason is Danfoss feed
flow error signal. See further instructions
from section Danfoss flow valve
malfunction

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
7. MODULE STATUS AND ERRORS
The GUI panel module status display can be found under the SERVICE -> Show Status menu option,
and it looks like this:
Example: Mod2:0410
Status: OK=browsing ESC=quit 04 = module-specific status
Mod0:0000 Mod1:0000 Mod2:0410
Mod3:0000 Mod4:0000 Mod5:0000 10 = general module status
Mod6:0000 Mod7: Mod8:
Each module on the bus has a four-digit status indicator. The last two digits are the same for all
modules. They indicate the general module status.
The first two digits indicate the module-specific status, and they vary by module type.
If the module status indicator is showing different digits than shown in the tables below, the module
has multiple errors active at the same time. For example, the status of module 0 (FPVC) is 0303,
meaning that the module has general errors 0001 and 0002 and module-specific errors 0100 and
0200 active.
Common errors for all module types
Module status Description Action

0001 Serial port overflow. Each type of mod- Reboot the system. Check the QN
ule is equipped with a serial port. The panel according to the instructions giv-
QN panel is connected to the MOD1 en in the section "QN panel errors" (p.
serial port. The error may be due to a 128) .
poor connection between the QN panel
and MOD1, or a poor connection be-
tween the TMS-ZRU sensors and
modules connected to them.
0002 CAN message length error. The mod- Reboot the system. Check the CAN
ule receives a message that is shorter/ cable according to the instructions giv-
longer than expected. en in the section "Measurements for
the CAN cable" (p. 150) . If the cable
is intact, replace the module.
0004 Locked output message. The control
system is trying to write to an output
that has been locked.
0008 Illegal I/O. The control system tries, for Reboot the system. If necessary, con-
example, to operate digital output with tact Sandviks product support staff.
an analog output command, or the in-
put/output referred to does not exist.
0010 The module received a command that Reboot the system. If necessary, con-
it cannot understand. tact Sandviks product support staff.
Replace the module.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Module status Description Action

0040 Overflow of incoming CAN messages. Check the CAN cable according to the
instructions given in the section
"Measurements for the CAN cable" (p.
150) . If the cable is intact, replace the
module. If the module status remains
the same, replace the CAN card.
0080 Overflow of outgoing CAN messages. Check the CAN cable according to the
instructions given in the section
"Measurements for the CAN cable" (p.
150) . If the cable is intact, replace the
module. If the module status remains
the same, replace the CAN card.
7.1. FPVC module error states (module 0)
Module Description Action

status
01 Digital output feedback error. The status of the Reboot the control system. If the error
digital output deviates from the required status. persists, replace the module.
02 PWMl output feedback error. The status deter- Reboot the control system. If the error
mined for the PWM output deviates from that re- persists, replace the module.
quired.
04 Module overheating. The module circuit board Reboot the control system. If the error
temperature is over 90 C. persists, replace the module.
08 Phase-difference calculator error. The value giv- Reboot the control system. If the error
en by the phase difference calculator varies more persists, replace the module.
than 28 steps per 10 milliseconds.
10 I/O is not ready. The I/O voltage is below 13 V. Check the module power supply in
accordance with the instructions be-
low.
7.2. FPVC module error states (for modules 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9)
Module Description Action

status
01 Digital output feedback error. The status of the Reboot the control system. If the error
digital output deviates from the required status. persists, replace the module.
02 I/O is not ready. The I/O voltage is below 13 V. Check the module power supply in
accordance with the instructions be-
low.
04 Configuration error. An attempt was made to use Reboot the control system. If the error
more than the existing number (8) of digital out- persists, replace the module.
puts.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
7.3. Normal Boot up and operation
During normal boot up module display shows the following information. If no errors occur display
shows: Version info - 00 (node) Pr (state) 00 (error) with approx. 2 seconds interval.
State Display
Pr
Node Display
Version
Power ON 00
info
Error Display
00
Module software version info is shown only once when the module boot up starts. Version info
consists of four data elements. E.g. if module software version is 1.0.0 then the version info
shows: FP 01 00 00. Thus the whole boot up sequence would look like: FP 01 00 00 00
Pr 00.
Display sequence is 00 oP 00 when start command from bus master has been received.
Pr = preoperational, oP = operational

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
7.4. RD module error states (modules 3, 6, and 7)
Transient error states can arise even if everything functions

NOTE!
correctly. In this case, the error bit does not require attention.
The following module-specific information is displayed on the RD module seven-segment display:

Node number (refer to the table below)
Module state
- not running (Pr = pre-operational); the module is waiting for a start command from the bus master
- running (Op = operational)
Error state (refer to the table below)
Normal Boot up Normal operation

Node display Node display
03 03
Error Display State Display Error Display State Display
00 Pr 00 oP
Figure: The display loop of the RD-module.
RD module error state
Screen Explanation Repair actions

01 Serial port memory full Reboot the system and check the serial
bus cables.
02 CAN message length error. The module Reboot the module and check the CAN
receives a message that is shorter/longer cables as instructed in the section Meas-
than expected. urements for the CAN cable. If the cable
is intact, replace the module.
04 Not in use
08 Illegal I/O. The control system tries, for Try rebooting the system. Contact Sand-
example, to operate digital output with an viks product support staff.
analog output command, or the input/out-
put referred to does not exist.
10 The module has received an unrecog- Replace the module. Contact Sandviks
nized command. product support staff.
20 Not in use

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Screen Explanation Repair actions

40 Overflow of incoming CAN messages Check the CAN cables as instructed in the
section Measurements for the CAN ca-
ble. If the cable is intact, replace the mod-
ule. If the module status remains un-
changed, replace the CAN card.
80 Overflow of outgoing CAN messages Check the CAN cables as instructed in the
section Measurements for the CAN ca-
ble. If the cable is intact, replace the mod-
ule. If the module status remains un-
changed, replace the CAN card.
It is possible for several errors to be active simultaneously. Subsequently, the display might show,
for example, the number 1A, composed of error numbers 2 + 8 + 10. NOTE! Numbers are in
hexadecimal notation. If the error is still active after rebooting and checking of the cables, replace the
RD module with a new one. If replacing the module does not correct the error, please contact Sandvik
Support.
RD module node numbers

n0 Node 0
n1 Node 1
n2 Node 2
n3 Node 3
n4 Node 4
n5 Node 5
n6 Node 6
7.5. --->!<--- shown in the GUI
This error is due to loss of communication between the GUI panel and the CPU card.
Follow the instructions, in the correct order.
1. Turn on the control system power with switch S900 when either the main power or the carrier
power is on.
2. Check the state of the mobile computer status LED. Utilize the table of status LED states in the
section "Mobile computer (A904)" (p. 15) .
Is the status LED illuminated steadily in green (not flashing)?
YES Go to the section "The mobile computer has started normally" (p.
117) .
NO Go to the section "The mobile computer starts with an error con-
dition" (p. 121) .

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
7.5.1. The mobile computer has started normally
Go through the list of possible reasons, in the order given. Before connecting or disconnecting
anything, turn off the control system with switch S900.
After each step, turn on the power to check whether the error has disappeared. If the error persists,
turn off the power with switch S900 before continuing.
If the double control panel is used, disconnect it and insert the dummy plug. If the error still persists,
continue troubleshooting according to the list below. If the error has disappeared, reconnect the
remote control panel and continue according to the list below.
1. Connectors in the wrong position
1. Check that the control panel connector is connected correctly.

2. Check that the serial traffic server is supplied with operating voltage and that its PWR connector
is properly connected.
3. Check that the mobile computer Ethernet cable is connected to the mobile computer connector
X3 and the serial traffic server LAN connector.
4. Check that the serial traffic server connectors PORT1 and PORT2 are properly in place.
2. Dirt or grease in the connectors
1. Disconnect the connectors from the control panel and the serial traffic server, and clean them.
3. Terminal strips poorly connected
1. Open terminal strips 902, 903, 904, and 905 in the NN box one by one, and check that the wires
have been stripped and connected properly. Reinsert the wires in their correct terminals, and
secure by tightening the screws of the terminal strip.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
4. Poor connection between the control panel and the serial traffic server
1. Disconnect the connector plugs from the control panel and serial traffic server.
2. Measure the resistance between the connector pins removed from the control panel and the serial
traffic server card as indicated in the figure below.
3. If the readings are incorrect, repeat the measurement for the terminal strips to find out whether
the damage is in connector X904 or the control panel cable. Replace the faulty cable.
9-pin Harting Connecting the connectors

1 5
<5
2 4
{
3 2
4 3 5 4 3 2 1
5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
5. Short circuit in the cable
1. Disconnect the connector plugs from the control panel and serial traffic server.
2. Check for short circuits by measuring the resistance between control panel connector pins 2, 3,
4, and 5 individually.
3. The resistance must be more than 1 megohm for all combinations.
If the readings are incorrect, repeat the measurement for the terminal strips to find out whether the
damage is in connector X904 or the control panel cable. Replace the faulty cable.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
6. Poor grounding
1. Disconnect the serial traffic cable connector (PORT1), but keep the control panel connector
connected.
2. Measure the resistance between the points indicated below. All readings must be less than 2
ohms. Before measuring, ensure that the connections have been made properly.
3. If the readings are incorrect, replace the faulty cable.
NOTE: The GUI panel must be removed from the main control panel and the multimeter connected
to the rear of the GUI panel's metal body.
Measurement points:
NN box terminal strip 906 and GUI panel metal body
NN box terminal strip 906 and pin number 5 on the 9-pin D-connector disconnected from serial
traffic server PORT1
7. Poor connection inside the control panel
1. Disconnect the control panel connector.

2. Open the control panel.
3. Measure the resistance between the GUI-1 connector and panel connector pins according to the
table below.
4. If the reading is more than 5 ohms, repair the connection.
GUI-1 with terminal strip

Terminal strip Panel connector pin
36 2
35 3
33 4
34 5
39 6
8. Damaged GUI-1
1. Open the control panel.

2. Replace the GUI-1.
Alternatively, the entire control panel may be replaced.

NOTE: Old and new DL/SOLO control panels are not interchangeable.
9. Damaged serial traffic server
A flashing red indicator on the serial traffic server indicates an error condition refer to "Serial device
server (A909)" (p. 21) .
1. Determine the cause, and replace the serial traffic server, if necessary.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
10. Moisture inside the panel cable connectors
1. Disconnect connectors X904, X909, and 1XH (as well as 2XH if the double panel is in use).
2. Dry the connectors if there seems to be moisture.
3. Use, e.g., CRC 2-26 or a corresponding liquid spray for moisture-protection.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
7.5.2. The mobile computer starts with an error condition
Go through the list of possible reasons, in the order given. Before connecting or disconnecting
anything, turn off the control system (S900).
After each step, turn on the power to check whether the error has disappeared. If the error persists,
turn off the power with switch S900 before continuing.
1. Disturbance from the CAN bus or GUI panel
1. Disconnect the mobile computer CAN connectors (X8 and X9).

2. Switch on the control system power (S900).
3. If the CPU card indicator light is lit continuously after start-up, continue troubleshooting from the
section CAN bus measurements.
2. Disturbance from the GUI panel
1. Disconnect the serial traffic servers control panel connectors (PORT1 and PORT2).
3. If the mobile computer status LED is illuminated steadily in green, continue troubleshooting from
the section "The mobile computer has started normally" (p. 117) ..
3. Grounding the mobile computer
1. Disconnect the mobile computers voltage supply connector (X6).

2. Measure the resistance between connector pins 3 and 4 and connector 906. Both readings must
be less than 2 ohms.
3. If the resistance is greater, replace the mobile computer voltage supply cable.
Melcher Veron
input 0 V = pin 32 input 0 V = pin 26
output 0 V = pin 23 output 0 V = pin 8
GND = pin 26 GND = pin 32
4. Mobile computer voltage
1. Switch off the control system power (S900).

2. Disconnect the mobile computers voltage supply cable from connector X6.
3. Connect a measuring adapter (e.g., 55071234 or equivalent) between the disconnected cable
and connector X6.
5. Use the adapter to measure the voltages between X6 connector pins 1 <-> 3 and 2 <-> 4. The
voltages should be 24 V, but the mobile computer operates when the voltage is 836 V. If the
voltage is below or above the aforementioned limits, check the mobile computer voltage supply
all the way from the main switchgear. Use a control circuit diagram for help.
5. The mobile computers flash memory is corrupted
1. Restart the mobile computer (S900).

2. If the mobile computer still starts with an error condition, replace it (refer to the Indicators
paragraph in the section "Mobile computer (A904)" (p. 15) ).

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
8. ERRORS NOT INDICATED BY MESSAGES IN THE GUI PANEL
8.1. Angle display errors
Recalibrate the system.
Did it help?
NO
Does the sensor raw values give
both positive and negative
values?
Does the sensor raw values change as The sign of the raw value should
the boom/drilling unit is moved? YES
change as the zero point is passed.
Zero points:
(Use the GUI--1 Test I/O display to check - Tilt: Boom in vertical position
the raw values) - Rot.1: Drilling module pointing to
the right
- Rot.2: Drilling module pointing
vertical down
NO
NO
YES
Is the sensor cable broken ?
(Measure the resistance of each of the

Other possible reasons:
sensor cable wires between
1. The sensor boxes are
MIL-connector and RD-module.Correct
not attached tightly to base
measuring pins can be found from electrical
2. The connector to the
drawings. Tilt sensor has 5-pin
sensor box is corroded or loose
MIL-connector and rotation sensor has 10-pin.
3. Water inside the sensor
box or R-box, where the
NO RD module is located
YES
Replace the sensor cable

Change the sensor and calibrate the system.
NOTE.
Write down the sensor constant (needed for
calibration). If the sensor is wired incorrectly
it may be damaged.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
8.2. Pressure sensor errors
Press the data disp button. Check

the pressure readings. When power
pack in not running the readings
should be following: Activate the drilling function to be
- Percussion; 0 bar YES
tested.
- Feed 0 bar
- Flushing 0 bar Is the reading same as in the
- Rotation 0 bar (30 bar if power analog gauge?
pack is on)
Are the readings corrects? YES NO

Does the correct control panel input(s)
get activated?
The sensor is Change the
OK. sensor.
NO
Measure the current of the pressure

sensor by following instructions given in
chapter Measuring valves and pressure Measure the resistance
sensors. between sensor connector pins
0 bar = 4 mA and corresponding terminal at
sensor max pressure = 20 mA
NO FPVC. See correct FPVC
terminals from electrical
Is the current correct? drawings.
Were both resistances < 5ohm?

YES
Activate the drilling function to

be tested. YES NO
Did the current increase?
NO
YES,
but too much Change the
or too little Change the valve cable.
sensor.
Change the sensor. If error
still active change the FPVC
module.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
8.3. Inductive switch errors
Go to the Test I/O display. Try to

activate the switch you are testing.
YES
Does the indicator state change at The switch is OK.
GUI?
NO
If possible hold a piece of metal (e.g. YES

wrench) close to the switch. Does the Adjust the switch distance to
indicator state change at the GUI? the activator.
NO
Disconnect the cable from the switch.

Attach a spare switch to the cable and YES
hold it close to metal. Change the switch.
Does the indicator state change at
GUI?
NO
Change the cable.

It is also possible that a switch attached to the
same VIO output (Vref) has a short circuit and has
caused the semiconductor-fuse (500 mA) to trip off
in the module. Check from the electrical drawings if
another switch is connected to the same output
and check also that circuit.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
8.4. Function does not start
Use the GUI-1 Test I/O display to check if

the correct control panel input(s) gets
activated as the movement is activated. (see NO Open the control panel and
the section I/O list for correct input). If check the wiring. If needed
right hand joy stick is used check also the replace broken components.
analog outputs with test I/O display.
Does the correct control panel input(s) get
activated?
YES
YES Check that the

Does the noise of the hydraulic pump
corresponding hydraulic
change as the movement is activated ?
register value(s) are not
too small.
NO
For many functions multiple valves are activated:

Percussion: Y1 + Y121 + Y126 (HL1500 only)
Feed: Y11 + Y3-4 + Y126 (HL1500 only)
Air Flushing: Y10 + Y210 (air-mist only)
Boom/Cassette Y139 + ON/OFF-valve
(Correct on/off valves can be found from the
YES Open the valve and
GUI-1 Test I/O display as the movement is clean it. If needed
activated from control panel or from I/O-list) replace it.
Measure the correct valves according to instructions in
section Measuring valves or pressure sensors.
Are the values correct?
NO
Measure the module output. Are the 1. Change the cable.

values correct? YES 2. Change the valve
Same values apply as in previous phase.
(Correct module and output pin number NOTE! The valve cap
can be found from section I/O-list) maybe broken even if the
led at the cap is working.
NO
Replace the module.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
8.5. Jacks or front frame are not working
Go to GUI-1 Test I/O display. Check the

state of KEYS indicator. Check the wire from carrier
When Diesel motor is on it should be: NO electrics to main electric
KEYS:1 panel and from main electric
When Power pack is on it should be: panel to MOD0 input 05.
KEYS:0 For correct terminal strips
Is the KEY state correct ? see electric wiring diagrams.
Does the correct control panel input(s)
get activated?
YES
Check the state of JACKS indicator.from

Test I/O display. When the movement is
NO Check the wire from jack
activated the state should be:
JACKS:1 control panel to main electric
When themovement is not activated. The panel and from main electric
state should be: panel to MOD0 input 04.
JACKS:0 For correct terminal strips
Is the JACKS state correct? see electric wiring diagrams.
YES
Diesel is on:
When activating the movement valves
Y139 and Y167 should be on.
Power pack is on: NO

When activating the movement valve
Change the valve cable.
Y139 should be on.
Measure the valves according to
Measuring valves and pressure
sensors.
Were the readings correct?
YES
Measure the carrier valve controlling the

movement. See carrier electrical
drawings.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
8.6. Depth display errors
Recalibrate the linear sensor first. If it didnt

help go to Service I/O mode. Check the NO
operation of retainer pressure switch (S8). Check the mechanical setting of
Retainer closed => S8:1 the switch. Is it set to 120 bar
Retainer open => S8:0
Does the state of S8 switch change
correctly? NO YES
Adjust the Measure the hydraulic

YES setting to 120 pressure by a separate
bar gauge.
1. Rotate the drilling module to vertical up Is the pressure in
position. retainer circuit over 140
2. Go to Service I/O mode bar when the retainer is closed?
3. Move the rock drill.along the feed rail. YES
Does the linear sensor raw value respond NO
to the rock drill movement? In Service I/O
mode follow the raw value
NO Replace the Adjust the retainer
switch hydraulic pressure
YES
1.Check that the

register value for drill Rotate the drilling unit to vertical
steel length is correct down position. Do not activate feed.
NO During this movement did the raw
value of the linear sensor changed?
Check the operation of BUP2 according
to instructions given in section BUP2
converter.
YES
Did the BUP2 behaved correctly?
NO Detach the tube located inside

YES the feed cylinder bottom. Attach
the magnet back to this tube or
Measure individually the resistance of replace it incase the magnet is
wires between BUP2 and RD module. damaged.
See correct RD and BUP2 terminals from
electrical drawings.
Were all resistances < 5ohm? Change the linear sensor
according to instructions given
NO YES in chapter Replacing position
sensor
Change the 1.Change the BUP2 converter
cable. 2. Check the angle sensor
cables and connectors

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
8.7. QN panel errors
Go to the maintenance display status display

(the display described in the section
Module status and errors) YES
After the text Mod1 is displayed, The QN panel is
a four-digit number appears. It is either communicating with MOD1.
0000 or 0010.
Is the number correct?
NO
Open the QN panel and measure the voltage

NO between QN panel pins 43 (24 V) and
Is any of the indicators lit when
the control system is live? 40 (GND) while
the control system is live.
Is the input voltage approximately 24 V?
YES
YES
Disconnect the serial bus cable from
the QN panel
T-) (T+ and
and from MOD1 (XJ5:3 Tx and XJ5:2 Rx). YES
Replace the QN panel.
NO
Measure the resistance for each cable
individually. Does the QN panel work?
Is the resistance > 2 ohms?
NO
NO
Measure the output voltage for MOD1
NO connections XJ2:8 (VS) and XJ7:1 (GND).
Replace the serial bus cable. Replace MOD1. Is the output voltage
approximately 24 V?
YES
Replace the QN panel

power cable.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
8.8. Danfoss flow valve errors (feed or rotation)
The same procedure can be used for both the feed and rotation flow valves.
No movement
Start movement (feed or rotation). Is the QN panel indicator,
What happens? which indicates that the power pack
is in use, lit?
Electrical
disturbance
NO
message
YES
Is the valve malfunction indicator lit
when the movement is started? Follow the instructions in the section
Checking the QN panel operation.
YES If the indicator is still not lit, check the
cable between the QN panel and
the power pack start/stop circuit
(for the correct main electrical cabinet
terminal strips, refer to the electrical
diagram).
NO
The cause may be cold hydraulic oil.
Warm the oil, using other movements.
If the error persists, measure the valve values,
following the instructions in the section
valve and . pressure sensor measurement.
Were the values correct?
NO YES
Replace the valve cable. If the error persists, Open the valve and clean it.
replace the module. If the error persists, replace
the valves electrical unit. Finally,
replace the valve frame.
Valve power supply
The Danfoss valves for both feed and rotation are supplied with operating voltage from FPVC pin
XJ2:8. The valve power supply works such that the pin and thus the valve is supplied with voltage
only when one of the valves is being controlled. When the Danfoss valves are not being controlled,
XJ2:8 is not supplied with voltage.
Connector pins
I/O Conn. Pin Signal Name DPW DPW DPW

name type conn. pin name
Feed speed and direction Y3_4 XJ3 1 AI6 X3 2 DIN0
Feed speed and direction Y3_4 XJ3 3 GND GND X1 9 GND
Feed speed and direction Y3_4 XJ10 7 IO13 PWM X3 1 DAO0

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
I/O Conn. Pin Signal Name DPW DPW DPW

name type conn. pin name
Rotation speed and direc- Y3_4, XJ2 8 IO7 DO X1 4 Vout
tion supply Y5_6
Rotation speed and direc- Y5_6 XJ3 2 AI5 X3 4 DIN1
tion
Rotation speed and direc- Y5_6 XJ10 8 IO12 PWM X3 3 DAO1
tion
8.9. GUI-1 panel faults
Operation of the DL control system has been reported to be unusual on occasion in two situations:
percussion and rotation continued without the operator touching any button or joystick. Replacement
of the GUI-1 corrected the problem. Later investigations confirmed that there was a broken film wire
in the GUI circuit board. This fault caused the voltage to leak to the wrong wires. It is therefore
important that the removed GUI-1 be sent to the factory for further investigation in cases like the
above.
If the ambient temperature becomes very high, the GUI-1 display might fade such that no text or
numbers can be seen. The DL control system still works. To make the text reappear, cool down the
surroundings of the GUI-1. You can also try to adjust the GUI-1 display brightness, using the
potentiometer shown in the picture below.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
9. MEASUREMENTS FOR THE VALVES AND PRESSURE SENSORS
Two types of connectors are used in the DL control system valves and pressure sensors.
ON/OFF and PWM valves:
These valve types use three-pin connectors.

The connector can be connected to the valve in
either of two ways. Both ways are correct.
LED+Z -DIODI
Danfoss valves and pressure sensors:
These devices use four-pin connectors. The

connector can be connected in one way only.
To enable measurements for all valve and pressure sensor types that use the above connectors, a
special measuring adapter (ID 55022523) can be obtained from Sandvik.
The correct values for the following measurements are indicated in the section Valve and pressure
sensor electrical measurements.
9.1. ON/OFF and PWM valves
These valve types use three-pin connectors.

1. Measure the current (A) from pin 1 or 2.
9.2. Danfoss valves
Danfoss valves use four-pin connectors.

1. Measure the voltage (V).
2. Measurements can be conducted for three different values:
- power supply (between pins 1 and 4)

- control voltage (between pins 2 and 4)
- fault monitoring (between pins 3 and 4)

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
9.3. Pressure sensors
The pressure sensors use four-pin connectors.

1. Measure the current (A) from pin 1 or 2.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
10. MEASUREMENT OF LINEAR SENSORS FOR THE BOOM AND FEED

MODULE
1. Check the cable between the sensor and the corresponding TAS module (RD).
Cable W320 from boom zoom linear sensor B101 to module connector 03 (RD)
Cable wire code Module connector code Module connector name

1 XJ1:11 AIN0
2 XJ8:6 GND
3 NOT CONNECTED
4 NOT CONNECTED
5 XJ7:6 GND
6 XJ10:7 VOUT
7 XJ4:9 GND
Cable W326 from drilling unit linear sensor (B16) to module connector 06 (RD)
Cable wire code Module connector code Module connector name

1 XJ3:11 AIN2
2 XJ8:6 GND
3 NOT CONNECTED
4 NOT CONNECTED
5 XJ4:9 GND
6 XJ10:7 VOUT
7 XJ7:6 GND
2. If the cable has been connected according to the above instructions, check whether the cable wires
have been connected to the right pins at the sensor end.
- Disconnect the cable connector from the linear sensor.
- Disconnect the cable from the corresponding RD module, wire by wire, and measure the resistance
with a multimeter to determine where each wire has been connected.
- After measuring, connect the wires back to the module connectors.
- The correct order for the linear sensor connector pins is as follows:
Cable wire number Linear sensor connector pin The linear sensor connector
number (seen from the solder pin number seen from the
side) solder side.
1 1
2 2
3 NOT CONNECTED
4 NOT CONNECTED
5 6
6 7
7 8

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
10
8 9
7
5 6
4
3
2
1
Figure: Exploded view of the linear sensor connector and assembly stages AD.
1 Seal
2 Connector ring
3 Connector
4 Shell
5 Protective ring
6 Support ring
7 Sleeve
8 Seal
9 Tightening ring
10 Compression screw
3. If the cables and wires are connected correctly but the signal is still missing, the fault is in either
the sensor or the RD module. To find out which one is faulty, perform the following measurements:
- Measure the sensor input voltage with a multimeter (DC area) from sensor connector pin 7 with the
wire connected to the module VOUT connector. Repeat the measurement with the wire
disconnected from the VOUT connector. If the measurement result is not 24 V in one case or the
other, the module is faulty. If the measurement result is 24 V with the VOUT wire disconnected,
there is a short circuit in the linear sensor. Check the connection information etc.
- Disconnect wire 1 from the module analog input (AIN0 or AIN2) connector and measure the
resistance between the module analog input and the module ground connector. The resistance
must be about 125 ohms. If the resistance is considerably higher or lower than 125 ohms, the
module analog input is probably faulty. Reconnect the wire after the measurement.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
- If the measured resistance is about 125 ohms, check the operation of the linear sensor. Measure
the voltage between the module analog input and the module ground connector with a multimeter
(DC area). Depending on the position of the magnet, the analog input voltage must be 0.52.5 V.
If the measured voltage is within this range, the module (RD) is faulty.
NOTE: The linear sensor input voltage must be 24 V during the measurements.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
11. THE DL431 BOOM LINEAR SENSOR
Measuring with the DL431 booms telescopic movement linear sensor is done as follows:
1. Turn off the power for both the device and the devices control system.
2. Open the R4 box.
3. Using a multimeter, measure the resistances detailed in the table below. The allowed resistance
values are provided in the table.
4. Measure the resistance between the coil and the ground for each resolver coil. The resistance
value must be over 1M. Low resistance can be caused by deterioration of the resolver coil, a
damaged sensor cable or moisture buildup inside the resolver or sensor cable. A wet resolver must
be dried out or replaced.
Coil Connection Resistance

Reference XJ1:1-XJ1:2 30...50
Sin XJ1:3-XJ1:4 100...150
Cosine XJ1:5-XJ1:6 100...150
Resolver coil resistances vary slightly between different sensors.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
12. ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS
This chapter presents a way to check controllers operation with a multimeter. So some experience
of using multimeter is assumed.Now before you continue, turn off powerpacks if they are running and
follow the instructions. And it helps to have electrical diagrams available.
12.1. FPVC/RD modules operation check
12.1.1. Checking the supply voltage
There are two small LEDs on the 7-segment dis-

play (see the arrows). When both LEDs are lit, the
FPVC/RD receives its operating voltage. If only
the left LED is lit, the I/O section receives oper-
ating voltage, but the sensor supply does not. If
only the right LED is lit, the situation is the oppo-
site.
. .
You can check the I/O supply voltage also by measuring it directly from the FPVC/RD connectors.
Connect the COM terminal of the multimeter to GND connector (FPVC: XJ2.10, RD: XJ2.9) and the
V terminal to VIO connector (FPVC: XJ2.11, RD: XJ2.10). The voltage should be 24...30 VDC. If this
is not the case, check the fuses and the power supply of the module.
You can check the sensor supply voltage also by measuring it directly from the FPVC/RD connectors.
Connect the COM terminal of the multimeter to GND connector (FPVC: XJ5.6, RD: XJ5.6) and the V
terminal to VS connector (FPVC: XJ5.1, RD: XJ5.1). The voltage should be 24...30 VDC. If this is not
the case, check the fuses and the power supply of the module.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
12.2. Valve and pressure sensor electrical measurements
Voltage-controlled proportional valves
Rotation flow, Y56 (Dan- GUI setting Rotation counter- Rotation clockwise
foss) clockwise
Start the rotation flow. NOTE: Rotation speed Voltage (V) Voltage (V)
The voltage depends on the ro- 600 10.8 14.3
tation direction.
Supply: 2428 V; idle: half of 800 10.2 14.8
the supply voltage 1000 9.6 15.4
Specified values with 25 V sup- 1200 9.0 15.9
ply voltage; idle: 12.5 V (no ro-
tation)
Feed flow, Y34 (Danfoss) Feed forward Feed backward

Run the rock drill against the reg. HYD 25 Voltage (V) reg. HYD 26 Voltage (V)
front or rear stop and leave the 1000 9.7 1000 15.5
feed active.
Supply: 2428 V; idle: half of 1200 9.1 1200 16.0
the supply voltage 1400 8.5 1400 16.6
Specified values with 25 V sup- 1600 8.0 1600 17.7
ply voltage; idle: 12.5 V (no ro-
tation)

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Pulse-width-controlled (PW) proportional valves
Percussion pressure, Y121 Coil resistance GUI setting Current

(Rexroth)
Turn the percussion on (feed (ohms) Percussion pressure (A)
and rotation are not needed). 5.8 100 0.8
120 0.9
140 1.0
160 1.1
Feed pressure, Y11 (Rexroth) Coil resistance GUI setting Current

Run the rock drill against the (ohms) Feed pressure (A)
front stop and leave the feed 5.8 60 0.6
forward on. Adjust the pressure
with the feed pressure regula- 80 0.7
tor from the GUI panel and/or 100 0.85
with the feed potentiometer. 120 0.95
Boom flow, Y139 (Rexroth) Coil resistance GUI setting Current

This proportional valve is used (ohms) reg. HYD 75 (A)
for all boom movements. Test 5 1200 0,55
it, for example, with the boom
zoom out. Run the zoom to the 1400 0,65
end stop and keep the move- 1600 0,75
ment active. 1800 0,85
ON/OFF valves
Coil resistance Current Voltage

Activate the valve to be tested (ohms) (A) (V)
from the GUI.
SIZE 1: Y18Y23, Y26Y29, 19 1,3 24
Y101, Y102, Y126, Y128,
Y153, Y154, Y167, Y185, Y186
(Rexroth NG6)
SIZE 2: Y7, Y8, Y14Y17, 23 1,1 24
Y30Y35, Y40, Y41, Y151,
Y152 (Vickers NG 02)
SIZE 3: Y9, Y10, Y210 (Busch- 26 0,9 24
jost)
SIZE 4: Y1 32 0,75 24
All pressure sensors generate analog current of between 4 mA and 20 mA.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
12.3. Electrical measurements for panel and module inputs and outputs
12.3.1. Control panel
PANEL CODE GUI-1

DIGITAL INPUTS DL400- 07/7 200 I/O
series
Feed/rotation joystick button S73 S73 S83 DI00
Feed / fast feed forward S73 S73 S83 DI01
Rotation/threading counterclockwise S73 S73 S83 DI02
Feed / fast feed backward S73 S73 S83 DI03
Rotation/threading clockwise S73 S73 S83 DI04
Percussion S75 S75 S84 DI05
Air flushing S74 S74 S84 DI06
Half-power percussion S75 S75 S84 DI07
Water flushing S74 S74 S84 DI08
Retainer switch closed S76 S76 S85 DI09
Retainer switch open S76 S76 S85 DI10
Anti-jamming automatics S79 S79 S86 DI11
Sequence functions (position 3) S78 S78 S87 DI12
Boom functions (position 2) S78 S78 S87 DI13
Boom functions (position 1)
Boom/cassette joystick button S77 S77 S89 DI14
Boom/cassette joystick Y-movement S77 S77 S89 DI15
Boom/cassette joystick X-movement S77 S77 S89 DI16
Emergency stop (normally closed) S70 S70 S80 DI17
Power pack stop SH71 SH71 SH81 DI18
Power pack start SH72 SH72 SH82 DI19
Bypass (forced drive) SH80 SH80 SH88 DI20
Remote control panel (pins 13 and 14 together in the DI21
panel connector)
Horn (normally open) S81 S81 S800 DI22
Fire extinguisher (normally open) S82 S82 S801 DI23
Air-mist water off S83 S83 DI06+DI08
PANEL CODE GUI-1

DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Control system error (red light) SH71 SH81 DO00
Power pack running (green light) SH72 SH82 DO01
Forced drive (also centralized closer) (yellow light) SH80 SH88 DO02
Control panel active (green light) H80 H800 DO03

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
PANEL CODE GUI-1

ANALOG INPUTS
Feed adjustment knob R70 R80 AI00
Boom/cassette joystick X-movement S77 S89 AI01
Boom/cassette joystick Y-movement S77 S89 AI02
Not in use AI03

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
12.3.2. Carrier
DIGITAL INPUTS (DL ZR, SOLOMATIC, SO- CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box
LO RTS) no.
Feed flow proportional valve error signal Y3-4 FPVC DIN00 0 1
Rotation flow proportional valve error signal Y5-6 FPVC DIN01 0 1
Remote control panel selection S901 FPVC IN00 0 1
Stabilizer pressure switch (HL1500 only) S125 FPVC IN01 0 1
Stabilizer pressure adjustment *) FPVC IN02 0 1
Parking brake switch (DL09 only) S21 FPVC IN03 0 1
Not in use FPVC IN04 0 1
Not in use FPVC IN05 0 1
Not in use IN00 1 1

Not in use IN01 1 1
Water flow sensor S9 FPVC IN02 1 1
Air flow sensor (optional) S10 FPVC IN03 1 1
Jack movement JACKS FPVC IN04 1 1
Diesel ignition on ENG FPVC IN05 1 1
Shank lubrication error SLU FPVC IN06 1 1
Drilling stop signal active DrStop FPVC IN07 1 1
DIGITAL OUTPUTS (DL ZR, SOLOMATIC, CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box
SOLO RTS) no.
Percussion Y1 FPVC OUT00 1 1
Water flushing Y9 FPVC OUT01 1 1
Air flushing Y10 FPVC OUT02 1 1
Air-mist flushing (water injection to air) (op- Y210 FPVC OUT03 1 1
tional)
Diesel-side pump flow to boom Y167 FPVC OUT04 1 1
Power pack stop K310 FPVC OUT05 1 1
Power pack start K311 FPVC OUT06 1 1
Percussion hour meter P100 FPVC OUT07 1 1
Warning lights (optional) E19-20 FPVC OUT00 0 1

Warning horn H9 FPVC OUT01 0 1
Stabilizer pressure control (HL1500 only) Y126 FPVC OUT02 0 1
ANALOG INPUTS (DL ZR, SOLOMATIC, CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box
SOLO RTS) no.
Percussion pressure gauge B1 FPVC AIN00 0 1
Feed pressure sensor B2 FPVC AIN01 0 1

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
ANALOG INPUTS (DL ZR, SOLOMATIC, CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box
SOLO RTS) no.
Rotation pressure sensor B3 FPVC AIN02 0 1
Flushing pressure sensor B9 FPVC AIN03 0 1
ANALOG OUTPUTS (DL ZR, SOLOMATIC, CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box
SOLO RTS) no.
Feed flow (Danfoss) Y3-4 FPVC DAO00 0 1
Rotation flow (Danfoss) Y5-6 FPVC DAO01 0 1
PWM OUTPUTS (DL ZR, SOLOMATIC, SO- CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box
LO RTS) no.
Percussion pressure proportional valve (Re- Y121 FPVC PWM00 0 1
xroth)
Feed pressure proportional valve (Rexroth) Y11 FPVC PWM01 0 1
Boom flow proportional valve (Rexroth) Y139 FPVC PWM02 0 1
Power Extractor (optional) Y128 FPVC PWM03 0 1
RS422 INPUTS (DL ZR, SOLOMATIC, SOLO CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box
RTS) no.
QN panel data (TX-) FPVC R- 1 1
*) Connect to 24 V if the rock drill type is HL600, HL700, or HL1000. Do not connect with HL1500.
Needed only with versions before 01.920. Not needed with DL400 models.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
12.3.3. Boom
DIGITAL INPUTS (DL ZR) CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box

no.
Rotation limit sensor S11 FPVC IN00 2 2
Not in use FPVC IN01- 2 2
IN07
DIGITAL OUTPUTS (DL ZR) CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box

no.
Boom tilt forward Y22 FPVC OUT00 2 2
Boom tilt backward Y23 FPVC OUT01 2 2
Boom swing left Y20 FPVC OUT03 2 2
Boom swing right Y21 FPVC OUT03 2 2
Boom zoom in Y102 FPVC OUT04 2 2
Boom zoom out Y101 FPVC OUT05 2 2
Feed unit rotation left Y18 FPVC OUT06 2 2
Feed unit rotation right Y19 FPVC OUT07 2 2
SOLOMATIC CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box

no.
Feed unit tilt forward Y22 FPVC OUT00 2 2
Feed unit tilt backward Y23 FPVC OUT01 2 2
Boom swing left Y20 FPVC OUT02 2 2
Boom swing right Y21 FPVC OUT03 2 2
Boom down Y26 FPVC OUT00 6 2

Boom up Y27 FPVC OUT01 6 2
Boom zoom out Y101 FPVC OUT02 6 2
Boom zoom in Y102 FPVC OUT03 6 2
SOLO RTS CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box

no.
Boom tilt forward Y22 FPVC OUT00 2 2
Boom tilt backward Y23 FPVC OUT01 2 2
Boom lateral movement left Y20 FPVC OUT02 2 2
Boom lateral movement right Y21 FPVC OUT03 2 2
Table transfer left Y28 FPVC OUT02 2 2
Table transfer right Y29 FPVC OUT03 2 2

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

no.
Feed unit rotation counterclockwise Y153 FPVC OUT00 6 2

Feed unit rotation clockwise Y154 FPVC OUT01 6 2
PWM INPUTS (DL ZR) CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box

no.
Boom tilt sensor (optional) B6 RD CNTR0 3 2
Feed unit rotation sensor (optional) (TMS D B7 RD CNTR1 3 2
only)
Boom extension position sensor (fan option) B101 RD AIN0 3 2
Boom swing angle sensor (fan option) B11 RD CTRL1 3 2

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
12.3.4. Drilling unit
DIGITAL INPUTS (DL ZR, SOLOMATIC) CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box
no.
Cassette rotation proximity switch (if se- S30 FPVC IN00 4 3
quence or data)
Long arms proximity switch, drilling center (if S32 FPVC IN01 4 3
sequence or data)
Long arms proximity switch, outer position (if S33 FPVC IN02 4 3
sequence or data)
Short arms proximity switch, outer position (if S34 FPVC IN03 4 3
sequence or data)
Short arms proximity switch, cassette (if se- S35 FPVC IN04 4 3
quence or data)
Tube proximity switch, gripper jaws (if se- S41 FPVC IN05 4 3
quence or data)
Retainer pressure switch S8 FPVC IN06 4 3
Bit cassette position sensor 1 S262 FPVC IN00 8 6

Bit cassette position sensor 2 S263 FPVC IN01 8 6
Bit adapter out S264 FPVC IN02 8 6
Bit retainer in S261 FPVC IN03 8 6
Bit adapter in S265 FPVC IN04 8 6
Bit changer arm on the cassette S266 FPVC IN05 8 6
Bit changer arm in the drilling center S267 FPVC IN00 9 6
Bit door open S268 FPVC IN01 9 6
Bit door closed S269 FPVC IN02 9 6
Bit in moving position S270 FPVC IN03 9 6
Manual bit cassette rotation clockwise S2 FPVC IN06 9 6
Manual bit cassette rotation counterclockwise S2 FPVC IN07 9 6
Bit retained S 8.2 FPVC 6
SERIAL INPUTS (TMS-ZRU) (DL430) CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box

no.
Carrier inclinometer B140 FPVC RS422 0 1
Boom swing angle sensor B20 FPVC RS422 2 2
Boom lift inclinometer B26 FPVC RS422 6 2
Drilling unit angle sensor B6 FPVC RS422 4 3
Drilling unit rotation inclinometer B7 FPVC RS422 5 3

no.
Retainer pressure switch S8 FPVC IN06 4 3

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
DL400 models with fan option CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box
no.
Rear stinger in S14 FPVC IN0 5 3
Front stinger in S151 FPVC IN1 5 3
DIGITAL OUTPUTS (DL ZR, SOLOMATIC, CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box
SOLO RTS) no.
Cassette rotation, tube out Y30 FPVC OUT00 4 3
Cassette rotation, tube in Y31 FPVC OUT01 4 3
Long arms to drilling center Y32 FPVC OUT03 4 3
Long arms from drilling center Y33 FPVC OUT03 4 3
Short arms from cassette Y34 FPVC OUT04 4 3
Short arms to cassette Y35 FPVC OUT05 4 3
Gripper jaws open Y40 FPVC OUT06 4 3
Gripper jaws closed Y41 FPVC OUT07 4 3
Retainer switch closed Y8 FPVC OUT00 5 3

Retainer switch open Y7 FPVC OUT01 5 3
Rear stinger in Y14 FPVC OUT02 5 3
Rear stinger out Y15 FPVC OUT03 5 3
Feed unit forward Y16 FPVC OUT04 5 3
Feed unit backward Y17 FPVC OUT05 5 3
Front stinger in Y151 FPVC OUT06 5 3
Front stinger out Y152 FPVC OUT07 5 3
Cradle zoom out (optional with ZR/F) Y185 FPVC OUT00 7 5

Cradle zoom in (optional with ZR/F) Y186 FPVC OUT01 7 5
Bit cassette rotation clockwise Y262 FPVC OUT00 8 6

Bit cassette rotation counterclockwise Y263 FPVC OUT01 8 6
Bit adapter out Y264 FPVC OUT02 8 6
Bit adapter in Y265 FPVC OUT03 8 6
Bit changer arm to the cassette Y266 FPVC OUT04 8 6
Bit changer arm to the drilling center Y267 FPVC OUT05 8 6
Bit door open Y268 FPVC OUT06 8 6
Bit door closed Y269 FPVC OUT07 8 6
Bit cassette rotation allowed S1S2 FPVC OUT00 9 6

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
PW INPUTS (DL ZR) CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box

no.
Linear sensor via BUP module (optional) B8 RD CNTR 2 6 4
Feed unit rotation sensor (if TMS DD/DDS or B7 RD CNTR 6 4
DATA) 0+1
DL, SOLO RTS CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box

no.
Linear sensor via BUP module (optional) B8 RD CNTR 0 7 4
DL400 models with fan option CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box
no.
Rear stinger pressure sensor B15 RD AIN0 6 4
Front stinger pressure sensor B152 RD AIN1 6 4
Feed unit rotation sensor B7 RD CNTR 3 5
1+2
Boom tilt sensor (optional) B6 RD CNTR 0 3 5
ANALOG INPUTS CODE MOD. I/O Mod. R box

no.
Drilling unit position sensor (if fan option in- B16 RD AIN2 6 4
stalled)

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
12.3.5. QN panel
INDICATOR LIGHT PANEL (QN) CODE Cable no.

Power pack running 1-H613 1
Power pack motor overload 1-H612 2
Pressure filter clogged 1-H611 3
Low hydraulic oil level H602 4
Low shank lubrication oil level (DL400 / SOLO 07 models H608 5
only)
Hydraulic oil temperature H610 9
Return filter clogged H607 10
Emergency stop activated H614 14
Incorrect phase sequence H603 15
Compressor running H618 16
Compressor motor overload H605 17
Low air pressure H609 18
Air-conditioner compressor running H621 19
Air-conditioner compressor overload H616 20
Water booster pump running H619 21
Water booster pump motor overload H606 22
Low water pressure H601 23
Main switch on H617 24
Ground fault H623 25
Air-mist flushing water pump running (optional) H620 26
Air-mist flushing water pump motor overload (optional) H615 27
Compressed air too hot H604 28
Submersible pump running (optional) H622 29
Submersible pump overload (optional) H624 30
Power supply 0 V 31
Power supply +24 V 32
Power supply +24 V 43
Power supply 0 V 40
RS-422;T+ 42
RS-422;T- 41

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
12.4. Measurements for the CAN cable
For CAN cable measurement and troubleshooting, the multimeter and the devices control circuit
diagram are used. CAN bus troubleshooting using a multimeter involves measuring the resistance
values of the termination resistors and checking the voltage during normal operation. When
measuring the resistance, note that the power must be disconnected from the control system. By
contrast, measurement of the bus voltage levels is carried out when the control system is live.
The multimeter cannot be used to verify definitively that the bus is OK, but it can be used to detect
the most common bus faults, such as interruptions and short circuits. Faults that cannot be detected
with a multimeter include a damaged CAN sensor (sensor signal fault) and missing CAN signals.
Generally, bit-level signal faults cannot be detected with a multimeter.
Turn off the control system power with switch S900.
Open the NN box door.
The letter M refers to the measuring point see the diagram at the end of this section.
M1 Measure the total resistance of the CAN bus between pins 925 and 926 of
connector group X900. The total resistance consists of the 120-ohm (180-ohm)
termination resistors, cables, connectors, and modules.
A If the measurement result is approximately 60 ohms 5 ohms (82 ohms 5
ohms), the bus cables, connectors, and termination resistors are intact.
B If the measurement result is less than 50 ohms, there is a short circuit on the
CAN bus. Go to items M2 and M3.
C If the measurement result is more than 100 ohms, one end of the CAN bus is
interrupted. Go to items M2 and M3.
M2 Separate the branches of the CAN bus (marked CARRIER and FEED UNIT)
from each other by disconnecting the M12-CAN bus cables from the mobile
computers A904 connectors X8 and X9.
Measure the total resistance of the CAN bus marked with the text CARRIER
between pins 925 and 926 of connector group X900. A brown and a white cable
are connected to the connectors.
CAN bus. Find and repair the fault.
interrupted. Find and repair the fault.
M3 Measure the total resistance of the CAN bus marked with the text FEED UNIT
between pins 922 and 923 of connector group X900. A brown and a white cable
are connected to the connectors.
CAN bus. Disconnect boom CAN cable connectors XE and XF, one at a time,
and repeat the measurements to determine the location of the fault more pre-
cisely. Find and repair the fault.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
interrupted. Disconnect boom CAN cable connectors XE and XF, one at a time,
and measure the bus resistance between contacts 1 and 2 in the connector to
determine the location of the fault more precisely. Find and repair the fault.
(Not all rigs include an XF connector.)
M4 Disconnect the mobile computers A904 connectors X8 and X9. Connect the
cables by intertwining them. NOTE: The mobile computer is now disconnected
from the CAN bus.
Turn on the control system power with switch S900.
Measure the CAN bus idling voltage between connectors 925(CAN_L) and 906
(0 V) as well as 926 (CAN_H) and 906 (0 V) in connector group X900.
A If the measurement result is 2.5 V 0.2 V, the CAN bus is intact.
B If the measurement result is about 0 V or 5 V, there is a short circuit on the CAN
bus. Go to items M5 and M6.
M5 Separate the branches of the CAN bus (marked CARRIER and FEED UNIT)
from each other by disconnecting the mobile computers A904 connectors X8
and X9.
Measure the idling voltage for the CANH (white) and CANL (brown) cables be-
tween connectors 925 (CAN_L) and 906 (0 V) as well as 926 (CAN_H) and 906
(0 V) in connector group X900 on the CAN bus marked with the text CARRIER.
The measurement can also be carried out with cable W310 (CARRIER).
bus. Find the location of the fault by checking the CAN bus, module by module,
and by measuring the idle voltage between the CANH and CANL wires and
ground. For the correct measuring points for each module, refer to the circuit
diagram. After locating the fault, repair it.
M6 Measure the idling voltage for the CANH (white) and CANL (brown) cables be-
tween connectors 922 (CAN_L) and 906 (0 V) as well as 923 (CAN_H) and 906
(0 V) in connector group X900 on the CAN bus marked with the text FEED
UNIT. The measurement can also be carried out with cable W310 (FEED
UNIT).
bus. Find the location of the fault by checking the CAN bus, module by module,
and by measuring the idle voltage between the CANH and CANL wires and the
ground. After locating the fault, repair it.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
X8 CAN 1
V+ 1 1
CAN_LOW 2 2
GND 3 3
CAN_HIGH 4 4
Shield 5 5
X9 CAN 1
V+ 1 1
CAN_LOW 2 2
GND 3 3
CAN_HIGH 4 4
Shield 5 5
X9 X8 X900
1 CAN card X903 CAN cable connectors X8 and X9 must be disconnected

from the mobile computer A904.
2 Carrier CAN bus connection
3 Boom / feed unit CAN bus
connection (W312)
4 Termination resistor
5 Carrier modules
6 Boom modules
7 Feed unit modules
8 Boom / feed unit
9 Feed unit
10 Carrier

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
Measure the total resistance for the bus. The total resistance for the system
consists of parallel 120 termination resistors, bus cables, etc. In the picture,
both ends of the actual CAN bus are equipped with termination resistors of 120
. Normally, the resistance caused by these two termination resistors is visible
when measured between CAN_HI and CAN_LO as ~60 , but each node con-
nected to the bus decreases this resistance value.
A If the measurement result is less than 50 , there is a short circuit on the bus.
B If the measurement result is more than 120 , one end of the bus is interrupted.
CAN-BUS 2.5V 2.5V
Encooder
CRN /C
Device
+24 V
0V 0V
CAN_H CAN_H <60
* 120 CAN-BUS 120 *

CAN_L CAN_L
* Terminal resistor s
Figure: Measurement connections for the CAN bus multimeter.
Measuring the CAN bus voltage level
Locate the fault by checking the CAN bus one module at a time. Move the termination resistor of the
bus towards another measuring point, measuring the idling voltage between the CAN_HI-CAN_LO
wires and the ground. This enables you to narrow down the fault area, limiting the number of
possibilities.
1. Switch the power on.
2. Measure the idling voltage of wires CAN_HI and CAN_LO against the CAN bus ground.
1. If the measurement result is 2.5 V 0.2 V, the CAN bus is intact.
2. If the measurement result is less than 1 V or more than 4 V, there is a short circuit on the CAN
bus.
Figure: CAN bus level / V.

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16

ID: 560 3 en 2011-12-16
www.sandvik.com
BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30
Alignment laser for DL-rigs

Table of Contents
1. Introduction ................................................................... 1
1.1. The Purpose of these instructions ......................................................1
1.1.1. Validity of the manuals ................................................................ 1
1.2. Introduction ...........................................................................................1
2. Safety and Environmental Instructions ...................... 3

2.1. Precautions for safe operation ............................................................3
3. Main components ..........................................................5

3.1. Technical data .......................................................................................5
3.1.1. Alignment laser technical information ..........................................5
4. Alignment laser operation ............................................7

4.1. Operation ...............................................................................................7
5. Alignment laser maintenance ...................................... 9

5.1. Maintenance .......................................................................................... 9
6. Alignment laser troubleshooting .................................11

6.1. Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 11
Copyright Sandvik Mining and Construction

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30
Copyright Sandvik Mining and Construction

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. The Purpose of these instructions
This manual contains supplementary information for operation,
maintenance and repair of a component.
Before operating, or performing maintenance or repair procedures for the
component or system described in this manual, read and understand the
information in operators and maintenance manuals supplied with the
machine. Pay special attention to the safety information in chapter "2 Safety
and environmental instructions" of those manuals.
1.1.1. Validity of the manuals
This manual, and especially the safety information, is valid only if no

unauthorized changes to the product are made.
Continuing improvement and advancement of product design might have
caused changes to your product which are not included in this publication.
Note also that if a third party has made changes to the product after
delivery from the manufacturer, this publication does not include
information on these changes or their influences on the product.
Whenever a question arises regarding your product, or this manual, please
consult your local Sandvik representative for the latest available
information.
1.2. Introduction
Directionality - The light emitted from a laser is well collimated and
spreads little as it travels through space. For example, if the beam
emerging from a laser is a half millimeter in diameter, it will only spread to
about six millimeters at a distance of five meters and it can be refocused to
a spot less than a half millimeter in diameter, even at great distances. This
property makes the laser an ideal tool for alignment and long distance
measurement.
Intensity - The laser concentrates large amounts of light energy into a very
narrow beam. To illustrate, the intensity (power divided by area) of a five
milliwatt laser is approximately 0,65 W/cm2. This high intensity leads to
significant improvements in experimental signal-to-noise ratio.
Monochromaticity - The laser light is of one color (one wavelength). In the
case of a helium-neon laser, the wavelength is 650 nm.
By contrast, a light bulb produces many wavelengths simultaneously.
Monochromaticity can be demonstrated by passing light through a prism,
which will disperse the output of a light bulb into a rainbow of colors. The
beam of red light from a He-Ne laser, however, will emerge unchanged.
Monochromaticity makes the laser excellent for light scattering and
spectroscope experiments, which require a narrowband light source.
Copyright Sandvik Mining and Construction 1

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30
2 Copyright Sandvik Mining and Construction

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30
2. SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS

2.1. Precautions for safe operation
Laser LMS-1103 is of the class power lasers, whose beams are, by
definition, safety hazards. Take precautions to prevent direct viewing
by unprotected eyes or accidental exposure to specular eam
reflections.
DANGEROUS VOLTAGE AND CURRENT Both the laser head and

power supply contain electrical circuits operating at high voltage and
current that can cause severe injury or death. Exercise extreme
caution whenever the laser head or power supply cover is removed.
Avoid contact with high voltage terminals and components.
Do not attempt to view either a direct or reflected beam without eye

protection.
Establish a controlled access area for laser operation. Limit access to
those persons who are trained in laser safety principles.
Post warning sings prominently near the laser operation area.
Set up a folded metal beam target to capture the laser beam and prevent
accidental exposure.
Set up shields to prevent stray reflections from escaping the laser
operating area.
To avoid unnecessary radiation exposure, keep the lasers protective
housing in place during normal operation.
Set up experiments so that the laserbeamis either above orbeloweye
level.
Provide enclosures for beam paths whenever possible.

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30
3. MAIN COMPONENTS
3.1. Technical data
3.1.1. Alignment laser technical information
Laser class power laser, optical power <1 mW

Wavelength 650 nm, red
Beam divergence 0,5*10-3 rad
Optics 3-elements, covered separate quartz window
Operating temperature -10 C to 40 C
Storage temperature -10 C to 40 C
Input voltage 6 - 10 VDC
Weight 4.0 kg

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30
4. ALIGNMENT LASER OPERATION

4.1. Operation
D Switch the positioning lasers on by turning the switch (S503) to the
right and back. The switch is located in the auxiliary device control panel
(UN). The lasers are on for 30 seconds.
Move the rig so that both positioning lasers are as close to the fan
aligning marks painted on the wall.
2 1
4
2
X
1 3
Fig. 1. Aligning the rig to fan position
1 Positioning mark
2 Positioning laser
3 Drilling line
4 Drilling direction
X distance depends on the drilling rig.
Lower the front frame to the ground, and lift the front wheels up. Check
that the aligning lasers are still at the aligning marks. If necessary realign
the rig.
Lower the rear jacks to the ground and lift the rear wheels up. Check that
the carrier is not rocking, but steadily supported against the floor.
Engage the parking brake.

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30
5. ALIGNMENT LASER MAINTENANCE

5.1. Maintenance
The alignment laser requires no maintenance. The cavity mirror surfaces
are inside the glass plasma tube and protected from contamination; they
cannot be cleaned.
It is unlikely that contamination would make its way to the outer surface of
the output mirror. We recommend in any case that you close the beam
attenuator when the laser is not in use to further reduce possible
contamination.

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30
6. ALIGNMENT LASER TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1. Troubleshooting
SYMPTOM SOLUTION
Check to see that the cable from the laser head is
firmly connected to the power supply.
Check to see that the power plug is properly
No output beam
installed.
Check to see that nothing is at the front of the laser
beam.
Laser blinks ON Check that the line voltage is within the acceptable
and OFF range.

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30

ID: BG00202363 A.001.1 2013-10-30
www.sandvik.com
BG00220350 A.001.1 2014-05-26
Fan automation 360, Operation

instructions
Fan automation 360, Operation instructions
WARNING
IGNORING INSTRUCTIONS HAZARD!
To avoid death or injury you MUST read, understand and follow
operator's and maintenance manuals before installing, inspecting,
operating, servicing, testing, cleaning, transporting, storing,
dismantling or disposing of the product or a part or accessory of the
product.
Copyright Sandvik
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
Copyright Sandvik
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ................................................................... 7
1.1 The Purpose of these instructions ......................................................7
1.1.1 Validity of the manuals ................................................................ 7
1.2 Introduction ...........................................................................................7
1.3 Additional user guides ......................................................................... 7
2 Safety and Environmental Instructions ...................... 9

2.1 Safety instructions ............................................................................... 9
3 Main components ..........................................................11

3.1 Component/system description .......................................................... 11
3.1.1 What is fan automation ................................................................11
3.1.2 GUI-1 User Interface ................................................................... 12
3.1.3 Drill plans .....................................................................................14
3.1.4 Active drill plan ............................................................................ 16
3.1.5 Navigation ................................................................................... 17
3.1.6 Display diagram under the PROG button ....................................18
3.1.7 Display diagram under the SET button ....................................... 19
3.1.8 Display diagram under the ZERO SET button ............................ 20
3.1.9 Display diagram under the DRILL UNCPL button ....................... 21
3.1.10 Display diagram under the SPEC button .....................................22
4 Fan automation 360 operation ....................................23

4.1 FAN automation overview ....................................................................23
4.1.1 STEP 1 - Create and edit drill plan ..............................................23
4.1.2 STEP 2 - Finish currently active fan ............................................ 23
4.1.3 STEP 3 - Select drill plan ............................................................ 24
4.1.4 STEP 4 - Edit active fan data, change hole statuses and fan last
hole ..............................................................................................24
4.1.5 STEP 5 - Navigate .......................................................................24
4.1.6 STEP 6 - If necessary, drill the collar pipe holes .........................24
4.1.7 STEP 7 - Test fan ........................................................................25
4.1.8 STEP 8 - Define fan drilling sequence ........................................ 25
4.1.9 STEP 9 - Set last hole ................................................................. 25
4.1.10 STEP 10 - Start fan automation (selected drill plan is active) ..... 26
4.1.11 STEP 11 - Changing the bit .........................................................30
4.1.12 STEP 12 - Restarting the fan automation ....................................31
4.2 Management of drill plans ................................................................... 32
4.2.1 Main drill plan display .................................................................. 32
4.2.2 Create new drill plan ....................................................................33
Copyright Sandvik
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.2.3 Editing hole data ..........................................................................35

4.2.4 Saving the drill plan ..................................................................... 40
4.2.5 Copying of a drill plan ..................................................................42
4.2.6 Deleting drill plans ....................................................................... 43
4.2.7 Selecting a drill plan for drilling ....................................................44
4.2.8 Editing / viewing of active plan .................................................... 45
4.2.9 Edit of drilling sequence .............................................................. 50
4.3 Navigation of the rig ............................................................................. 51
4.3.1 Setting the pivot point ..................................................................53
4.3.2 Checking the plan ........................................................................56
4.3.3 Testing the fan .............................................................................58
4.3.4 Teaching hole pivot point and/or rotation angle .......................... 59
4.4 Collar pipe ............................................................................................. 61
4.4.1 Setting a hole as a collar pipe hole ............................................. 62
4.4.2 Alignment of drilling module ........................................................ 64
4.4.3 Drilling the collar pipe hole .......................................................... 65
4.4.4 Installing the collar pipe ...............................................................65
4.4.5 Teaching of the collar pipe hole position to the system ...............66
4.5 Multi flush possibility with the first rod / tube ................................... 67
4.6 Drilling module home position and home position offset ................ 68
4.7 Depth mode ........................................................................................... 69
4.8 Settings ..................................................................................................69
4.8.1 Starter tube length .......................................................................71
4.8.2 Multi flush .................................................................................... 73
4.8.3 Bit life monitoring .........................................................................75
4.8.4 Resetting drill bit meters ..............................................................76
4.8.5 Bit meters reached display .......................................................... 77
4.8.6 Setting the home position of the drilling unit ................................78
4.8.7 Depth mode .................................................................................79
4.8.8 Collar pipe ................................................................................... 80
4.9 Fan sensor calibration ......................................................................... 80
4.10 Fan sensor fault finding ....................................................................... 82
4.10.1 Sensor valid raw values .............................................................. 82
4.10.2 Sensor calibrated values ............................................................. 83
4.11 How to skip a hole in the active fan .................................................... 83
4.12 How to skip an interrupted hole .......................................................... 83
4.13 How to edit the drill plan during drilling or uncoupling ....................83
5 Troubleshooting ............................................................85
5.1 Pivot point cannot be reached ............................................................ 85
5.2 Boom zoom movement minimum length reached (zoom fully in) ... 86
5.3 Potential for collision if distance between holes large ..................... 87
Copyright Sandvik
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 The Purpose of these instructions
This manual contains supplementary information for operation,
maintenance and repair of a component.
Before operating, or performing maintenance or repair procedures for the
component or system described in this manual, read and understand the
information in operators and maintenance manuals supplied with the
machine. Pay special attention to the safety information in chapter "2 Safety
and environmental instructions" of those manuals.
1.1.1 Validity of the manuals
This manual, and especially the safety information, is valid only if no
unauthorized changes to the product are made.
Continuing improvement and advancement of product design might have
caused changes to your product which are not included in this publication.
Note also that if a third party has made changes to the product after
delivery from the manufacturer, this publication does not include
information on these changes or their influences on the product.
Whenever a question arises regarding your product, or this manual, please
consult your local Sandvik representative for the latest available
information.
1.2 Introduction
This user document explains the principles behind, and the operation of the
fan automation feature supplied with the Sandvik DL410/DL411 and DL420/
DL421 models.
1.3 Additional user guides

Note! Before taking the drilling rig into use, the user must also read and
familiarize with the following instructions:
GUI-1 Control panel

If the data collection and data transfer option is installed:
Data collection and data transfer system, DL400 Series; Operation
instructions.
Data collection and data transfer system, DL400 Series; Maintenance
instruction.
Data collection and data transfer system, DL400 Series; Installation
Manual.
Copyright Sandvik 7
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
8 Copyright Sandvik
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
2 SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS

2.1 Safety instructions
WARNING!
Entering the machine hazard zone could cause death or severe
injury.
Do not access the machine or enter the hazard zone unless you are
trained in the safe operation of the machine. The operator must be
familiar with the machines performance and properties.
IGNORING INSTRUCTIONS HAZARD!

instructions of the machine. The operator must also be familiar with
the relevant regulations and instructions in force at the work site.
Plan your work in advance in order to avoid accidents, damage, and
injury.
DANGER
AUTOMATIC OPERATION HAZARD!
Before starting an automatic operation, ensure that machine hazard
zone is clear of people and objects. Access to the operating zone is
strictly prohibited, when the automatic operation is on and the
indicator light is lit.
Copyright Sandvik 9
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
3 MAIN COMPONENTS
3.1 Component/system description
3.1.1 What is fan automation
A Drilling rig equipped with automatic fan option is capable of drilling
automatically a pre-programmed drilling pattern of long production holes
(360).
In addition to normal one hole automation featues the fan automation
feature gives the DL drilling rig the following capabilities:
Create, edit and save of drillplans to the memory of the DL control
system
Automatic positioning of drilling module to hole angles and offset(s)
specified in selected drillplan
Automatic stinging
Automatic rock find
Automatic collaring of hole
Starter tube multiflush
Monitoring of bit meters
Following tasks are still done manually:
Marking the fan location to the tunnel wall
Tramming the carrier from fan to fan
Setting up the rig to the fan location
Feeding the drill plan data to the rig control system
Navigation (teaching the system where the tunnel center line is)
Bit changing
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
3.1.2 GUI-1 User Interface

The display unit is turned on when the drilling rig main switch is turned on.
12 4
11 9
16
10 3
8 1
15 5 6 7 2 14 13 17
1 SET Settings
2 BIT Not in use
3 ANGLE DISP Bearing angle display
4 ZERO SET Tube and depth counter reset, fan reset
5 DRILL + UNCPL Start fan, one hole drill + uncouple
6 DRILL Drilling only
7 UNCPL Uncoupling only
8 SPEC Calibration and maintenance
9 DATA DISP Drilling data display
10 PROG Drillplan create, edit and save
11 HOME Return to the SANDVIK display
12 INFO Alarm help texts
13 OK Accept button
14 ESC Abort button
The stop button stops drilling, uncoupling or currently
15 STOP running sequence. The power pack will remains
running.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
Menu selection keys. Used to carry out various

16 MENU KEYS
selections.
Used for input of numerical values and making
17 ADJUSTING KNOB
selections
There is a separate manual for the GUI-1; "GUI-1 Control system".
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
3.1.3 Drill plans

Before fan automation can be used the operator has to create at least one
drill plan which will then be selected as active for drilling. Instructions on
how to create and delete drill plans are given in section 4.2 Management of
drill plans (Page 32). Instructions on how to select drill plans are given in
section 4.2.7 Selecting a drill plan for drilling (Page 44).
All the drill plans (max amount 15) are stored in as files on the system disk.
These can be edited, copied, and deleted.
The drill plan file contains the following header information:
Level name (optional, given when saving drill plan)
Stope name (optional, given when saving drill plan)
Drift name (optional, given when saving drill plan)
Fan id
Date created
Time created
Number of holes
and for each hole the following information:
Hole number
Drilling module tilt angle
Drilling module rotation angle
Pivot point offset
Drilling module feed position
Hole depth
Breakthrough hole status (yes/no)
Collar pipe hole status (yes/no)
These are illustrated in the following picture:
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
1
3
12 10
11 4
5 6
1 Hole depth from rock 2 Breakthrough tolerance

3 Hole depth from pivot point 4 Boom Tilt
5 Drilling module rotation angle 6 Pivot point offset position
7 Drilling module feed position 8 Pivot point vertical position
9 Fan 10 Multi flush depth
11 Extra pull 12 Rock contact
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
3.1.4 Active drill plan

Before starting fan automation one of the created drill plans must be
selected and made active. Only one plan at the time can be the active
plan. When a drill plan is made active the hole data is copied to system
working memory. The active plan contains the following extra information
needed during drilling of the fan:
1. Hole sequence
Hole sequence defines the order in which holes are to be drilled (see
section 4.1.8 STEP 8 - Define fan drilling sequence (Page 25)).
2. Hole status
Hole status affects which phase of fan automation (position, drill,
uncouple) will be active when fan automation is started. The operator
can affect which holes are drilled using the skip status. Hole statuses
and their meaning are as follows:
- Waiting
- Hole is undrilled. Fan automation will begin with positioning
phase
- Drilling
- Hole is being drilled
- Uncoupling
- Hole has been stopped during uncoupling phase. Fan
automation will continue with uncoupling phase.
- Finished
- Hole had been drilled and uncoupled successfully.
- Skip
- Operator has specified that the hole should not be drilled.
Fan automation will skip over these hole to next hole with
Waiting status.
- Interrupted
- Positioning or drilling of hole has been interrupted with an
error, or operator has pressed STOP button. If fan
automation was stopped during positioning stage then after
restart the operator will be prompted to continue with
positioning or continue in current boom position with stinging
and hole collaring.
- Aborted
- Collaring of collar pipe hole has failed (collar pipe not found).
3. Last hole
After define the order of drilling (drilling sequence) then the last hole
is selected. Fan automation will halt after this hole is finished. For
example the operator might select the next last hole based on the
amount of meters to drill with current bit.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
3.1.5 Navigation
Navigation is the action through which the machine is shown a reference
point (B) in the tunnel. This is done by driving boom zoom and swing joints
manually until the drilling module rotation axis is located at the reference
point. Normally this reference point will be located on the center line of the
tunnel. Drillplan holes will be drilled relative to this point.
This reference point is a real position in the tunnel and must be known
before designing the fan. Each hole in the drillplan is then given an offset
position from the pivot point offset (C), in addition to rotation and tilt angles,
and hole depth. All the pivot points specified in the drill plan will be
automatically located at the same horizontal level where the rotation axis is
at the moment of navigation. The minimum height of the navigation
reference point is 2.2 m (A) from the floor.
- +
A Minimum height of middle point from floor level is 2,2 m (height of

rotation axis when boom zoom completely in).
B Navigation middle point = reference point = pivot point
C Hole pivot point offset
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
3.1.6 Display diagram under the PROG button
A8150-1(V1.0)(TS), 3.400.93
SANDVIK
11-03-18 09:45

LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :
SELECT CREATE EDIT DELETE

PLAN PLAN ACTIVE PLAN
SELECT PLAN ESC = NO CHANGES ESC = Drillplan display HOLE NUM : ESC = Quit DELETE PLAN ESC = NO CHANGES
LEVEL : FAN : TILT : deg DMPOS : cm LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE :
DRIFT :
DATE :
TIME :
CREATE PLAN ROT :
DEPTH :
deg
m
PPOFF
<WAITING>
: cm STOPE :
DRIFT :
DATE
TIME
:
:
NEXT PREV. SELECT COPY EDIT SAVE EDIT CHANGE SHOW SAVE NEXT PREV. DELETE
PLAN PLAN HOLES STATUS NEXT PLAN
SELECT PLAN ESC = NO CHANGES HOLE NUM : ESC = Quit

SAVE PLAN : OK = SAVE ESC = Quit
LEVEL : FAN : TILT : deg DMPOS : cm
LEVEL : [ ] FAN :
STOPE : DATE : ROT : deg PPOFF : cm
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME : DEPTH : m
DRIFT : TIME :
NEXT PREV. SELECT CREATE EDIT INSERT SHOW

FWD BWD DOWN UP
HOLE VALUES DELETE NEXT
EDIT HOLE : ESC = Quit HOLE NUM : ESC = Quit

TILT : deg DMPOS : cm TILT : deg DMPOS : cm
ROT : deg PPOFF : cm ROT : deg PPOFF : cm
DEPTH : m DEPTH : m
OFFSET TILT ROT HOLE INSERT INSERT
POS ANGLE ANGLE DEPTH DELETE
BEFORE AFTER
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET- TILT ANGLE SETTING: SET ROTATION ANGLE WITH KNOB SET DEPTH WITH KNOB
TING, ESC = QUIT OPERATION OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES
OFFSETS 0.0 DEGREES 0.0 DEGREES

1.3 METERS
SET SET SET TILT ANGLE WITH KNOB GRADE GRADE GRADE GRADE TOGGLE TOGGLE GRADE GRADE
DM POS PP OFFS OK = ACCEPT, ESC = NO CHANGES 100 10 1 0.1 BT CP 1 0.1
DRILLING MODULE POS SETTING: PIVOT POINT OFFSET SETTING: SET DEPTH WITH KNOB SET DEPTH WITH KNOB
OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES
BT CP
50 CM 0 CM 0.8 METERS 0.8 METERS
TURN KNOB TO ADJUST THE VALUE TURN KNOB TO ADJUST THE VALUE TOGGLE TOGGLE GRADE GRADE TOGGLE TOGGLE GRADE GRADE
OK = ACCEPT, ESC = NO CHANGES OK = ACCEPT, ESC = NO CHANGES BT CP 1 0.1 BT CP 1 0.1
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
3.1.7 Display diagram under the SET button
A8150-1(V1.0)(TS), 3.400.93
SANDVIK
11-03-18 09:45
TING, ESC = QUIT OPERATION TING, ESC = QUIT OPERATION
SETTINGS SET ZERO

DRILL FAN TUBE RESET END DEPTH
SET SET COUNT BIT M. FAN COUNT

FAN SETTINGS
STARTER BIT DM NEXT
TUBE CHANGE HOME MENU
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE CHOOSE SETTING, SET WITH KNOB PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE
BIT CHANGE SETTINGS OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES
ESC = QUIT OK = ACCEPT ESC = NO CHANGES ESC = QUIT
STARTER TUBE 1.00 M FAN SETTINGS

150 METERS
LENGTH MULTI HOME POS. DEPTH COLLAR

ON OFF POS. OFFSET
FLUSH MODE PIPE
STARTER TUBE LENGTH: CHOOSE SETTING, SET WITH KNOB PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE REF *COLLAR PIPE APPROACH MODE*
OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES FOR DEPTH COUNT
FLUSHING ROTATION
1.83 METERS
OK = ACCEPT, ESC = QUIT ON ON
TURN KNOB TO CHANGE THE NUMBER FLUSH FLUSH EXTRA FROM FROM TURN KNOB TO CHANGE THE MODE
OK = ACCEPT ESC = NO CHANGES DEPTH COUNT PULL ROCK PIVOT OK = ACCEPT , ESC = NO CHANGES
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
3.1.8 Display diagram under the ZERO SET button
A8150-1(V1.0)(TS), 3.400.93
SANDVIK
11-03-18 09:45

TING, ESC = QUIT OPERATION
SET ZERO
TUBE RESET END DEPTH
COUNT BIT M. FAN COUNT
OK = RESET COUNTING OK = RESET FAN LOG OK = RESET COUNTING
ESC = LEAVE WITHOUT CHANGES ESC = LEAVE WITHOUT CHANGES ESC = LEAVE WITHOUT CHANGES
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
3.1.9 Display diagram under the DRILL UNCPL button
A8150-1(V1.0)(TS), 3.400.93
SANDVIK
11-03-18 09:45
BIT CHANGE : ESC = Quit

STATUS : ON
BIT METERS : 54.0 M
BIT LIFE : 150.0 M
START ONE TEST NAVIG.

FAN HOLE FAN
*** START *** SET DEPTH WITH KNOB AND START HOLE NUM 1 : ESC = Quit PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE
HOLE : 1 DMPOS : 80 cm DRILLING: OK=START, ESC=CANCEL TILT : 10.0 deg DMPLN : 80 cm OPTION. ESC=QUIT OPERATION
TILT : 12.3 deg PPOFF : 50 cm ROT : 90.0 deg DMACT : 50 cm
ROT : 123.4 deg <WAITING> 1.3 METERS DEPTH: 25.3 m PPOFF : 50 NAVIGATE
DEPTH: 2,6 m <WAITING>
TOGGLE GRADE GRADE GRADE ALIGN STORE NEXT SAVE SET PIV EDIT CHECK
OK=START, ESC=CANCEL BT 10 1 0.1 POINT SEQ. FAN
POS.

NOTE!
PRESSING -BUTTON AT THIS POINT
THE NEXT DISPLAY WILL OPEN! HEIGHT . 230 SWING 4,5
AUTOMATIC ALIGNMENT: HOLE 1
TILT ROT TILT. : 5.0 ROT.: 89.0

12.4 12.3 123.5 123.4
HOLE NUM : ESC = Quit
DEPTH. 2.6
TILT : deg DMPOS : cm
CHECKING DRIFTER POSITION ROT : deg PPOFF : cm
DEPTH: m
TEACH TEACH TEACH CORR. HOLE SEQ P.PT ROT DEPTH

PP DM. ROT. ROT.
1 1 0 -20.9 12.0
[ 2 2 25 45.1 15.5 ]
13 3 -50 120.1 13.0
NEXT PREV SHIFT SHIFT

UP DOWN
CHECK PLAN: OK = Browse ESC = Quit

HOLE PPOFF SWING ZOOM CHECK
1 10 5.0 20 OK
2 20 8.0 24 OK
3 30 12.0 29 OK
4 40 18.0 35 OK
5 50 26.0 38 OK
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
3.1.10 Display diagram under the SPEC button
A8150-1(V1.0)(TS), 3.400.93
SANDVIK
11-03-18 09:45


SERVICE
FILE TEST SHOW SHOW
SPECIALS TRANSFER I/O ERRORS STATUS
BASIC DISABLE CAL.. SERVICE

CALIBR. ALARMS L. SEN
INPUTS : OK = Next page , ESC = Quit

S8:0 S33:0 DST:0
S9:0 S34:0 PP:0
S10:0 S35:0 JACK:0
S11:0 S41:0 CKEY:0
S30:0 S125:0 PPBY:
PSW? S32:0 SLU:0
INPUTS : OK = Next page , ESC = Quit
+
Rear stinger S14 0
Zoom sensor B101 59
CALIBR ATION
CAL. CAL. CAL. CAL.
MONITOR : OK = Next page, ESC = Quit

CAL SENSOR
CAL. CAL. CAL. TING, ESC = QUIT OPERATION
TILT ROT FAN
CAL. FAN
PANEL: OK = Next page , ESC = Quit
SWING DM POS ZOOM
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR Right joystick X-turn: 50%
Right joystick Y-turn : 50%
Feed potentiometer : 0%
DI12: 0 DI13: 0 POS: 2
CCX4: 1 1 1 1
SENSOR SCALING FACTOR DM Pos sensor raw: 0 ZOOM SENSOR RAW: 200 INPUTS: OK = Next page , ESC = Quit
DRIVE BOOM ZOOM TO
6000 DRIVE DRILLING UNIT TO
BACK POSITION FULLY IN POSITION
Linear/DM [mm/10]
Linear/zoom [mm/10]
2000
200
AND PRESS OK WHEN READY AND PRESS OK WHEN READY Rotation sensor. 1 raw: -537
Rotation sensor. 2 raw: 1347
TURN KNOB TO ADJUST THE VALUE Tilt sensor raw: 139
OK=ACCEPT, ESC=NO CHANGES ESC=Cancel operation ESC=Cancel operation Swing sensor raw: 317
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4 FAN AUTOMATION 360 OPERATION

4.1 FAN automation overview
This section gives an overview of the steps required when using fan
automation. For detailed instructions of each step see the following
sections.
After tramming to the fan location and setting up the rig, the normal flow of
tasks required before starting fan automation is as follows:
1. Create / edit the fan to be drilled.
2. Finish currently active fan.
3. Select the drillplan after which it becomes the active fan.
4. If necessary change hole statuses, for example skip holes which are not
to be drilled.
5. Navigate the rig to the tunnel center line.
6. If necessary, drill the collar pipe holes, install the collar pipes, and define
collar pipe location and start depth.
7. Test the fan for possible collision with rig frame, tunnel wall, roof bolts or
other obstacles.
8. Define the fan drilling sequence.
9. Set last hole.
10. Start fan automation drilling.
11. Stop fan automation and change bit as required.
12. Continue the fan automation drilling.
4.1.1 STEP 1 - Create and edit drill plan
At least one drill plan must exist on the system disk before fan automation
can be started.
The following actions can be carried out on drill plans:
1. Creation of drill plans.
2. Copy and modification of existing drill plan ( add holes, delete holes,
modify hole data, rename ).
3. Deletion of drill plans.
See chapter 4.2 Management of drill plans (Page 32): for details about
how to create and edit the drill plan.
4.1.2 STEP 2 - Finish currently active fan
Before a new drill plan can be selected the current active fan must be
ended. From the start display (which shows SANDVIK text) press the
ZERO SET button.
1. Select the END FAN menu option.
2. After which you will be prompted to press OK to finish the previous fan.
The drill plan memory will now be cleared, allowing a new drill plan to be
selected.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.1.3 STEP 3 - Select drill plan

See chapter 4.2.7 Selecting a drill plan for drilling (Page 44) for details
about how to select the drill plan.
After the drill plan is selected, it becomes the new active fan. All holes in
the plan are set to WAITING status. In addition first hole is set to LAST
HOLE (LAST WAIT).
4.1.4 STEP 4 - Edit active fan data, change hole statuses and fan last hole
If necessary the active fan data can now be edited, editing of the active fan
data does not affect the original drill plan.
The following actions can be carried out on the active drill plan:
1. Edit hole values, see section.
2. Create and delete holes.
3. Change hole statues. For example holes that are not to be drilled for
some reason can be set with SKIP status.
4. Teach hole positions and angles based on current boom module position.
4.1.5 STEP 5 - Navigate
Navigate the drill rig according to the instructions in section 4.3 Navigation
of the rig (Page 51).
The height value shown in the navigation display is the distance from
ground to the drilling module rotation axis. Boom zoom movement should
be set so that the height value in the navigation display is approx. 230 cm.
Boom swing movement should be as close vertical as possible to provide
maximum offset movements for the drilling module. The following situations
should be kept in mind when navigating:
If the boom zoom is not extended enough and the boom swing
movement is not vertical there is a possibility that during drilling module
positioning the boom zoom movement sensor reading could go negative
value. If this happens automatic positioning is halted and an error
message will be generated.
If the boom zoom is extended too much, there is a possibility that during
positioning of the drilling module the boom zoom movement will not be
possible to reach the hole pivot point. If this happens automatic
positioning and an error message will be generated.
It may not be possible to reach pivot points on one side of the tunnel if
the swing joint is not close the vertical when navigation occurs.
Drill rig should be positioned to the middle of the tunnel and the boom
swing movement set to vertical during navigation.
4.1.6 STEP 6 - If necessary, drill the collar pipe holes
If collar pipe holes are marked in the dril plan, drill them and store the
actual drilling module position and position of the rock drill at hole start. For
further details see section 4.4 Collar pipe (Page 61).
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.1.7 STEP 7 - Test fan

Before starting the fan it is necessary to test the fan to make sure that there
are no collisions with rig frame, tunnel walls, roof support such as rock
bolts, or other obstacles in the tunnel. Testing the fan involves
automatically aligning the boom to each hole in turn, and if necessary
making corrections to the hole start position. See section 4.3.3 Testing the
fan (Page 58) for further details.
After selecting and aligning the boom to the planned hole start position,
corrections to the hole start position can be made in any of three different
ways:
1. Driving the boom to the new start position and teaching the new pivot
point, offset drilling module position and drilling angles with the STORE
POS feature. see sections 4.3.3 Testing the fan (Page 58) and
4.4.5 Teaching of the collar pipe hole position to the system (Page 66).
2. Driving to the new start position and teaching separately new pivot
position and/or rotation angle. After correcting the pivot point offset the
rotation angle and hole depth can if be recalculated (corrected) so that
the hole bottom is at the same position. See section TEACH ROT. and
CORR. ROT features (Page 60).
3. Active plan hole data can be edited manually. See section Edit active
holes (Page 46).
4.1.8 STEP 8 - Define fan drilling sequence
By default after selecting the new drill plan and making it active the order of
drilling (drilling sequence) is the same as the order of hole number. Often
the operator will want to drill the holes in a different order to that of hole
number. The hole sequence can be changed using the EDIT SEQUENCE
feature (see section 4.2.9 Edit of drilling sequence (Page 50)).
4.1.9 STEP 9 - Set last hole
Normally not all fan holes can be drilled without halting, for example for a
bit change. Before starting fan automation the LAST HOLE must be set.
Fan automation will halt after the current last hole is drilled and uncoupled.
The current last hole to be drilled can be set in one of two ways:
1. From the EDIT SEQUENCE display using the SET button (see section
4.2.9 Edit of drilling sequence (Page 50)).
2. From the EDIT ACTIVE display using the SET button (see section Edit
active hole status (Page 47)).
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.1.10 STEP 10 - Start fan automation (selected drill plan is active)

Change display to the SANDVIK display by pressing ESC on the control
panel.
Go to the START FAN display automation by pressing the DRILL/UNCPL
key.
The options available are as follows:
1. START FAN - Start the currently active fan.
2. ONE HOLE - Drill and uncouple one hole in normal one hole drill mode.
3. TEST FAN - Allows the operator to check for collisions by testing boom
movements before starting fan automation.
4. NAVIG - Navigation is done by driving boom zoom and swing joints
manually until the drilling module rotation axis is located at the reference
point.
Before starting fan automation with the START FAN option the drilling
module should be at one of the following positions:
At the navigation position with the tilt and rotation within 5 degrees of the
vertical position.
With the tilt and rotation within 5 degrees of the planned tilt and rotation
for the first hole.
If the remote operation option is installed and the machine is being started
from the remote panel then after selecting the START FAN option the
text START will be displayed for five seconds, during which you should
confirm start of fan automation by pressing the OK key.
After this the display will change to the fan automation positioning display.
This shows the current tilt and rotation angles using the large font, with the
target angles and current drilling depth shown in small font.
On the bottom line there is a status display which shows the current stage
of fan automation. Stages during positioning are as follows:
CHECKING ROCK DRILL POS
Rock drill moves to home position set in registers.
LIFTING STINGERS
Front and rear stingers are pulled in until inductive switches indicate that
they are fully inside.
DRIVE DR. UNIT TO HOME
Drilling module is driven to home position set in registers.
DRIVE BOOM ZOOM, SWING AND ROTATION TO PLANNED PIVOT
POINT OFFSET AND ROTATION ANGLE
Boom zoom, boom swing and drilling module rotation are driven to the
required pivot point offset and rotation angle of the hole.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
If the required pivot point distance is greater than 0.5 m then the drilling
module is driven first to vertical up or down position, after which the
boom moves to the new pivot point position, after which the rotation
movement is carried out. During movement of the rotation joint the drilling
module is also corrected to avoid possible collision with the rig frame.
If the required total rotation angle distance is greater than 135 degrees
then the drilling module is positioned to the tunnel centerline position
( navigation position ) either vertical up or down, after which the rotation
joint is rotated 180 degrees to the opposite position. During movement of
the rotation joint the drilling module is also corrected to avoid possible
collision with the rig frame. After this the drilling module is positioned to
the planned offset and rotation angle.
1 2 3 4 5
An example of rotation and DM positioning when moving over large distance.
Start hole : rotation 135 deg, pivot point offset -1.0 m

Target hole: rotation 315 deg, pivot point offset 1.0 m
1. Rotation and DM at positions specified for start hole.
2. Rotation is positioned to vertical bit down, and DM positioned to home
position home pos offset.
3. Move to tunnel center position ( pivot point 0 m ). DM position is home
position home position offset.
4. Rotate to vertical bit up. DM is positioned to home position + home pos
offset.
5. Move to target rotation and pivot point offset. DM is positioned to that
specified for hole in drill plan.
DRIVING DR. UNIT
Drilling module moves to position set in drill plan.
DRIVING TILT
Drilling module tilt moves to position set in drill plan. Next stingers are
driven out. If hole is an uphole then the rear stingers are driven out first. If
hole is a downhole then the front stingers are driven out first.
PUSHING REAR STINGERS
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
Rear stingers push out until pressure rises above value set in registers. If
necessary boom rotation angle is corrected while stingers are being
driven out.
PUSHING FRONT STINGERS
Front stingers push out until pressure rises above value set in registers. If
necessary boom rotation angle is corrected while stingers are being
driven out.
CLOSING RETAINER
Retainer is closed.
OPENING RETAINER
Retainer is slowly opened until rotation pressure falls below value set in
registers.
FIND ROCK
Rock drill moves forward with flushing on until bit contacts with rock (feed
pressure rises above value set in registers). Rotation is by default OFF
during find rock but can be configured ON if necessary.
After detecting the rock surface the rock drill is pulled back a few
centimeters from the rock before setting rotation and percussion ON for the
collaring stage. Collaring continues to the depth set in the registers. After
this drilling begins, and the display changes from the alignment display to
the drilling display.
Pressing the OK key will scroll through the following displays:
HOLE PEN.
FEED PERC.
ROT. FLUSH.
PESS 65 PRESS. 4
HOLE BIT
NO. 1/4 MTRS 36
TUBE BIT
COUNT 3 MAX. 200
FRONT REAR
STING. 95 STING. 94
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26

Drilling 10 min
Uncoupling 2 min

Drilling 90 min
Uncoupling 30 min
BREAKTHROUGH: ON
Pressing ESC will return you to the SANDVIK display.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.1.11 STEP 11 - Changing the bit

If the bit change status is set to ON (bit meter monitoring is ON) then after
the cumulative bit meters has reached the specified BIT LIFE value (see
chapter 4.8.3 Bit life monitoring (Page 75)) then drilling will be halted, the
rock drill pulled back to the back position and the following display shown
below:
Pressing ESC will return you to the alignment display.
** BIT METERS REACHED **
CURR DEPTH : 23.4 M

PLAN DEPTH : 29.0 M
BIT METERS : 150.0 M
BIT LIFE : 150.0 M
.......ESC
The information displayed is as follows:

CURR DEPTH - the current drilled depth for the hole defined from either
rock face or pivot point depending on which is selected.
PLAN DEPTH - the depth to be drilled to for the current hole.
BIT METERS - the number of meters drilled since last reset of bit meters.
BIT LIFE - the specified maximum drill meters before re-sharpening of
the bit.
Pressing ESC will return you to the alignment display.
This screen is cleared from the display by pressing ESC key. After this the
operator will typically continue in one of the following ways:
Uncouple the tubes automatically using the UNCPL option, change the
bit, reset the bit meters and continue with fan drilling.
If the hole is almost complete continue with automatic drilling until the
hole is completed after which the tubes will be uncoupled automatically.
After the last tube has been uncoupled fan automation will be halted and
the operator will be prompted to change the bit.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.1.12 STEP 12 - Restarting the fan automation

If the fan automation has been stopped for some reason (e.g. bit meter
limit, or error situation, operator has pressed STOP button), then after
correcting the situation the fan is restarted from the START FAN option
(see section 4.1.10 STEP 10 - Start fan automation (selected drill plan is
active) (Page 26)).
First the **Automation interrupted!** display is shown. This indicates the
stage at which the error occurs and has a short cut to the error log.
**AUTOMATION INTERRUPTED!**
PHASE
PLANNED DEPTH
CURRENT DEPTH
TUBE COUNT
CONT CONT SHOW.
CLEAR KEEP ERRORS
Select CONT CLEAR to clear the error flag, or CONT KEEP to keep the
error flag set (the same error display will be shown next time automation is
started).
Fan automation restart will depend on the phase of the current hole:
Interrupted during drilling phase (tube count greater than 1) then continue
with drilling
Interrupted during uncoupling phase (tube counter greater than 1) then
continue with uncoupling
Interrupted during positioning phase then show **Positioning
interrupted!** display as follows.
**POSITIONING INTERRUPTED!**
PLAN ACTUAL
TILT : TILT :
ROT. : ROT. :
PP. OFF : PP. OFF :
CONT CONT.
POS DRILL
This display allows fan automation to be continued in one of the following

ways:
1. CONT POS
Continue positioning of the hole. The whole positioning phase will be
restarted as described in section 4.1.10 STEP 10 - Start fan
automation (selected drill plan is active) (Page 26).
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
2. CONT DRILL
Drill hole at current position. Using this option the drilling module can
be repositioned if necessary before restarting fan automation. Fan
automation continues with driving of stingers out followed by the find
rock stage.
4.2 Management of drill plans

Note! If the drill rig has a data collection and data transfer system, then the
handling of drill plans is carried out mainly through the data
collection and transfer system. In this case creation and deletion of
drill plans using the GUI is disabled.
4.2.1 Main drill plan display

Press the PROG button on the GUI panel.
1. Following display is displayed.
LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :

This shows the currently selected (active) plan and gives the following
options:
SELECT PLAN Allows a drill plan to be selected from those currently
stored in memory. After selecting a drill plan it becomes the active drill
plan. A drill plan can only be selected if the current fan has been ended.
CREATE PLAN Allow new plans to be created.
EDIT ACTIVE Allows the active plan to be modified. If necessary the
active plan can be modified while the fan is being drilled. If a hole is
currently being drilled changes made to it through the EDIT
ACTIVE display will not affect it until fan automation is halted and
restarted.
DELETE PLAN Allows drill plans to be deleted. If the currently active
plan is deleted, it will remain the active plan until the currently selected
fan has been ended.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.2.2 Create new drill plan

1. Select CREATE PLAN .
LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :

2. CREATE PLAN display is displayed.

ESC = Drillplan display
CREATE PLAN
COPY EDIT SAVE
PLAN HOLES PLAN
There are two basic ways that a drill plan can be created as follows:
EDIT HOLES Create a new drill plan.
COPY PLAN Copy an existing drill plan, after which it can be modified
and saved with a new name
1. To create new plan from scratch the EDIT HOLES option should be
selected.
CREATE PLAN
COPY EDIT SAVE
PLAN HOLES PLAN
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26

ROT : deg PPOFF : cm
DEPTH : m
CREATE EDIT INSERT SHOW


CREATE HOLE Create a new hole, initialized to default values. The
new hole is automatically placed at the end of the drill plan list of holes.
EDIT VALUES Edit the currently displayed hole.
INSERT DELETE Insert new holes before or after the selected hole or
delete selected hole. The new hole is initialized to default values.
SHOW NEXT Show the next hole in the drill plan. After showing the
last hole in the drill plan the display will jump back to the first hole in the
list.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.2.3 Editing hole data
Tilt angle, rotation angle, hole depth, break through, collar pipe
LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :

2. Select EDIT
CREATE PLAN
COPY EDIT SAVE
PLAN HOLES PLAN
3. Press CREATE HOLE to add a new hole at the end of the drill plan, after
which Select EDIT VALUES .
DEPTH : m

ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26

EDIT HOLE : ESC = Quit
TILT : 0.0 deg DMPOS : 0 cm
ROT : 99.0 deg PPOFF : 0 cm
DEPTH : 0.0 m
OFFSET TILT ROT. HOLE

POS ANGLE ANGLE DEPTH
Select the TILT ANGLE , ROT. ANGLE , and HOLE DEPTH options to
change the tilt angle, rotation angle and hole depth settings respectively. In
each case a display of the following type will appear, which allows the value
to be changed by rotating the thumb wheel on the control panel.
For example, change the ROT. ANGLE and HOLE DEPTH .
1. Select ROT. ANGLE .
DEPTH : 0.0 m

2. Set ROTATION ANGLE with the knob, and accept with OK . After
pressing OK you will be returned the previous display.
SET ROTATION ANGLE WITH KNOB
23 .6 DEGREES
GRADE GRADE GRADE GRADE

100 10 1 0.1
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
3. Select HOLE DEPTH , after which the following display is displayed.

SET DEPTH WITH KNOB
OK = ACCEPT , ESC = NO CHANGES
0.0 METERS
TOGGLE TOGGLE GRADE GRADE

BT CP 1 0.1
Menu options allow the incremental change in value for a given change of
the wheel to be set (for example 0.1 deg, 1 deg).
TOGGLE BT option allows the hole to be specified as a breakthrough hole.
TOGGLE CP allows the hole to be specifications a collar pipe hole. The
collar pipe settings are found 4.4 Collar pipe (Page 61).
If a hole is specified as breakthrough, it means that the control system will
monitor the drilling for breakthrough. For further information regarding
breakthrough see "GUI-1 Control panel manual, chapter "Breakthrough
settings (automatic drilling)".
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
Pivot point off set, DM position

LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :

2. Select EDIT
CREATE PLAN
COPY EDIT SAVE
PLAN HOLES PLAN
3. Select EDIT VALUES .

DEPTH : m

ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4. Select OFFSET POS .

DEPTH : 0.0 m

5. OFFSETS display is displayed.

OFFSETS
SET SET
DM POS PP OFFS
Select SET DM POS and SET PP OFFS respectively to change drilling

module position and pivot point offset in the same way as the other hole
values. Both values are specified in centimeters. Note that the default DM
POS value is set to the DM HOME POSITION . This is the position that the
DM will move to before starting boom swing and zoom movements.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.2.4 Saving the drill plan

After the drill plan has been completed it should be saved before exiting
from the DRILLPLAN menu, otherwise the changes made will be lost.
1. After edit of the drill plan is completed, press the ESC button to
return the CREATE PLAN menu.
DEPTH : m

2. From this display select the SAVE PLAN option.

CREATE PLAN
COPY EDIT SAVE
PLAN HOLES PLAN
3. Following display is shown.

SAVE PLAN : OK = Save ESC = Quit
LEVEL : [ ] FAN :
STOPE :
DRIFT :
FWD BWD DOWN UP
The SAVE PLAN display allows the following identifiers to be given:

LEVEL
STOPE
DRIFT
FAN
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
These can be specified characters A..Z, 0..9 and _. Names for level, stope,
drift and fan are optional and will not affect saving of the drill plan. If no fan
name is given then a fan number will be given from 1..15. In addition the
drillplan will be saved with creation date and time.
Names are specified with the FWD, BWD, DOWN , and UP options as
follows:
FWD - Move forward to the next character.
BWD - Move backwards by one character.
DOWN - Move down to the next identifier, for example from LEVEL to
STOPE.
UP - Move up to the next identifier, for example from DRIFT to STOPE .
Characters and numbers are selected by rotating the thumb wheel until the
required character / number is displayed.
When all the identifying names have been given the drill plan is saved by
pressing the OK key. Press ESC to leave the display without saving the
plan.
The maximum number of drill plans that can be saved is 15. If 15 drill plans
already exist in memory then the following message will displayed MAX.
PLAN NUMBER REACHED, REPLACE AN EXISTING PLAN OR
DELETE AN OLD PLAN! by pressing OK, DELETE display will appear
and it is possible to delete selected plan on the list and save plan
from SAVE PLAN display. By pressing ESC,SAVE menu appears and it is
possible to save plan with the same name as existing list.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.2.5 Copying of a drill plan

LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :

2. Select COPY PLAN .

CREATE PLAN
COPY EDIT SAVE
PLAN HOLES PLAN

SELECT PLAN ESC = NO CHANGES
LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :
NEXT PREV. SELECT
Toggle through the plans in the memory with NEXT and PREV functions.
The drill plans are in the chronological order (newest first).
When the wanted drill plan is shown in the display it may be selected with
the SELECT function. This opens the plan to the edit holes display and it
may be edited as shown in chapter 4.2.3 Editing hole data (Page 35).
After editing of holes is completed it is saved using the SAVE PLAN option
as described in chapter 4.2.4 Saving the drill plan (Page 40).
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.2.6 Deleting drill plans

1. Select DELETE PLAN .
LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :

2. Following display is shown.

DELETE PLAN ESC = NO CHANGES
LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :
NEXT PREV. DELETE
Scroll to the drill plan(s) to delete using the NEXT and PREV. menu keys.
Press DELETE to delete the plan.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.2.7 Selecting a drill plan for drilling

Selecting a drill plan means that a drill plan file is selected from those on
disk. This drill plan is loaded into working memory and becomes the active
drill plan
1. Select SELECT PLAN .
LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :


SELECT PLAN ESC = NO CHANGES
LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :
NEXT PREV. SELECT
Toggle through the plans in the memory with NEXT and PREV functions.
The drill plans are in the order (newest first).
When the wanted drill plan is shown in the display it may be selected with
the SELECT function, after which the display will return to
the DRILLPLAN menu display. The selected drill plan will now be
the ACTIVE current plan. If fan automation is started then the fan will be
drilled according to the hole positions, directions and depths in this plan.
A drill plan cannot become active if there is currently an active plan. The
currently active plan must first be ended using the ESC > ZERO SET >
END FAN option.
If the operator attempts to select a plan while another plan is currently
active after starting fan drilling, then an error message will be shown and
the selection will not be accepted.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
After becoming the active plan the status of the first hole is set to LAST
HOLE . The default drilling sequence is according to hole number.
Normally the operator will want to modify the drilling sequence and set a
new LAST HOLE (see chapter Setting last hole (Page 49) for more
details.
4.2.8 Editing / viewing of active plan
1. Select EDIT ACTIVE .
LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :


DEPTH : m <WAITING>
EDIT CHANGE SHOW SAVE

STATUS NEXT PLAN
EDIT HOLES Create, edit values, insert, delete and modify existing
holes in the same way as described in chapter 4.2.3 Editing hole
data (Page 35).
CHANGE STATUS Allows the current status of the displayed hole to
be changed. See chapter Edit active hole status (Page 47).
SHOW NEXT Shows the next hole. After showing the last hole the
display jumps to the first hole in the list.
SAVE PLAN Allows any changes to be saved to a new drill plan as
described in chapter 4.2.4 Saving the drill plan (Page 40).
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
Edit active holes

LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :

2. Select EDIT .
DEPTH : m <WAITING>

STATUS NEXT PLAN

DEPTH : m

If necessary the holes of the fan to be drilled can be entered directly into
the active plan with this option, in other words without previously selecting a
saved drill plan. In this way the first hole can be entered, after which fan
automation can be started. The remaining holes can then be entered while
the first hole is being drilled. After creating the remaining holes, the status
of a new hole should have its status set to LAST HOLE (see chapter
Setting last hole (Page 49)). If this is not done fan automation will halt
after the first hole.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
If the values of the hole which is currently being drilled are changed then
the changes will not take effect unless fan automation is halted and
restarted. In practice only changes to the drilling depth and breakthrough
status can be made to holes which are already being drilled. Changes to
position and direction will have no effect on the current hole be drilled.
Edit active hole status

LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :


HOLE NUM :1 ESC = Quit
DEPTH : m <STATUS>

STATUS NEXT PLAN
The status of the hole can be changed between WAITING, READY ,

and SKIP by pressing the SET STATUS key. The hole status is
automatically set to INTERRUPTED if positioning or drilling of the hole is
halted during fan automation by pressing the STOP button.
Status waiting
If the status of the hole is WAITING , then this means that the hole is
undrilled, and that if the hole depth is greater than zero, the fan automation
will attempt to position to the hole and drill it. If the hole depth is set to zero,
the fan automation will only position to the hole, after which it moves
immediately to the next.
Status drilling
If the status is DRILLING , then the current hole is drilled according to set
parameters.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
Status finished
If the status is FINISHED then the hole is drilled, and the fan automation
will not attempt to position to or drill the hole. During normal fan automation,
if drilling and uncoupling of the hole is completed successfully, then the
system will set hole status automatically to FINISHED . If for some reason
the operator does not wish to drill the hole then status can be set manually
to FINISHED .
Status skip
If status is SKIP , the hole operator has set the hole not to be drilled. In
other words the system will not attempt to position to or drill the hole. When
a hole that is not to be drilled use of this status is preferable, as it shows
more clearly which holes has been selected not to be drilled.
Status interrupted
As mentioned above the INTERRUPTED status is set if the positioning or
drilling of the hole is halted for one of the following reasons:
During fan automation by pressing the STOP button on the GUI panel.
Due to an error detected by the system diagnostics.
Drilling has been halted automatically to allow a bit change.
When fan automation is resumed, behavior will depend on the tube count
as follows.
If tube count is 1 then the operator will be prompted with the POSITIONING
INTERRUPTED display. From this display the following options are
available:
1. CONT. POS continue positioning of the hole. The whole positioning
phase will be restarted as described in section 4.1.10 STEP 10 - Start fan
automation (selected drill plan is active) (Page 26).
2. CONT. DRILL drill hole at current position. Using this option the
drilling module can be repositioned if necessary before restarting fan
automation. Fan automation continues with driving of stingers out
followed by the find rock stage. See section 4.1.12 STEP 12 - Restarting
the fan automation (Page 31) for further details.
If tube count is greater than 1 then normal drilling is continued.
Status uncoupling
If the status is UNCOUPLING , then after a restart of fan automation
(either START FAN or UNCPL button) the system will continue with
uncoupling, after which positioning to the next hole will start.
Status aborted
The hole status is set to aborted if collaring of a collar pipe hole has failed
(collar pipe not found). This status means that the hole is undrilled.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
Setting last hole

After the drill plan has been selected, it is necessary to set the LAST
HOLE before fan automation is started.
In order to set the last hole, go to the hole in the EDIT display, and then
press the SET key. If the hole is WAITING, INTERRUPTED , or SKIP
when last hole status is set, the status becomes LAST HOLE. If the hole
is FINISHED when last hole status is set, the status becomes LAST HOLE
FINISHED .
Status LAST HOLE means that fan automation will end after the hole is
drilled finished, and status LAST HOLE FINISHED means that fan
automation will end when the previous hole is drilled finished.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.2.9 Edit of drilling sequence

Press the DRILL/UNCPL button on the GUI panel .
1. Select NAVIG.
BIT CHANGE: ESC=Quit
STATUS : ON
BIT METERS : 54.0 M
BIT LIFE : 150.0 M

FAN HOLE FAN
2. NAVIGATE display is displayed. Press EDIT SEQ.

NAVIGATE
SET PIV EDIT CHECK
POINT SEQ. FAN
3. The following display is shown.

HOLE SEQ P.PT ROT DEPTH
1 1 0 -20.9 12.0
[ 2 2 25 45.1 15.5 ]
13 3 -50 120.1 13.0
NEXT PREV SHIFT SHIFT

UP DOWN
Note! After changing hole sequence make sure that the last hole is set
correctly. See section Setting last hole (Page 49) for details on
setting the last hole and below.
The sequence display fields are as follows:

HOLE drill plan hole number.
SEQ drilling sequence number for the hole. For example in the
example display hole number 13 is the third hole to be drilled.
P.PT planned pivot point offset of hole.
ROT planned hole rotation angle.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
DEPTH planned depth of hole.
Selecting a hole
In order to change the position of a hole in the sequence it must first be
selected. This is done with the NEXT and PREV function. The brackets
show which hole is currently selected.
Changing hole sequence

Press SHIFT UP and SHIFT DOWN to move the position of the hole in the
drilling sequence.
Setting the last hole

Press the SET button to set the currently selected hole as last hole. Last
hole status is indicated with a star (*) character inside the brackets.
Exiting from sequence display

Press OK to quit the display and save sequence changes. Press ESC to
4.3 Navigation of the rig

The rig has to be manually trammed and set up to correct fan location
before the navigation procedure is carried out.
Navigation means teaching the tunnel center line to the system (setting the
pivot point).
Before navigation drill plan must be selected as active plan.
1. Select NAVIG .
STATUS : ON
BIT METERS : 54.0 M
BIT LIFE : 150.0 M

FAN HOLE FAN
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
2. NAVIGATE display is displayed.

NAVIGATE
SET PIV EDIT CHECK
POINT SEQ. FAN

SET PIV POINT Sets the pivot point for the fan to be drilled. After
accepting the pivot point the system calculated whether all the hole can
be reached and displays the results to the operator.
EDIT SEQ. You can edit the drilling sequence, if there are holes in the
drilling plan which can not be reached.
CHECK FAN Shows the results of calculations to check whether all
the holes can be reached.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.3.1 Setting the pivot point

The fan pivot point is set with the SET PIV POINT menu option, after which
the following display will appear which shows the distance of the rotation
axis from boom swing axis (measured along the zoom axis) and the swing
angle.
The boom swing and zoom movements are driven until the rotation axis is
aligned with the tunnel pivot point.
1. Select NAVIG. .
STATUS : ON
BIT METERS : 54.0 M
BIT LIFE : 150.0 M

FAN HOLE FAN
2. Select SET PIV POINT .

NAVIGATE
SET PIV EDIT CHECK
POINT SEQ. FAN

HEIGHT 230 SWING 4,5

TILT : 5.0 ROT : 89.0
Note! The minimum distance from the pivot point to the tunnel floor lever
(A) is about 220 cm.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
The pivot point height shown on the display is calculated from rotation axis
to the tunnel floor.
C
B
A D
A Pivot point height from the tunnel floor level

B Pivot point of the navigation (B).
C SET PIV POINT
D Pivot point of the hole.
In order to get maximum pivot point offset coverage, the machine should be
aligned as closely with the tunnel center line as possible, so that the boom
swing angle is as close to vertical as possible when navigating. For the
pivot point to be accepted the tilt and rotation angles should be both within
5 degrees of vertical.
After driving the pivot point of the drilling module to the pivot point of the fan
press OK to accept the pivot point of the navigation.
After accepting the navigation pivot point position the system will check
whether the boom swing and zoom actions can enable reaching the pivot
points. The results will be displayed with the following display:

1 10 5.0 20 OK
2 20 8.0 24 OK
3 30 12.0 29 OK
4 40 18.0 35 OK
5 50 26.0 38 OK
HOLE - Hole number.

PPOFF - Hole pivot point offset (C) according to the drillplan.
SWING - Swing angle.
ZOOM - Calculated zoom position.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
CHECK - Indicates whether the hole pivot point can be reached. OK

means YES, ERR means NO and FRM means that the front frame is in
the way of the pivot point hole.
If the system indicates that a hole pivot point cannot be reached or hits to
the front frame, it is still the responsibility of the operator to do one of the
following:
Check the navigation.
Correct the hole pivot point in the active plan.
Start fan automation. In this case the system will halt at the hole where is
ERR or FRM error message.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.3.2 Checking the plan

1. Select NAVIG. .
STATUS : ON
BIT METERS : 54.0 M
BIT LIFE : 150.0 M

FAN HOLE FAN
2. Select CHECK FAN .

NAVIGATE
SET PIV EDIT CHECK
POINT SEQ. FAN

1 10 5.0 20 OK
2 20 8.0 24 OK
3 30 12.0 29 OK
4 40 18.0 35 OK
5 50 26.0 38 OK
This check will show if all holes in the active plan are within the range of the
boom movements.
HOLE - Hole number.
PPOFF - Hole pivot point offset (C) according to drill plan.
SWING - Swing angle.
ZOOM - Calculated zoom position.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
CHECK - Indicates whether the hole pivot point can be reached;

- OK means that the hole can be positioned to without problems,
- ERR means that the hole can not be reached because required joint
position (boom zoom or swing) exceeds the maximum possible
position.
- FRM means that with current hole values bit will collide with the front
frame.
If the system indicates that a hole pivot point cannot be reached or hits to
the front frame, it is still the responsibility of the operator to do one of the
following:
Check the navigation.
Correct the hole pivot point in the active plan.
Start fan automation. In this case the system will halt at the hole where is
ERR or FRM error message.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.3.3 Testing the fan

TEST FAN Allows the operator to check for collisions by testing boom
movements before starting fan automation.
1. Select TEST FAN .
STATUS : ON
BIT METERS : 54.0 M
BIT LIFE : 150.0 M

FAN HOLE FAN

HOLE NUM 1 : ESC = Quit
TILT : 10.0 deg DMPLN : 80 cm
ROT : 90.0 deg DMACT : 50 cm
DEPTH : 25.3 m PPOFF : 50
ALIGN STORE NEXT SAVE

POS.
After the fan pivot point has been set the operator has the option to test the
boom movements using this option. This might be done for example the
following reasons:
To check for potential collisions between the rear stingers and the frame.
To check that the drill is not going to hit for example a bolt or other
obstruction during the find rock stage.
To check for collisions with the rock during boom movements.
ALIGN Starts movement of the boom to the currently displayed hole.
After selecting the ALIGN option the operator has to acknowledge the
movement by pressing the OK button. After this the movement will begin.
The movement will end after the stingers have been pushed out. If the
operator wishes to stop the test movement before this it can be done by
pressing the STOP button. After this a new hole to test can be selected
with the NEXT option.
STORE POS. The information of the chosen hole will be updated to
the position in which the boom is at the moment the button is pushed.
Note that also the hole tilt angle will be changed to the current boom tilt
angle.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
NEXT Shows the next hole in the plan. After the last hole has been
displayed the system jumps back to the first.
SAVE Allows changes made to the active plan to be saved (see
chapter 4.2.4 Saving the drill plan (Page 40)).
4.3.4 Teaching hole pivot point and/or rotation angle
Press the SET button to show the hole position teach display.

DEPTH : m
TEACH TEACH TEACH CORR.

PP DM. ROT. ROT.
TEACH PP - Set planned hole pivot point offset to current actual boom
pivot point position.
TEACH. DM - Set the planned hole drilling module position to the current
actual drilling module position.
TEACH. ROT - Set the planned hole rotation angle to the current actual
drilling module rotation angle.
CORR. ROT - After changing the pivot point position, recalculate the
rotation angle and hole depth so that the hole will be drilled to the same
end position as the original planned hole.
For further details see section TEACH ROT. and CORR. ROT
features (Page 60).
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
TEACH ROT. and CORR. ROT features

STATUS : ON
BIT METERS : 54.0 M
BIT LIFE : 150.0 M

FAN HOLE FAN
2. Following display is displayed. Now press SET button on the GUI panel .

POS.

DEPTH : m
TEACH TEACH TEACH CORR.

PP DM. ROT. ROT.
TEACH PP - saves a new PP. OFFSET value for the active hole. The
value changed will be displayed on the screen.
TEACH. DM - saves a new DMPOS value for the active hole. The value
changed will be displayed on the screen.
TEACH. ROT - the user turns the drilling unit to the desired ROT value,
which is then saved for the active hole. The value changed will be
displayed on the screen.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
CORR. ROT - the system first calculates a new ROT value that
corresponds to the change in the pivot point, based on the assumption that
the end point of the new hole is the same as that of the original hole. The
new ROT value is then saved and the value changed is displayed on the
screen.
EP
A
1. The planned drill hole cannot be drilled because of an obstruction (D) is

in the planned path of the hole (A).
2. Drilling module is moved to a new start position (C).
3. The planned rotation angle is recalculated (B) using CORR. ROT. so that
the end point (EP) of the new hole will be the same as it would have
been with the planned drill hole (A).
4.4 Collar pipe

This section describes how to set a hole as a collar pipe hole. This can be
done either when creating the drillplan, or by editing the active plan. Below
is shown how to set a hole as a collar pipe hole when creating the drillplan.
The procedure is the same for the case of the active plan.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.4.1 Setting a hole as a collar pipe hole

1. In the view that opens, press CREATE PLAN . Note that if active plan is
to be edited then select EDIT ACTIVE .
LEVEL : FAN :
STOPE : DATE :
DRIFT : TIME :

2. Select EDIT .
CREATE PLAN
COPY EDIT SAVE
PLAN HOLES PLAN
3. Select EDIT VALUES .

DEPTH : m

ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4. Select HOLE DEPTH .

DEPTH : 0.0 m

5. The following screen is shown. The hole is set as a collar pipe hole with
function TOGGLE CP . Press again to set the CP setting off.
SET DEPTH WITH KNOB
CP
1.3 METERS
TOGGLE TOGGLE GRADE GRADE

BT CP 1 0.1
Collar pipe status is shown in the drill plan display as follows:

CP- the collar pipe hole start position has not been taught to the system.
EDIT HOLE : 1 CP- ESC = Quit

DEPTH : 25.3 m <WAITING>
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
CP+ collar pipe hole start position has been taught to the system.
EDIT HOLE : 1 CP+ ESC = Quit

DEPTH : 25.3 m <WAITING>
4.4.2 Alignment of drilling module

STATUS : ON
BIT METERS : 54.0 M
BIT LIFE : 150.0 M

FAN HOLE FAN
2. Select ALIGN . The drilling unit will be positioned according to the values
of the hole shown in the upper left hand side of the display.

POS.
Other selections in the display:

STORE POS. stores the collar pipe location data for the selected hole in
the drill plan which is saved in the control system's memory; refer to
chapter 4.4.5 Teaching of the collar pipe hole position to the
system (Page 66).
NEXT selects next hole.
SAVE saves active fan values to a drill plan file.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.4.3 Drilling the collar pipe hole

Note! Collar pipe is drilled with a bit size larger than that used for
production drilling.
The collar pipe hole is drilled manually to the required depth.

4.4.4 Installing the collar pipe
A collar pipe of suitable size and diameter is inserted into the drilled collar
pipe hole.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.4.5 Teaching of the collar pipe hole position to the system

The position of the collar pipe hole is taught to the system by driving the
production bit inside the collar pipe to the depth at which hole depth count
will start.
STATUS : ON
BIT METERS : 54.0 M
BIT LIFE : 150.0 M

FAN HOLE FAN
2. Manually position the bit inside the collar pipe the press STORE POS. .
The hole values will be updated with the actual drilling module values.
The collar pipe status will be set to C+.

POS.
Pressing STORE POS. function causes the following values of the

currently selected hole of the active fan to be updated:
Hole depth count start position
Drilling module position
Rotation and tilt angles
Boom zoom position
Boom swing position
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
Hole depth zero position
A Drilling module
B Collar pipe holes
Before setting the collar pipe hole position the bit is positioned inside the
collar pipe at the level from which hole depth is to be counted (estimated
rock surface).
4.5 Multi flush possibility with the first rod / tube

This feature can used if extra flushing is needed with the starter tube/rod.
This feature implements a new fan phase COLLAR AND FLUSH which
takes place between FIND ROCK and COLLAR . In the COLLAR AND
FLUSH phase the hole is drilled to a specified user defined depth. After
this drilling is halted and feed is set to backward. With flushing and rotation
on the drill bit is drawn out of the hole. When the bit is out, feed is set to
forwards and with flushing and rotation on the drill bit is driven again to the
hole. This flushing sequence is done as many times as specified.
Multi flush consists of three parameters: flush depth, flush count and extra
pull.
Flush depth (1) defines the drilling depth after which drilling is halted and
flushing sequence starts.
Flush count defines how many times the flushing cycle is executed.
During flushing cycle only feed rotation and flushing is used. Percussion
is again set on a couple centimeters before the hole bottom is reached at
the end of the last flushing cycle.
Extra pull (2) defines the distance how much the drill bit is drawn out of
the hole during each flushing cycle.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
1
3
2
1 Multi flush depth

2 Extra pull
3 Rock contact
4.6 Drilling module home position and home position offset

The drilling module home position is the position to which the drilling
module is driven before starting positioning phase of fan automation. Home
position is selected in order to minimise the possibility of collision between
drilling module and frame during positioning.
Home position offset is the amount by which the home position is corrected
depending on rotation angle as follows:
1 2 3
1 Example position 1 Bit vertical up. Position to DM home position

+ home position offset
2 Example position 2 Bit vertical down. Position to DM home
position - home position offset
3 Example position 3 Bit horizontal. Position to DM home position.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.7 Depth mode

When drilling with a machine equipped with the fan automation option,
there are two options for measuring hole depth:
1. From rock surface hole depth is set to zero when rock is detected. This
is the default setting.
2. From pivot point reference level hole depth is measured from the pivot
point reference level. This method makes use of boom and drilling
module sensors, and starter tube length value, in addition to the rock
detect position. If for some reason a boom or drilling module sensor is
not working then this method should not be used.
2
1
4.8 Settings
The following settings are specific to fan automation:
STARTER TUBE Configure length of the first tube. First tube length value
is used when depth is calculated from the pivot point reference level ( see
also DEPTH MODE configuration ). Configure multiflush feature.
MULTIFLUSH Multiflush feature can be used if rock conditions are poor
during collaring ( for example soft rock, clay ).
BIT CHANGE Configure bit meter monitoring ON or OFF .
DM HOME Configure home position of drilling module and position offset.
Home position is the position to which the drilling module is driven before
starting positioning phase. Home position is selected in order to minimise
the possibility of collision between drilling module and frame during
positioning. Home position offset is the amount by which the home position
is corrected depending on rotation angle.
DEPTH MODE Configure reference position from which hole depth is
counted, either from rock surface or from pivot point level.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
COLLAR PIPE Configure use of flushing and rotation when moving

towards collar pipe.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.8.1 Starter tube length

Press the SET button on the Sandvik display to open following display.
If the first tube to be drilled is longer than the tubes in the cassette then this
must be specified to the system. The reasons why this information is
needed are as follows:
So that the rock drill is positioned correctly with the bit pulled fully in
before starting to position.
So that the depth calculation is correct if the depth is calculated from the
pivot point (see section 4.7 Depth mode (Page 69)).
1. Select FAN SET .
SETTINGS
DRILL FAN
SET SET
2. Select STARTER TUBE .

ESC=QUIT OPERATION
FAN SETTINGS
STARTER BIT DM NEXT
3. Select LENGTH
ESC = QUIT
STARTER TUBE
LENGTH MULTI
FLUSH
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4. The starter tube length display is shown in the figure:
STARTER TUBE LENGTH:
1.83 METERS

Note! Note that the minimum allowed value is the length of the current
tubes used.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.8.2 Multi flush

1. Select MULTI FLUSH .
ESC = QUIT
STARTER TUBE
LENGTH MULTI
FLUSH
2. Select FLUSH DEPTH . Rotate the wheel to set the flush depth setting.
20 CM
FLUSH FLUSH EXTRA

DEPTH COUNT PULL
Note! If flush count is set to zero, multi flush feature is disabled.

3. Select FLUSH COUNT . Rotate the wheel to set the amount of flushing
cycles.
2
FLUSH FLUSH EXTRA
DEPTH COUNT PULL
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4. Select EXTRA PULL . Rotate the wheel to set the extra pull distance.
10 CM
FLUSH FLUSH EXTRA

DEPTH COUNT PULL
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.8.3 Bit life monitoring

The bit life monitoring feature allows the operator to specify the maximum
drilled meters for bits. Automatic drilling will be halted and the rock drill is
pulled back to back end of the feed beam after the maximum allowed
meters for the bit have been drilled, and a message displayed to the
operator.
Press the SET button on the SANDVIK display to open following display.
1. Select FAN SET .
SETTINGS
DRILL FAN
SET SET
2. Select BIT CHANGE .

ESC=QUIT OPERATION
FAN SETTINGS
STARTER BIT DM NEXT
3. The BIT CHANGE SETTINGS display is shown in the next figure:

Selecting the ON option and giving the maximum allowed meters that
can be drilled with the bit before re-sharpening enables the bit change
feature.
BIT CHANGE SETTINGS

OK = ACCEPT , ESC = QUIT
150 METERS
ON OFF
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.8.4 Resetting drill bit meters

Press the ZERO SET button on the Sandvik display to open following
display .
1. Press the RESET BIT M. button.
SET ZERO
TUBE RESET END DEPTH
COUNT BIT M. FAN COUNT
2. Press OK button to reset the bit meters.
OK = RESET BIT METERS

ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.8.5 Bit meters reached display

Automated drilling is halted after the specified meters for the bit is
reached BIT LIFE, after which the BIT METERS REACHED display is
shown. This is also shown if the operator attempts to start fan automation
with current bit meters greater than the specified amount.
After changing the bit, the bit meters must be reset using the RESET BIT
M. option.
** BIT METERS REACHED **
CURR DEPTH : 23.4 M

PLAN DEPTH : 29.0 M
BIT METERS : 150.0 M
BIT LIFE : 150.0 M
.......ESC

CURR DEPTH - The current drilled depth for the hole defined from either
rock face or pivot point depending on which is selected.
PLAN DEPTH - The depth to be drilled to for the current hole.
BIT METERS - The number of meters drilled since last reset of bit
meters.
BIT LIFE - The specified maximum drill meters before sharpening of the
bit.
This screen is cleared from the display by pressing the ESC key. After this
operator will typically continue in one of the following ways:
Uncouple the tubes automatically using the UNCPL option or manually,
change the bit, reset the bit meters and put at least one tube back into
the hole manually. After this restart fan automation.
If the hole is almost complete continue with automatic drilling until the
hole is completed after which the tubes will be uncoupled automatically.
After the last tube has been uncoupled fan automation will be halted and
the operator will again be prompted to change the bit.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.8.6 Setting the home position of the drilling unit

Open the following display by pressing the SET button on the SANDVIK
display.
1. Select FAN SET.
SETTINGS
DRILL FAN
SET SET
2. Select DM HOME .
ESC=QUIT OPERATION
FAN SETTINGS
STARTER BIT DM NEXT
3. The following display opens. Change the desired value of the drilling unit
home position by turning the adjustment knob.

0.50 M
HOME POS.
POS. OFFSET
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.8.7 Depth mode

Press SET button on the SANDVIK display and then choose FAN
SETTINGS .
1. Select NEXT MENU .
ESC=QUIT OPERATION
FAN SETTINGS
STARTER BIT DM NEXT
2. Select DEPTH MODE.

ESC = QUIT
FAN SETTINGS
DEPTH COLLAR
MODE PIPE
3. The following display opens. Choose the desired method and press OK .
PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE REF
FOR DEPTH COUNT
OK = ACCEPT, ESC = QUIT

FROM FROM
ROCK PIVOT
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.8.8 Collar pipe

Press SET button on the SANDVIK display and then choose FAN
SETTINGS NEXT MENU .
1. Select COLLAR PIPE .
ESC = QUIT
FAN SETTINGS
DEPTH COLLAR
MODE PIPE
2. The following display opens. Choose the desired mode and press OK .
*COLLAR PIPE APPROACH MODE*
FLUSHING ROTATION
ON ON
TURN KNOB TO CHANGE THE MODE
4.9 Fan sensor calibration

In addition to the normal sensor calibrations required for one hole
automation, fan automation requires the calibration of the following
sensors:
Boom swing sensor
Drilling module position (DM POS SENSOR) sensor
Zoom linear sensor
Press the SPEC button on the SANDVIK display to open following display.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
1. Select the BASIC CALIBR .

ESC=QUIT OPERATION
SPECIALS
2. Enter the password and acknowledge with OK key. (If the password is
correct, the following display opens).
PSW?
3. Select the CAL. SENSOR .

CALIBRATION
CAL. CAL. CAL. CAL.
4. Select the CAL. FAN .

CAL SENSOR
CAL. CAL. CAL. CAL.
TILT ROT. FAN B . CHG
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
5. The following display is displayed.

CAL. FAN
SWING DM POS ZOOM
Calibration of the swing sensor follows the same procedure as for the tilt
sensor (see manual GUI-1 Control Panel chapter "Calibration of fan
automation rigs").
Calibration of the DM POS sensor and Zoom linear sensors follow the
same procedure as for the rock drill feed sensor (see manual GUI-1 Control
Panel chapter "Calibration of fan automation rigs").
4.10 Fan sensor fault finding

Press at GUI: SPEC button SERVICE TEST IO (No password
needed).
Press OK until the following screen is displayed:

Rear stinger S14 0
Zoom sensor B101 59
If a faulty sensor is suspected then raw sensor values can be checked from
these displays.
4.10.1 Sensor valid raw values
The stinger proximity switches have valid values of 1 (ON) / 0 (OFF).
The stinger pressure transmitters have a valid range of 204 (4 mA) to 1024
(20 mA) .
The Zoom sensor and DM pos sensors also have a valid range of 204 (4
mA) to 1024 (20 mA) .
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
4.10.2 Sensor calibrated values

In order to see the calibrated values of Zoom sensor and DM zoom sensor,
press OK until the following display is shown:

Linear/DM [mm/10] 2000
Linear/zoom [mm/10] 200
Rotation sensor 1 raw: -537
Rotation sensor 2 raw: 1347
Tilt sensor raw: 139
Swing sensor raw: 317
The calibrated values of DM zoom and boom zoom are shown using the
units used internally of mm/10.
In addition this display shows the angle of deflection sensors (rotation, tilt
and boom swing ) raw values.
4.11 How to skip a hole in the active fan

1. Go to the drill plan display
HOLE NUM :1 ESC = Quit
DEPTH : m <STATUS>

STATUS NEXT PLAN
Press the SET STATUS key until the status changes to SKIP.
4.12 How to skip an interrupted hole

If it is not possible to continue drilling of an interrupted hole, start
uncoupling with automatics. The tubes will be uncoupled and drilling will
continue with the next hole. If you uncouple the tubes manually, you can
restart fan automation as soon as there is only one tube left in the hole.
4.13 How to edit the drill plan during drilling or uncoupling

After drilling has started, press the PROG key and go to the EDIT ACTIVE
display. The active plan can now be edited as normal. Note however that
changes will not effect the hole that is currently being drilled. To change the
depth of the current hole, press the STOP button to interrupt the hole, edit
the hole depth, and then restart fan automation.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
5 TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1 Pivot point cannot be reached
Consider the situation where the zoom joint has been almost fully extended
during navigation as shown below:
A Zoom almost fully extended
B Not enough zoom movement left to reach hole pivot point
If, before positioning, the system calculates that either the boom zoom or
the boom swing will go into end stop before reaching the planned hole pivot
point, then the following alarm message will be displayed:
PIVOT POINT OUT OF RANGE
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
5.2 Boom zoom movement minimum length reached (zoom fully in)
Consider the situation where the navigation has been carried out with the
zoom joint almost fully in and the swing joint off the center position as
shown below:
A Zoom almost fully in at navigation
B Zoom position at hole position would have to be lower than fully in

position - zoom cannot position so that pivot point offset is reached
If the zoom position is too low, especially if the swing angle is significantly
greater than zero (greater than +/- 5 degrees) then there is the possibility
that the zoom position required to reach the pivot point position for some of
the holes will be less than the fully in position of the zoom. If this happens
then the system will not be able to position to the planned hole pivot point
offset.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
5.3 Potential for collision if distance between holes large

If there is a large pivot point movement between consecutive holes is large,
then the potential for collision with frame or with tunnel wall increases. It is
recommended that if the distance between consecutive holes along the
pivot point line is greater than 1m or angle difference is greater than 30
degrees then intermediate positions ( zero depth holes ) are defined.
Intermediate holes can be defined as follows, for example during the test
fan phase:
From edit display select the first hole
Use the insert hole feature to create a new zero depth hole
Drive the boom and drilling module to a suitable intermediate position
Using the store pos feature save the position to the new inserted hole.
No hole depth is given.
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
ID: BG00220350 en-US A.001.1 2014-05-26
www.sandvik.com

Jumbo Dl411

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationEQUIPO DE PERFORACIÓN SUBTERRÁNEA

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Jumbo Dl411

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Jumbo Dl411

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Original instructions

BG00221156 B.001.1 2014-02-24

GUI-1 Control panel

2 Safety and Environmental Instructions ...................... 3

3 Main components ..........................................................5

4 GUI-1 Control panel operation ..................................... 23

4.4.19 Fan settings .................................................................................55

5 Automatic drilling and uncoupling ..............................151

This page is intentionally left blank

2 SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS

This page is intentionally left blank

3.2 User interface

(1) SETTINGS (manual version)

FLUSH > SET FLUSHING

EXTRA SET. > EXTRA SET.

rotation and tilt angles of the feed (TMS D, DD, DDS)

If pressed from Sandvik display, info button shows the following

3.3 Display diagrams

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET- NUMBER OF TUBES IN USE:

One hole automation

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE MENU

SPECIALS INFO ZERO

TOGGLE GRADE GRADE GRADE

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

BASE ROT. ANTI- SET FLUSHING EXTRA SET.

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

FEED PRESSURE PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE MENU

TOGGLE GRADE GRADE GRADE

A PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

With FAN automation

CURRENT PLAN ESC = Main display

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE MENU

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE MENU SPEC SET

BIT CHANGE: ESC = Quit BIT METERS

SET DEPTH WITH KNOB AND START SETTINGS

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

UNCOUPLING DRILL SET

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

SET FLUSHING DRILL SET

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

3.3.1 Settings, system

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

ENGLISH USER SET SET SET SET SET

3.3.2 Special functions

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

CALIBRATE TILT CALIBRATE ROT.

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

CHOOSE POSITIVE DIRECTION CALIBRATE ROT.

DEGREES ESC=Cancel operation

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

PRESS MENU KEY TO CHOOSE SET-

HOLE DEPTH SETTING: m DATA LOG